iisiiSipil 
 
 BunK£%(nk ; ^ *j ».'-.> 
 
 g&i 
 
 
 ®Sti 
 
 ii 
 
[£ OWEN PHELAN, 3 
 
 > CHEAP BOOK STORE, <j 
 Sf And Dramatic Repository, | 
 R 57 Chatham Street, A". 1'. s 
 k Opposite Chamber St. Jj 
 
vCxcr ' 
 
 4ci 4- • %~ h ^ 
 
 5 -X , i$\. 
 
 
 . ■’ 
 
 
THE 
 
 CLASS-BOOK OF ANATOMY, 
 
 DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS, 
 
 EXPLANATORY OF THE 
 
 FIRST PRIN CIPLES 
 
 HUMAN MECHANISM 
 
 AS THE BASIS OF 
 
 PHYSICAL EDUCATION. 
 
 
 BY JEROME V. C. SMITH, M. D. 
 
 “ for I am fearfully and wonderfully made : ” 
 
 BOSTON: 
 ALLEN AND TICKNOR. 
 1834. 
 
5wu tfi- 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1834, 
 
 By Allen and Ticknor, 
 
 in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of Massachusetts, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The object of the following pages will be readily un- 
 derstood ; and should the work, in the hands of public 
 instructors, be instrumental in explaining to the young, 
 for whom it was designed, a general knowledge of their 
 own curious organization, it may lead to the adoption of 
 such habits in early life as will insure health in youth, 
 and intellectual vifror in aste. 
 
 O O 
 
 The questions interspersed through the book are far 
 from embracing all the subjects adverted to in the sev- 
 eral natural divisions of the text : — they are merely ex- 
 amples of the best mode of conducting the study, leav- 
 ing it entirely with the teacher to select such parts for 
 recitation as he may conceive most advisable. 
 
 Technical words have not been wholly avoided ; — 
 such as have been retained, are for the master, and not 
 for the pupil, to aid him in acquiring a more minute and 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 exact knowledge of the science, that he may be the bet- 
 ter prepared to assist those who are intrusted to his care. 
 
 Should the volume meet the approbation of those 
 who are devoted to the best interests of mankind, it will 
 not have been written in vain. 
 
 J. V. C. Smith. 
 
 Quarantine Ground, ) 
 
 Port of Boston. J 
 
 Jan. 1834. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 The Bones, — Osteology, .... 2 
 
 The Ligaments, — Syndesmology, ... 45 
 
 The Muscles, — Myology, .... 50 
 
 Apparatus of Joints, — Bursology, . • • H4 
 
 Fluids, — Angiology, ..... 115 
 
 The Nerves, — Neurology, ..... 153 
 
 The Senses, ....... 1?5 
 
 The Ear, ...••••• 
 
 The Ete, ....... 205 
 
 Feeling, or Touch, 240 
 
 Smelling, ...... - 240 
 
 Tasting, . . • • • • 241 
 
 The Glands, — Adenology, .... 242 
 
 The Viscera, — Splanchnology, .... 258 
 
 The Fluids, — Hygrology, ..... 269 
 
 The Skin, ....... 272 
 
 j 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 ' W ( 
 
 ■ 
 
 .• • , • 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Anatomy is a useful science, which explains the nature, 
 office, and structure of every part of the human body. 
 
 From remote antiquity, men of learning and persevering 
 industry have labored to comprehend and explain the 
 complicated machinery of man, but at no period has the 
 subject been better understood than at the present. By 
 the study of this science, the condition of the species has 
 been ameliorated ; extreme sufferings have been avoided ; 
 and in the aggregate, human life has been prolonged. 
 
 On the minds of youth the influence exerted by a con- 
 templation of their own physical condition, founded on a 
 general knowledge of the situation and functions of the 
 different organs, must certainly have a beneficial tendency. 
 As they discover the exact regularity of parts ; the beauty 
 and harmony resulting from particular combinations of 
 machinery, endowed with a high degree of vitality, on the 
 action of which, health, life, and happiness, are constantly 
 depending, surely, it would be strange indeed if they did 
 not fall, in humble adoration before that Supreme Intelli- 
 gence which created, and which sustains them in ex- 
 istence. 
 
 1 
 
2 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Comparative anatomy, implies a dissection of the infe- 
 rior animals, as birds, fishes, reptiles and even plants, in 
 order to demonstrate, analogically, the functions of similar 
 apparatus in man. This is an exceedingly useful pursuit, 
 and though philosophers have apparently been guilty of 
 unnecessary cruelties, it was not from a desire of gratify- 
 ing a malevolent disposition ; — on the contrary, all their 
 researches have had reference to relieving mankind from 
 some of those manifold evils, to which the splendid me- 
 chanical organization of the frame is predisposed. 
 
 ANATOMY IS DIVIDED INTO NINE PARTS. 
 
 Os-te-ol-o-gy, which treats 
 Syn-des-mol-o-gy, “ 
 My-ol-ogy. 
 
 Bur-sal-o-gy, 
 
 Ati-gi-ol-o-gy , 
 
 A-den-ol-o-gy, 
 Splaneh-nol-o-gy, 
 
 Hyg-rol-o-gy, 
 
 of the bones. 
 
 “ ligaments. 
 
 “ muscles. 
 
 “ apparatus of joints, 
 
 of vessels, as veins and arteries, 
 of the glands. 
 
 “ viscera, as the stomach, &c. 
 “ fluids, as the blood, bile &c. 
 
 OSTEOLOGY. 
 
 All the bones, in manhood, are hard, and almost insen- 
 sible, being composed of earth and lime, held together by 
 means of gelatin, a kind of glue, secreted by appropriate 
 vessels. The substance of the long bones, as, for exam- 
 ple, those of the limbs, are compact, excepting at their 
 extremities, where they become irregularly larger, and 
 slightly spongy. They are classed in the following man- 
 ner : — 
 
 r 1. Cylindrical, — bones, as in the arms. 
 
 <2. Flat, — bones, as in the shoulder blades. 
 
 (. 3. Irregular, — bones, as the ribs and those of the skull. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 3 
 
 THEY ARE FURTHER SUBDIVIDED INTO, 
 
 First, — hollow bones, possessing marrow. 
 
 Second, — flat bones, or those destitute of marrow. 
 
 Before arriving at about the age of twenty, the ends of 
 the bones are considerably spongy, and imperfectly united 
 to the main shaft, — and, therefore, termed epiphises, from 
 two Greek words, meaning to grow upon, but afterwards, 
 they become firmly united. 
 
 The names of a majority of the bones are very arbitrary ; 
 some of them, however, have their appellation from a fan- 
 cied resemblance to some object ; others, are named from 
 their shape, connexion, or supposed, or real use. 
 
 Every cavity, hole, or prominence, even to the burden 
 of the science, has also a name, — a knowledge of which 
 is a key to the parts, either directly in contact, or lying in 
 the immediate vicinity. 
 
 Protuberances are termed processes, and are generally 
 the points of attachment for muscles or ligaments; — the 
 first being the moving power, and the latter, the bands 
 which keep the ends of any two bones in juxtaposition. 
 
 A natural skeleton is one, the bones of which are held 
 together by the original ligaments. Remarkable speci- 
 mens of these kinds of preparations are common in mu- 
 seums, and cabinets of curiosities. 
 
 An artificial skeleton, is one, the individual bones of 
 which are united together by wires. 
 
 In the human skeleton, there are two hundred and fifty- 
 two separate bones. Those who labor hard, have some- 
 times an extra number, which form near the joints of the 
 thumb, fore finger, and toes. They are called sesamoids, 
 from their resemblance to the seed of the Sesamum plant. 
 They are useful in increasing the power of the muscles 
 wherever they grow. 
 
Dentes 
 
 4 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 THE SKELETON IS DIVIDED INTO 
 
 First, — the head. 
 
 Second, — the trunk. 
 
 Third, — the extremities. 
 
 FIRST DIVISION. 
 
 There are fifty-five bones entering into the composition 
 of the head, by including thirty-two teeth. 
 
 EIGHT BONES IN THE SICULL. 
 
 One os frontis, — above the eyes, constituting the forehead. 
 
 Two ossa parietaiia, — making the sides, above the ears. 
 
 Two ossa temporum, — or temple bones. 
 
 One os ethmoides, — or sieve-like bone, lying between the brain 
 and root of the nose. 
 
 One os sphenoides, — being the bottom of the skull, nearly 
 concealed. 
 
 One os oceipitis, — at the lower and back part of the head. 
 
 FOURTEEN BONES IN THE FACE. 
 
 Two ossa maxillaria superiora, — the two making the upper jaw. 
 Two ossa malaruin, — or prominent cheek bones. 
 
 Two ossa nasi, — one each side, making the arch of the nose. 
 
 Two ossa lachrymalia, — just within the angle of the orbit of 
 the eye. 
 
 Two ossa palatina, — in the back part of the roof of the mouth. 
 Two ossa turbinata, — within the nostrils. 
 
 One os vomer, — the partition in the centre of the nose. 
 
 One os maxillare inferius, — the under jaw. 
 
 THIRTY-TWO TEETH. 
 
 Eight incissores, — front, or cutting teeth ; — four in each jaw. 
 
 Four cuspidate?, — eye teeth, two above and two below. 
 Eightbicuspides, — or small double teeth, with two cutting points. 
 Eight molares, — grinding teeth. 
 
 Four sapienti®, — wisdom teeth. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 5 
 
 IN THE TONGUE. 
 
 One os hyoides, — shaped like a capital U, and situated at the under 
 and back surface of the under jaw, and above the protuberance 
 of the throat. 
 
 Four concealed bones of the ear, collectively termed, 
 ossicula auditus. 
 
 Two mallei, malleus, — faintly resembling a mallet. 
 
 Two incudes, incus, — or the anvil shaped bone of the ear. 
 
 Two stapedes, stapes, or stirup, — almost a fac simile of the stirup 
 of a saddle. 
 
 T wo orbicularia, — or round bones, but considerably smaller than 
 a mustard seed, and the smallest bones of the skeleton. 
 
 SECOND DIVISION. 
 
 FIFTY-FOUR BONES OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 The spine, or back bone, is constructed of twenty-four 
 blocks, called vertebrae, — of which there are 
 f Seven cervical vertebras, — or joints in the neck. 
 
 1 Twelve dorsal vertebrae, — or joints in the back. 
 
 J Five lumbar vertebrae, — being larger joints," in the loins or 
 f small of the back. 
 
 TWENTY-FIVE BONES IN THE CHEST, OR THORAX. 
 
 One sternum, — or breast bone. 
 
 Twenty-four costae, — or ribs, the seven uppermost are the true, 
 and the five lowest, false, or floating. 
 
 FIVE BONES OF THE PELVIS. 
 
 Two ossa innominate, — or nameless, being the broad hip bones. 
 One os sacrum, — being the foundation on which the spinal 
 column rests, of a pyramidical figure, with its base upward. 
 Two ossa coccygis, — the extreme lowest point of the sacrum. 
 
 SIXTY-FOUR BONES OF THE UPPER EXTREMITIES. 
 
 In the C Two claviculce, — collar bones, 
 shoulders ( Two scapula, — shoulder blades. 
 
 1 * 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 In the arms, two ossa humeri, — between the shoulder and elbow. 
 In the ( Two ulna, — on the under side of the fore arm. 
 fore arm, ( Two radii, — on the upper edge. 
 
 the hand is divided into 
 The carpus, — or wrist. 
 
 The metacarpus, — palm of the hand. 
 
 The phalanges, — bones of the fingers. 
 
 Os naviculare,— boat shaped bone, 2 
 
 Os lunare, — moon shaped bone. 2 
 
 Os cuneiforme, — wedge shaped bone. 2 
 
 Os orbiculare, — round, or nearly so, bene. 2 
 
 Os trapezium, — a geometrical figure. 2 
 
 Os trapezoides, — resembling the last bone. 2 
 
 l Os magnum, — so called because the largest. 2 
 
 ' Os unciforme, — being hooked. 2 
 
 Ossa metacarpi, — ten metacarpal bones, or roots of the fingers 
 constituting the palms. Five in each hand. 
 
 In the fingers — twenty-eight phalanges, — finger bones. 
 
 Ossa carpi, or 
 wrist bones, 
 eight in each 
 wrist. 
 
 SIXTY BONES OF THE INFER10H EXTREMITIES. 
 
 In the thighs, two ossa femoris, — thigh bones. 
 
 In the leg, two patella, — knee pans. 
 
 two fibula, — outside bones of the leg. 
 two tibia, — or shin bones. 
 
 THE FOOT IS DIVIDED INTO 
 First, — tarsus, — or instep. 
 
 Second, — metatarsus, — foundation bones of the toes. 
 Third, — phalanges, — the bones of the toes. 
 
 Os calcis, — heel bone. 
 
 Os astro galas, — making part of the ankle joint. 
 Os cuboides, — square bone. 
 
 Os naviculare, — boat shaped bone. 
 
 Ossa cuneiformia, — wedge shaped. 
 
 Ossa metatarsi, — five bones, foundation of the toes. 
 
 In the toes of each foot, fourteen bones, or phalanges, — 
 Eight bones, the sesamoidts, in the thumbs and 
 great toes, though not always constant. Total. 
 
 Ossa tarsi 
 or instep. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 28 
 
 25 2 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 7 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 A front view of the male 
 skeleton. 
 
 HEAD AND NECK. 
 
 а. The frontal bone. 
 
 б, The parietal bone. 
 
 c, The temporal bone, 
 
 d, A portion of the sphenoid 
 
 bone. 
 
 e, The nasal bone. 
 
 f The malar, or cheek bones. 
 
 g, The superior maxillary, or 
 
 upper jaw. 
 
 h, The lower jaw. 
 
 i, The bones of the neck. 
 
 TRUNK. 
 
 a, The twelve bones of the 
 
 back. 
 
 b, The five bones of the loins. 
 
 c, d, The breast bone. 
 e,f, The seven true ribs. 
 
 g, g , The five false ribs. 
 
 h, The rump bone, or sacrum. 
 
 i, The hip benes. 
 
 UPPER EXTREMITY. 
 
 а. The collar bone. 
 
 б, The shoulder blade. 
 
 c, The upper arm bone. 
 
 d, The radius. 
 
 e, The ulna. 
 
 /, The carpus, or wrist. 
 
 g, The botips of the hand. 
 
 h, 1st row of finger bones. 
 
 i, 2nd row of finger bones. 
 le, 3d row of finger bones. 
 
 /, The bones ol the thumb. 
 
 LOWER EXTREMITY. 
 
 а. The thigh bone. 
 
 б, The knee pan. 
 
 c, The tibia, or large bone of 
 
 the leg. 
 
 d, The fibula, or small boDe 
 
 of the leg. 
 
 e, The heel_ bone. 
 
 /, The bones ol the instep. 
 
 g, The bones of the foot. 
 
 h, The first row of toe bones. 
 
 i, The second row of toe 
 
 bones. 
 
 k, The third row ol toe bones. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 J1 back view of the male 
 skeleton. 
 
 THE HEAD. 
 
 a, The parietal bone. 
 
 b, The occipital bone. 
 
 c, The temporal bone. 
 
 d, The cheek bone. 
 
 e, The lower jaw bone. 
 
 NECK AND TRUNK. 
 
 a, The bones-of the neck. 
 
 b, The bones of the back. 
 
 c, The bones of the loins. 
 
 d, The hip bone. 
 
 e, The sacrum. 
 
 UPPER EXTREMITY. 
 
 d a. The collar bone. 
 
 b, The blade bone. 
 
 c, The upper bone of the 
 
 arm. 
 
 i 6 d, The radius. 
 
 V e, The ulna. 
 
 Jb f, The bones of the wrist. 
 
 i g, The bones of the hand. 
 
 /q h. The first row of finger 
 
 bones. 
 
 i, The second row of finger 
 bones. 
 
 k, The third row of finger 
 
 bones. 
 
 l, The bones of the thumb. 
 
 LOWER EXTREMITY. 
 
 a, The thigh bone. 
 
 b, The large bone of the 
 
 leg. 
 
 c, The small bone of the 
 
 leg. 
 
 d, The heel bone. 
 
 e, The bones of the instep. 
 
 f, The bones of the toes. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 9 
 
 THE CONNEXION OF BONES. 
 
 When united with one another, in a way to admit of 
 motion, the union is termed diartlirosis. Bones united in 
 a manner admitting of no motion at all, are said to be 
 connected by synarthrosis. And when they are joined by 
 the intervention of any substance, it is called a union by 
 symphysis. 
 
 The round head of the thigh bone, rolling in its deep 
 socket, is an example of the moveable connexion, or 
 diarthrosis. All the bones of the head present a union 
 by synarthrosis. In the racking, or twisting motion of 
 the vertebra of the spine, we find an illustration of the 
 last division ; between every two bones, there is an elastic 
 substance to keep them from coming in contact; this is 
 symphysis. 
 
 STRUCTURE. 
 
 All the large, round bones, particularly of the arms and 
 legs, are hollow, for two purposes, — viz. 1st, because 
 they are stronger for being hollow; and secondly, they 
 are store-houses. The marrow is not placed in the cavi- 
 ties to keep the bones from being brittle, but to supply the 
 system with food when the stomach cannot, or does not 
 perform its digestive office. 
 
 During a long course of sickness, we take little or no 
 food; — but as nutriment must be provided, to keep a 
 proper quantity of blood in existence, — where does it 
 come from? Under such circumstances, the marrow, 
 which has been in store from the hour of birth, for such 
 an emergency, is now carried from the bones and convert- 
 ed into blood. When that has been exhausted, then the 
 fat, wherever it exists, is next taken, — till tira body be- 
 comes almost a skeleton. 
 
 This is the reason a sick person becomes poor and lean. 
 A scanty supply of food, leads to the same result, hence 
 
10 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 horses and other animals are poor, because they are partly 
 nourished, by converting a part of their own bodies into 
 food. As soon as the stomach is abundantly supplied 
 again, and is able to pursue its accustomed labor, the 
 marrow and fat, which were borrowed, are all returned 
 and packed precisely as they were before. 
 
 BONES or THE SKULL. 
 
 The head is divided, in the first place, into cranium and 
 face. 
 
 It is a curious fact, that no two heads are shaped pre- 
 cisely alike; indeed, there is nearly as much diversity 
 in this respect, as there are expressions of the face. 
 During the early periods of infancy, the bones are so 
 flexible, that the skull may be moulded into various forms, 
 without injury to the brain. Many barbarous nations, 
 from immemorial time, have practised the art of changing 
 the natural shape of the heads of their children, either to 
 give them some characteristic of the tribe to which they 
 belong, or to render them more beautiful, according to 
 their rude conceptions of that quality. Observation on 
 the natural differences presented in the skull, first gave 
 rise to the study of craniology, which was refined upon, 
 till it has finally resulted in the modern science of phre- 
 nology. 
 
 Calvaria , is a term to express the top, or convexity of 
 the head. The forehead is the sinciput, and the back 
 part, the occiput. 
 
 forehead. — Os frontis. 
 
 Havingjremarked that the skull is composed of eight 
 bones, it is only necessary to describe them individually, 
 in a very general manner. The os frontis is a single 
 bone in the adult, though in infancy it was in two pieces. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 11 
 
 Though thin and delicate, it is in two plates, whose flat 
 surfaces have between them a porous space, called diploe, 
 where the blood vessels are safely lodged for nourishing 
 it. Over each eye, it throws out a protuberance, marked 
 by the eyebrows ; — and within the orbit, a thin sheet- 
 like process juts backward, to support the brain from 
 pressing-on the globe of the eye. Between the two plates, 
 on a vertical line with the nose, and just between the 
 arched ridges, the two plates recede from each other, so 
 far as to leave a large cavity, — the frontal sinus, which 
 freely communicates with the two nostrils, although a par- 
 tition, extends from the nose up through the chamber. On 
 this apartment, seems to depend the strength of the voice. 
 
 Fig. 3 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 3. 
 Front view of the single 
 bone constituting the fore- 
 head : a, a, mark the place of 
 the frontal sinus, or vocal 
 cavity : b , the temporal 
 
 ridge; c, the nasal process, 
 where the bones of the nose 
 are joined ; e, e, the external 
 angular processes f, f, the 
 orbitar plates, above the eye, 
 to sustain the brain. 
 
 It is a drum-barrel, in effect, being for the purpose of 
 reverberating the sound, by which its sonorous power is 
 increased. While suffering from a severe cold, the char- 
 acter of the voice is changed, and it is usual to remark 
 the person talks through the nose. This alteration, how- 
 ever, is to be imputed to the closing up of the passage, 
 between the nose and sinus, which wholly prevents the 
 sound from penetrating the only spot in which its volume 
 
12 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 or tone can be increased. Snuff takers, by the practice 
 of a vile habit, very much impair, and in protracted cases, 
 completely ruin their voices, by obstructing the canal. 
 
 wall, or parietal bones. — Ossa parietalia. 
 
 These are on one side convex, and concave on the 
 other, and of a square figure. They lie on each side of 
 the head, above the ears, and sustain the office of walls : 
 small holes are discoverable through one or both of them, 
 through which veins return blood to the great canal with- 
 in the skull. 
 
 occipital bone. — Os occipitis. 
 
 Of all the cranial bones, this is the strongest, thickest, 
 and most compact. It needs to be so, inasmuch as many 
 large muscles on the back of the neck, are inserted into 
 it. Its shape is very much like a skimmer, having one 
 large hole in it, about an inch in diameter, through which 
 the spinal marrow passes out from the brain, on its pass- 
 age down the spine, — hereafter to be noticed. After 
 these remarks, it will be inferred that its locality is at the 
 back and lower part of the skull. 
 
 WEDGE, OR SPHENOID BONE. Os SpllCTloidcS. 
 
 Being entirely concealed, unless the skull is turned 
 bottom upwards, some difficulty is found in learni ng its re- 
 lations. Nearly ail writers have compared it to a bat, 
 with wide spread wings. Through it, many nerves and 
 vessels pass out ; particularly the optic nerves, and those 
 which supply the teeth, often so painful, in the under jaw. 
 
 TEMPLE, OR TEMPORAL BONES. QsSd tcmporum. 
 
 On these bones, there being one on each side, the 
 ears are fixed. They stand between the os f runtis , parietal 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 13 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 4. 
 a the thin squamous portion 
 of the temporal bone, joining the 
 skull, on a line with the top of the 
 ear; 6, the zygomatic process, 
 which meets the cheek bone ; c, 
 a cavity in which the lower jaw 
 is articulated ; d, the external 
 opening of the ear; e, (h e styloid 
 process ; f, the vaginal process ; 
 g, the mastoid process. 
 
 and sphcenoid bones, — reaching a little way up the tem- 
 ple. In one part of these irregularly shaped bones, the 
 splendid apparatus of the organ of hearing is contained, 
 which will be fully explained in the proper place. Here 
 is one quite prominent process, called the mastoid, which 
 may be felt behind the ear, to which the muscle is fixed 
 that brings the head forward, as in bowing. 
 
 sieve, on ethmoid noNE. — Os ctlimoides. 
 
 Because it is perforated with many holes, like the top 
 of a pepper-box, or sieve, it has received its present name. 
 It lies horrizontallv, on a level with the eyes, — being 
 over the nose, and has the front lobes of the brain resting 
 upon it. Through the numerous orifices, fine threads of 
 nerves, the olfactories, pass into the nasal cavities, to 
 constitute the sense of smelling. 
 
 SEAMS OF THE HEAD, OR SUTURES. 
 
 All the bones of the head are interlocked by ragged 
 edges, called sutures. When one over-laps another, as in 
 the case of a part of the temporal, over the parietal bone, 
 it is termed a false suture. All the true sutures are zig- 
 zag lines, seen on the top and sides of the head. 
 
14 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 One of these lines, reaching from one ear to the other, 
 over the top of the skull, is the coronal suture, — so called 
 because an ornament was placed there, by the ancients. 
 The os frontis meets the ends of the parietal bones to 
 make this suture. 
 
 On the back of the head, the occipital bone is united to 
 a portion of the temple, and the wall bones, by the lamb- 
 doidal suture, — which has its name from its resemblance 
 to the Greek letter L. 
 
 Between the parietal, or wall bones, exactly on the 
 highest point of the arch of the skull, on a line with the 
 nose, and, consequently, equidistant from both ears, is the 
 sagittal suture, — taking its name from a fanciful resem- 
 blance to an arrow, lying between the bow and string. 
 
 There are several other sutures, but it is not very im- 
 portant to be particular in their description. At birth, the 
 pieces composing the head, are small, and imperfectly 
 formed. As we increase in growth, the bones also in- 
 crease in circumference, till their edges finally meet and 
 form the suture. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 5. 
 
 a, a, the coronal suture ; 
 
 b, sagittal suture ; c, the 
 lainbdoidal suture; d, d, 
 ossa triquetra, small, rag- 
 ged bones, occasionally 
 iound in some skulls, lying 
 in the last mentioned su- 
 ture; e, e, portions of the 
 temporal bone, overlapping 
 the walls. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 15 
 
 When infants labor under a dropsy of the brain, the 
 accumulation of water is often so great, that the head of 
 the poor child is enormously enlarged. Such a vast col- 
 lection could not be contained in the head, if the bones 
 had been united. Being only slightly attached at differ- 
 ent places, or, perhaps, not at -all, the membranes on the 
 inside, are put upon the stretch, and the bones offering no 
 resistance, are actually pressed out of place. An enlarge- 
 ment of the head never takes place, after the sutures are 
 formed, though there may be a collection of water in the 
 cavities of the brain. 
 
 In preparing the skulls of animals for a cabinet, the 
 mode of opening the seams oi sutures, that the shape of 
 each bone may be seen, it is usual to fill them with dry 
 beans, perfectly full, and after having been placed in warm 
 water, they swell and pry the whole apart. 
 
 From infancy to the tenth and twelfth year, the sutures 
 are imperfect ; but from that time, to thirty-five and forty, 
 they are distinctly marked ; but in old age, they are near- 
 ly obliterated. 
 
 Blows should by no means be given children on the 
 head, either by the hand, as in boxing the ears, or by sticks, 
 ferrules, and the like relics of the old and obsolete mode 
 of school-government. The entire character and destiny 
 of a child may be altered by a rap on its half-formed skull. 
 It is not only exceedingly dangerous, but criminal, to be 
 instrumental in giving a blow that may produce such im- 
 portant changes in the brain. 
 
 THE BONES OF THE FACE. 
 
 For the sake of order, these are separated in those 
 constituting the upper and lower jaw. A minute descrip- 
 tion of the thirteen bones of the upper jaw, would be fatigu- 
 ing, and altogether unnecessary ; yet some of the princi. 
 
l(i 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS COOK. 
 
 pal characteristics of a few of them, will assist the student 
 in obtaining a more exact knowledge of other parts. 
 
 upper jaw bones. — Ossa maxillaria svperiora. 
 
 Many irregularly shaped small bones are united to the 
 upper jaw, — as the palate, vomer, c. The upper jaw 
 is in two pieces, on the arch of which are situated the 
 teeth, in pits, called alveolar sockets, because they some- 
 what resemble the cells of honeycomb. Just above the 
 angles of the mouth a hard protuberance is felt, where 
 the cheek bone is met by it, which is hollow. Nearly 
 half an ounce of fluid is sometimes secreted in it, in cases 
 of severe inflammation, arising from diseases of the teeth. 
 Not unfrequently the roots of the eye-teeth protrude quite 
 into it. The name of this cavity is antrum. Its use, in 
 common with the one described in the os frontis, is to as- 
 sist in strengthening the voice. 
 
 cheek bones. — Ossa malarum. 
 
 These stand between the last mentioned protuberance 
 and the outer angle of the eye, contributing to the forma- 
 tion of the orbits. 
 
 bones of the nose. — Ossa nasi. 
 
 Two bones, which are merely convex, slender pieces, 
 about an inch in length, meeting in the middle, form an 
 arch, which thus enables the nose to resist hard blows. 
 The partition is one bone, vomer, so called from its re- 
 semblance to a ploughshare. Sometimes it is twisted 
 more towards one side than the other, — giving a crooked 
 or one sided nose, which materially influences the ex- 
 pression of the face. 
 
 Within each nostril, there are two distinct bones, called 
 turbinated, because rolled up like the folds of a turban, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 17 
 
 but far more like a roll of parchment. They are thin and 
 porous, and wound up in the manner we find them, to oc- 
 cupy less room. On them is spread out the olfactory 
 nerves, in the form of a gossamer-web. By this contriv- 
 ance, surface is gained, without occupying too much space. 
 The turbinated bones in a dog’s, lion’s, or tiger’s nose, 
 were it possible to spread them, would present a broad 
 surface, it is supposed, equal to several square feet; — but 
 by being rolled, like a scroll, they can be packed in the 
 narrow canal of the nostril. Man, not being designed to 
 be dependant,- particularly on the sense of smelling, has 
 small internal nasal bones : — quadrupeds, however, are 
 wholly guided in the search and choice of food, by this 
 sense ; hence the complicated apparatus, so much superi- 
 or to our own. These turbinated bones are liable to dis- 
 ease, and are the seat of tumors called polypus of the 
 nose. 
 
 tear bones. — Ossa Lachrymalia. 
 
 There is one in each orbit, the size of the finger nail, — 
 having a groove to conduct the tears into the nose. 
 
 palate bones. — Ossa palatina. 
 
 Quite on the back part of the roof of the mouth, these 
 jut backward, towards the throat, having, in life, a cur- 
 tain or valve suspended to them, which prevents fluids 
 from rushing into the nose, in the act of drinking. Usual- 
 ly, accompanying the misfortune of hare lip, these bones 
 are wanting, — which accounts for the want of distinct 
 articulate sounds, in such persons. 
 
 lower jaw bone. — Os maxillare inferiora. 
 
 All that is particularly interesting in this bone, will be 
 discovered in the plate, in which a vast many muscles will 
 2 * 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 IS 
 
 be seen, connected with it. There is a canal, the size of 
 a knitting needle, running through it, from one angle to 
 the other, traversed by a nerve that gives a twig to the fang 
 of each tooth, as it passes along. y\n artery also makes 
 the same circuit, supplying the teeth with blood. 
 
 BON F. OF THE TONGUE. Os llXjoidtS. 
 
 It is situated in the muscles of the neck, quite in the 
 upper and back part of the throat ; its existence would 
 hardly be suspected, were it not felt by pressing with the 
 thumb and finger. 
 
 Fig. G. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. G. 
 b, merely indicates the places where the 
 arms, or processes ot this bone, are united to 
 the body, a, a, the arms. 
 
 Its shape is much like the under jaw, or the letter U, — - 
 having the diameter of a dollar. Besides being the origin 
 of the tongue, moving up and down, as the tongue is 
 moved, it serves another important office, of keeping the 
 mouth of the windpipe open, like a hoop in the mouth of 
 a sac. 
 
 BONES OF THE EAR. Ossicilhl auditis , 
 
 Each of these, the malleus, incus, stapes, and os orbicula - 
 re, are minutely described in the article on the sense of 
 hearing. 
 
 BONES OF THE SPINE. Vertebra. 
 
 Twenty-four bones, similar in shape, but varying in size, 
 laid one above the other, are collectively called the spine. 
 Processes, or arms, extend out on each side, on a line with 
 the limbs; and one projecting backward, is the spinous 
 process, which gives the name to the whole chain. These 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 19 
 
 points are the levers, by which the muscles move the 
 whole, as a column. No one vertebra can be turned on its 
 axis, but the entire series admit of a twisting movement, 
 as demonstrated in all the attitudes which the body as- 
 sumes. On the backside of the body of the blocks, the 
 union of the three arms forms a ring, — and the twenty- 
 four, present a canal, through which the spinal marrow 
 passes down, giving off nerves between every two bones, 
 to go to the ribs and muscles on the sides. 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 7. 
 
 This shows the connexion 
 of the blocks or vertebrae, 
 constituting the backbone, or 
 spine. All the lines, indicat- 
 ed by figures, from 1 to 24, 
 indicate nerves, which come 
 out between the bones, from 
 the spinal marrow. Fig. 9 is 
 the place of the stomach ; 20, 
 15 the liver; 24, the kidneys; 
 
 18, the spleen ; 23, the mem- 
 9 brane, around the border of 
 17 which, the intestines adhere ; 
 
 11 and 12 is the bone called 
 1 9 os sacrum, which, by being 
 prolonged in quadrupeds, is 
 the tail. Man, being upright, 
 the bone is short, and curved, 
 and thus holds up the organs, 
 which, by their weight, 
 13 would otherwise have a ten- 
 dency to fall through the bot- 
 tom of the pelvis. 
 
 t- 
 
 12 
 
20 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Those of the neck are less confined than those of the 
 
 back or loins, in consequence of the processes being more 
 horizontal; otherwise there would be an inability to car- 
 ry the head towards either shoulder. 
 
 Between these vertebras, there is an intervening sub- 
 stance exceedingly elastic, convexed on both sides, — be- 
 ing thick in the centre, and thin at the edges, which are 
 analogous to cushions, to prevent a sudden jar in our 
 movements. These are the intervertebral substance, rath- 
 er compressible, yet elastic. After being in an erect po- 
 sition considerable time, the superincumbent weight 
 presses them down thinner, — so that a person is shorter at 
 night, after fatigue in walking, than in the morning, after 
 the intervertebral pieces have restored themselves to their 
 original condition. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 8. 
 
 This is an accurate drawing of one 
 of the bones of the spine, at the 
 neck : a, is the body of the bone ; 
 b, the spinous process, or handle, 
 which gives the name of spine to 
 the whole column ; c, c, the trans- 
 verse processes , to which the mus 
 cles adhere, producing motion ; d, 
 d, round holes through the arms of 
 the bone, for safely lodging an ar- 
 tery, which carries blood to the 
 brain; e, e, the upper, and f,f, 
 the under surfaces, which make ajoint with the blocks above and be- 
 low it ; g, the hole through which the spinal marrow, or pith of the 
 back, passes, in safety from the head, through the whole chain, of 
 twenty-four vertebra. 
 
 A person becomes round shouldered, as the expression 
 is, in consequence of' the elasticity of the front edge of 
 these pads being overcome. A permanent stoop or bend 
 of the back is the result. Old age, also gradually 
 weakens the elastic power, and therefore aged men are 
 often crooked, infirm and shorter, than in their youth. 
 Distortions of the body, producing deformity, are refera- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 21 
 
 ble to the want of spring, or proper elasticity in these 
 cushions. 
 
 The topmost of all the bones of the spine, is called the 
 atlas, because it supports the head, as Atlas was fabled to 
 support the globe. It is a ring of bone, without a body, 
 which distinguishes it from all below it. With the skull, 
 it forms a joint, allowing the head to move forward and 
 backward, but in no other manner. 
 
 Joining the atlas, is the dentatus, or tooth-like bone, 
 having its name from the resemblance w'hich a particular 
 portion of it bears to a tooth. In a full grown man, the 
 process is about half an inch high, above the body of the 
 bone, — and smooth, jutting up into the atlas. Around 
 this pivot, the head rolls. If, by any sudden jerk, the head 
 is thrown too violently back or forward, the dentatus may 
 be forced from its place, — which would be a dislocation, 
 or breaking of the neck, in popular language. When 
 criminals are executed by hanging, the process is common- 
 ly torn from its place, presses on the spinal marrow, 
 which, on its way down the back, passes by the side of it, 
 and death immediately ensues. 
 
 All the remaining twenty-two separate bones, of which 
 the spine is constructed, are called, simply, vertebrae. 
 
 RIBS AND BONES OF THE CHEST — CostCB. 
 
 Twentyfour ribs, seven of which are in contact with 
 the spine, behind, and the breast bone in front, form the 
 thorax or chest. Each of the ribs has a regular joint, to 
 allow the chest to be enlarged and diminished, in breath- 
 ing : — a vulgar notion exists that males have one rib less 
 than females, — ow'ing to the circumstance of one of them 
 having been taken from the sideof Adam, for the creation 
 of woman : — the number is exactly alike in both sexes. 
 
22 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 .breast bone — Sternum. 
 
 The sternum, or breast bone in the front wall of the 
 chest, is narrow, and spongy, not far from an inch and 
 quarter wide and ten inches long, — reaching from the 
 throat to the pit of the stomach. 
 
 Several pieces of bone are joined together to constitute 
 it, — but the lowest point, which is flexible, is the most 
 interesting. It can be felt with the hand. It is float- 
 ing, as it were, in the flesh, being flexible and yielding 
 to pressure, As we advance in years, it becomes os- 
 sified, — and if distorted or forced from its natural place 
 in youth, produces the most painful and alarming conse- 
 quences in age. 
 
 If, for example, a person when seated, bends the body 
 habitually forward, it eventually bends the point of the 
 sternum inward, where it will finally remain. The conse- 
 quence is, — the capacity of the chest is diminished, and 
 diseases of the lungs, among a catalogue of other maladies, 
 may result from it. Children should be warned of this 
 liability to disease, before a habit is formed that is formi- 
 dable when confirmed. 
 
 This never becomes solid like other bones, even in ex- 
 treme old age. Between its perpendicular sides, as seen 
 in the plate, and the front end of the rib, a strip of curti- 
 lage is interposed, a kind of substance which is familiarly 
 known by the name of gristle. The bony wall therefore, 
 over the heart and lungs, is decidedly the weakest part of 
 the frame. 
 
 There is a radical defect in the seats of all the school- 
 rooms in this country. There should be a convexity be- 
 hind, to fit the hollow of the back. The seat would be 
 more comfortable, and prevent the bones of the chest 
 from being cramped down and binding the digestive 
 organs. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLAPS BOOK. 
 
 23 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 9. 
 
 A the place where the collar bone is 
 joined ; C where the first rib is articulated ; 
 c, d, e, f, g, show the number of pieces 
 which are united into one : the ensiform 
 
 cartilage , or tip of the sternum, — bent out 
 of place, very frequently, to the great det- 
 riment of the individual, is marked h. 
 
 Very small children, in schools, become excessively 
 weary, after sitting a little time on stiff benches — are 
 sleepy, and can scarcely be kept awake. This is nature’s 
 mode of seeking relief from the pressure and gravity of 
 the chest, which is confining both bones and muscles. 
 They should certainly be permitted, either to have a re- 
 cumbent posture, which is thus indicated, or they should 
 be kept but a very little time in one position. Malforma- 
 tion of the bones, narrow chests, coughs, ending in con- 
 sumptions and death in middle life, beside a multitude of 
 minor ills, have often had their origin in the school-room. 
 
 BONES OF THE LOINS. 
 
 Five of the last vertebrae, which are the largest and 
 strongest of the spine, contribute to the formation of the 
 loins or lumbar region. 
 
24 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 10. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 10 . 
 This is a drawing of one of. 
 the lumbar vertebrae, — in the 
 small of the back, in common 
 language It is much larger, 
 and contains considerable more 
 substance than those of the 
 back or neck ; — and it re- 
 quires to be so, as it necessarily 
 supports the weight of the body 
 above: a is the body ; b b the 
 the sui faces by which it forms 
 a joint with the block above : 
 c c a similar surface, to meet 
 the one below ; d d the side 
 arms or processes, to which the 
 strong muscles ef the hack are 
 fastened. 
 
 bones of the hips. — Ossa Innominata. 
 
 Three bones, the os sacrum and the two ossa innominata 
 or hips, are so united together as to form a kind of horizon- 
 tal ring ; within this ring, many important organs are found ; 
 on the outside of eacli of the broad, thin hip bones, a 
 
 deep socket is seen, in which 
 are articulated. 
 
 Fig. ti- 
 
 the heads of the thigh bones 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 11 . 
 This is a drawing of the lower 
 part of the hip bone, or os in- 
 nomination, in which is seen 
 the head of the thigh bone, tied 
 into its socket, by a short round 
 cord, to keep it always in place. 
 Were it not for this curious 
 provision, by a thousand un- 
 guarded' movements, the hip 
 would be thrown out of joint. 
 a is the membrane which cov- 
 ers the joint ; b the cord that 
 keeps the bone in its socket ; c 
 the socket in the hip bone ; d 
 a rim of the socket, to deepen 
 it, and f the thigh bone head ; — 
 e a binding ligament; 6 the point 
 of bone on which we sit. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 25 
 
 BONES OF THE SHOULDER. ScapulcB. 
 
 Lying horizontally, between the top of the breast bone 
 and the tip of the shoulder, above the joint, is the clavicle, 
 or collar bone, shaped something like an italic s. Its use 
 is to keep the arms from sliding forward, towards the breast, 
 and it is also useful in sustaining burdens, as when a basket 
 is carried on the shoulder. Its name is said to have been 
 derived from its resemblance to an ancient key. 
 
 Explanations of 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 In this cut is seen 
 the union of the 
 shoulder-blade, col- 
 lar bone, breast bone 
 -]Qand the shoulder 
 joint. These are 
 detached from the 
 body, hence the 
 I'll view is a front one. 
 A portion of the col- 
 lar bone of the right 
 side is seen also, — 
 all the others being on the left side. The figures from 1 to 11, indi- 
 cate the ligaments which keep them united, when the muscles are 
 dissected away. 
 
 Shoulder blade is a familiar name of a thin, broad, 
 triangular bone, behind each shoulder, termed scapula. 
 At the highest angle, a hooked process stands out, which 
 makes a roof, as it were, over the shoulder joint, to defend it 
 from violence by the pressure of burdens. At its root, and 
 necessarily on its underside, is a depression, called the 
 glenoid cavity, in which the head of the shoulder is 
 articulated, to make the joint. The shoulder blade does 
 not touch the ribs, nor has it any attachment with any 
 other bone than the clavicle, belonging to the chest. It 
 lies on a cushing of a muscle, and is moved in various 
 directions in every motion of the arm. If the arm is raised, 
 carried either forward or backward, down or up, the mo- 
 3 
 
26 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 tion of the shoulder blade may be distinctly felt through 
 the skin. 
 
 bones of the arm. — Ossa Humeri. 
 
 Os liumcri and os brachii are names given by the books, 
 to the arm bone. There is nothing particularly interest' 
 ing in its anatomy. At the upper end is a large ball, that 
 rolls in the socket of the shoulder blade ; and at the other 
 extremity it is flattened, to receive the fore arm, with which 
 it makes a ginglymus or hinge joint, admitting only of two 
 motions, flexion and extension, similar to motions describ- 
 ed by a door, swinging on its hinges. To this bone, a 
 principal part of the muscles are attached which produce 
 the movements of the limb. 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 13. 
 Short ligaments of the elbow 
 are here demonstrated : the 
 
 wonder is, how the elbow joint 
 
 1 can ever be dislocated, without 
 
 2 entirely ruining the whole liga- 
 mentary arrangement. The 
 
 ^ figures from 1 to 4, not only 
 give the locality of each liga- 
 ment, but even the figure. 
 
 BONES OF THE FORE ARM. Radii et TJlncC . 
 
 Two bones are in the fore-arm, between the elbow and 
 wrist, lying side by side : that on the upper side, on a 
 line with the thumb, is the radius, so named from its re- 
 semblance to the spoke of a wheel. It is sometimes termed 
 the manubrium manus, or handle of the hand, because the 
 hand is fastened to its lower end, and its upper one has but 
 little or nothing to do with the composition of the elbow 
 joint. The radius rolls to and fro, carrying the hand with 
 it, while its fellow, ulna or cubit, so named because it was 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 27 
 
 used for a measure, is curiously articulated to the elbow, 
 but does not reach the hand. 
 
 On these two bones, a vast number of perplexing mus- 
 cles take their rise, which produce the multitude of short, 
 quick or strong motions of the hand and fingers. 
 
 When the palm of the hand faces backward, it being 
 supposed that the arm is pendulous, by the side, it is 
 called pronation. When it faces forward, the thumb be- 
 ing outside, it is si/pination. Those muscles which pro- 
 duce these movements, are pronators and supinators. 
 
 BONES OF THE WRIST. OsSU Carpi. 
 
 Eight little bones, whose shapes cannot be well describ- 
 ed, placed in two rows, form the wrist. On the back side, 
 
 Fig. 14. j t. 
 
 f : 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 14. 
 i This diagram shows the connexion 
 of the little bones of the carpus or 
 wrist, with the two long bones of the 
 fore-arm. 1 the ulna; 2 radius; 3 
 scaphoides ; 4 lunar e ■; 5 cuneiforme ; 
 6 pisiforme ; 7 trapezium ; 8 trape- 
 ziodes ; 9 magnum. The letters 
 mark the ligaments which tie them 
 together. 
 
 10 
 
 8 9 
 
 they are arched, actually reminding one of irregular sized 
 stones, so put together as to resemble a piece of masonry. 
 On the inside, they make a canal, through which the ten- 
 dons of the muscles glide along to the fingers. 
 
28 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 b a 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 15. 
 Another plan of the bones of 
 tlie wrist, showing them placed 
 in two rows. This is a back 
 e view of the carpus of the right 
 hand, a the boat shaped bone ; 
 b the half muon shaped ; c the 
 wedge shaped; d the pea 
 shaped; which make the up- 
 per row, joining the fore arm. 
 In the second row, are the four 
 others, which are united, by a joint, to the palm of the hand. 
 
 Their names are navicular e, lunar c, cunciforme, orbicu- 
 lare, trapezium, trapeziodes, magnum, and uneiforme. 
 
 BONES OF THE PALM. Metacarpus. 
 
 A detailed account of the shape and size of the bones 
 of the metacarpus, or palm, would seem to be unnecessary, 
 as every person can ascertain their number and relations 
 by feeling his own hands; the plan, however, is inserted. 
 Fi?. 1(5. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 16. 
 Four metacarpal bones, side by 
 side, precisely as they are placed, 
 and of the true shape, forming the 
 palm of the hand, are seen in (his 
 figure. The metacarpal bone of 
 the thumb is seen in Fig. 17, 
 marked a. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 29 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 1*. 
 
 There are but three bones in the thumb, which 
 are larger than those in the fingers, because it was 
 designed to oppose them, and therefore possesses a 
 structure quite different. To these three, five mus- 
 cles are attached, a, 6, c, are the three, but it should 
 be recollected that a really belongs to the meta- 
 carpus, so that the phalanges of the thumb are two. 
 
 Only two bones exist in the thumb, but there are three 
 in each finger, — collectively called phalanges, being four- 
 teen in number. 
 
 Fig. 18. 
 
 3 * 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 18. 
 
 Twelve bones, as exhibited 
 in this plan, constitute the 
 a fingers of one hand. They 
 are separated from each 
 other, that the exact form of 
 the extremities of each may 
 be seen, a the first bone of 
 the litte finger, b the second, 
 c the third : the same letters 
 b point out the three, also, 
 composing the index, or fore 
 finger. 
 
 c 
 
30 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 19 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 19. 
 
 Here is presented a back 
 view of all the bones of the 
 hand, as they are connected 
 with the eight little bones of the 
 wrist. Each bone is so distinct- 
 ly represented, that a very 
 young child may understand 
 the arrangement. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 
 
 20 . 
 
 All the bones of 
 the arm, fore arm 
 and hand, are here 
 exhibited in connex- 
 ion, with reference 
 to impressing it on 
 the mind, after hav- 
 ing read a short des- 
 cription of the indi- 
 vidual parts of the 
 upper extremity, a 
 is the head of the arm 
 bone, articulated to 
 the shoulder; b the 
 joint or elbow, form- 
 ed by the ulna and 
 lower end of the arm; 
 c the shaft of the os 
 humeri or arm ; d 
 the radius or handle 
 of the hand, united, 
 solely, to the wrist ; 
 e the ulna, which 
 alone forms with the 
 arm, the joint. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 31 
 
 BONES OF TIIE INFERIOR EXTREMITIES. Ossa FcmOris. 
 
 First, the os femoris, or thigh bone, is the largest and 
 longest in the skeleton : indeed it needs to be, as it sus- 
 tains the entire weight of the whole body. The ball, by 
 which it is articulated in the deep socket of the hip bone, 
 appears to be at the end of a branch, standing out at a 
 considerable angle from the shaft, as seen in the engraving 
 of the skeleton. This is the neck of the femoris. Its 
 lower end or condyle, is quite large, to make a part of the 
 knee joint. All the muscles assisting in running, walk- 
 ing, or dancing, are variously connected with it. 
 
 BONES OF THE LEG. — Tibia. 
 
 Tibia is the scientific name of the shin bone, because 
 it was thought to look like a pipe. United with the con- 
 dyle of the thigh bone, assisted only by the knee pan, the 
 knee joint is formed. 
 
 At the ankle, it is admirably fitted to the astragalus, to 
 permit flexion and extension of the foot, as in walking. 
 A piece or splint, called malcolar process, slides down by 
 the side of the joint, to increase its strength. The pro- 
 cess may be felt, being under the skin like a knob, on the 
 inner side of the ankle. 
 
 This joint is very securely arranged, to prevent luxa- 
 tions : as it merely moves in two directions, backward and 
 forward, — nothing short of a degree of violence that in- 
 jures the bones, can materially affect it. Beside its lig- 
 aments, the tendons of many muscles contribute to its 
 security, strength and perfection. 
 
32 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 21. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 21. 
 
 These three plans show how the two bones of the leg are united 
 above the ankle joint — 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 7, 6 — mark the ligaments 
 which bind them so firmly. 
 
 Outside of the tibia, is a long, slender bone, the fibula, 
 lying on the side of the head of the tibia, but having 
 nothing to do with the knee joint ; — it passes down past 
 the ankle joint, giving the same security to it, that is af- 
 forded by the maleolar process of the tibia, on the inside. 
 Between the two bones, all the muscles, and they are 
 numerous, arise, which go to the foot and toes. 
 
 BONES OF THE INSTEF . OsSCt Tarsi. 
 
 Five bones are found in the tarsus or instep, one of 
 which is nearly all given to the heel. An arch is formed 
 by the other four, similar to the wrist, giving a convexity 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 33 
 
 Fig. 52. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 22. 
 
 By this diagram, the skeleton of the foot will be clearly under- 
 stood, even without the aid of the bones. Twenty-six bones are 
 here so curiously grouped together, that an arch is made between 
 the heel and ball of the great toe : — a, shows the five hones of the 
 metatarsus ; d, e,f, g, and h point out the five bonesof the instep or 
 tarsus ; and b, c, and i, indicate the phalanges or toes. 
 
 to the top of the foot. On the under side, in the sole of 
 the foot, all the flexor muscles of the toes are found. This 
 structure conduces to the elasticity of the step, and the 
 weight of the body is transmitted to the ground by the 
 spring of the arch, in a way to prevent the injury of nu- 
 merous organs, by a sudden jar. Each one of them has 
 a specific name, viz. os calcis, the heel ; astragalus, being 
 part of the ankle joint, named from its likeness to a block 
 used by the Greeks, in playing a game of chance ; cuboidcs, 
 or square bone ; naviculare, the boat shaped ; and cunei- 
 forme, or the wedge shaped bone. 
 
 As in the hand, between the instep and toes, is the 
 metatarsus, in which are five bones, placed like the sticks 
 of a fan, to be articulated with the first row of the bones 
 of the toes. 
 
 Precisely as the short blocks of bones are arranged in 
 the thumb, so they are in the great toe, being, however, 
 proportionably larger. There are two in this and three 
 
34 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 in each of the four remaining toes, — the whole of which 
 are phalanges , being fourteen in all. 
 
 Fig- 24. Fig. 23. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 23. 
 
 This represents the bones of 
 one toe, as they stand, in relation 
 to each other — a, the metatarsal 
 part, concealed in the muscles, and 
 bed the three phalanges. 
 
 Fig. 24 is the -skeleton of the 
 great toe : a the metatarsal por- 
 tion, and b c the phalanges. 
 
 Sesamoid bones, considerably larger than in the thumb, 
 are discoverable on the under side of the first joint of the 
 large toe. 
 
 SKIN OF THE BONES. Periosteum. 
 
 Over every bone is a thin, white covering, the perioste- 
 um, closely investing it. Its use is to conduct the nutri- 
 cious vessels and nerves into the substance of the bone. 
 It serves also for the attachment of the muscles, which 
 could not otherwise be fastened to the smooth surface. 
 Though apparently insensible, it is amply furnished with 
 nerves, arteries, and veins, but its vitality is very low. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 35 
 
 GROWTH OF THE BONES J — Or OsteOgetli/. 
 
 By this term, is understood the doctrine of the formation 
 and growth of the bones. From infancy, till the age of 
 about twenty years, they are constantly undergoing changes. 
 In fact, they are completely renewed, many times in the 
 course of a long life. No particle of matter can long re- 
 main at rest in a living system. When one portion is re- 
 moved, another is put in its place, so that by the circula- 
 tion of the blood, the greatest activity prevails, even 
 among these earthy portions of the body. 
 
 The arteries, hereafter to be described, are the arti- 
 zans, — carrying whatever is necessary to promote the 
 growth, or to repair the wastes of the system. They also 
 fashion each organ, give shape to every bone, and sustain 
 and furnish them with vitality. 
 
 Bones have nerves, but they are small, and only con- 
 nect them with the other more highly organized parts. 
 When they are diseased, they become painful as the mus- 
 cles ; but in health, they are insensible. 
 
 As a whole, the skeleton is merely a frame, on which 
 are suspended, or attached, all the organs of motion. It is 
 full of joints — and each bone is a lever, to be acted upon 
 by the power of a muscle. This, which in most of the 
 large animals is in the centre, in many of the smaller 
 tribes, is on the outside, in the form of a shell. Examples 
 may be found in the turtle and lobster, beetles, &c. 
 
 Such a remarkable piece of mechanism as the skeleton, 
 divested of a thousand important, wonder-working accom- 
 paniments, exhibits in the clearest light, the goodness and 
 wisdom of God. The fashion of each bone, and above all, 
 the skilful and nice adjustment of the whole, and their 
 subserviency to the different fibres and tubes which are 
 intimately connected with this complicated, yet perfect 
 piece of architecture, must strike a reflecting mind, most 
 
36 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 forcibly, that the evidences of the existence of a Supreme 
 Power, are here manifested in a most extraordinary 
 manner. 
 
 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MALE AND FEMALE SKELETONS. 
 
 Were it true that men have a deficient number of ribs, 
 there would be no difficulty in designating the skeletons 
 of different sexes. To an inexperienced eye, it will al- 
 ways be a nice point, to determine one from the other. 
 
 The skeleton of the male is larger and heavier than 
 that of the female. The surfaces of the bones are rougher, 
 as the muscles which moved them were more strongly de- 
 veloped, and capable of exerting more power than those 
 of the other. The head of the female, on an average, is 
 smaller than the male ; the sutures are less notched; and 
 the cavities in the bone of the forehead, and upper jaw 
 bones, are considerably smaller. All the limbs are more 
 delicately and slenderly formed. Processes are less prom- 
 inent, and depressions are comparatively more superficial. 
 
 A still stronger difference, however, is found in the pel- 
 vis, — a kind of arch, or bony circle, bounded by the hip 
 bones. In females, the pelvis is much broader than in 
 men, and the hips are spread more outwardly. Lastly, the 
 necks of the thigh bones are longer, — giving them the 
 appearance of being particularly broad across the hips : 
 thus far, only, females are constructed, in the frames of 
 their bodies, to differ very essentially from the male. 
 The breadth of the pelvis, in connexion ufith the peculi- 
 arity of a long neck to the thigh bones, brings the knees 
 nearer together. 
 
 If two skeletons, one of a man, the other of a woman, 
 are suspended, it will be noticed that the lower extreme- 
 ties of the male would be nearly parallel to each other; 
 whereas, in the other, the knees will approximate so near- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 37 
 
 ly, as to touch. Another difference consists in the capa- 
 city of the chest : one is small, and the other is large. 
 The bones of the feet and hands are large in men ; — but 
 in the female they are slender, smooth and delicate. Fi- 
 nally, the height and weight would have an influence up- 
 on our judgment in deciding upon the character of either. 
 
 DISTORTIONS TO WHICH THE BONES ARE LIABLE. 
 
 Many injuries of the bones are induced by the careless- 
 ness of nurses, in infancy and the first years of childhood, 
 which have a permanent influence on the figure and health 
 in after life. Females, especially, by the caprice of fash- 
 ion, are the subjects of many alarming diseases, arising 
 from distortions of the bones. One of the most serious 
 affections, a distortion of the spine, is muchoftener found 
 in females, than in males. Boys generally lead an active 
 life, — enjoying a free exercise of all their limbs, in 
 various youthful pastimes. Girls, by a perverse custom, 
 are taught that they were made for the house, and not for 
 the open air. Their employments are therefore com- 
 monly of a sedentary kind, necessarily confining them to 
 one posture many hours at a time. Added to this, which 
 is enough to enfeeble any constitution, their bodies are 
 compressed by the modern modes of dressing, to such a 
 degree, that instead of naturally expanding, to give full 
 play to the lungs, the chest is kept from enlarging its 
 capacity, by stays, and closely fitted dresses. The ribs 
 are pressed inwardly, the spine prevented from having 
 motion ; the lungs cramped, and consumptions, inflamma- 
 tions, and other oftentimes incurable maladies, are the 
 certain results. 
 
 Notwithstanding the odium cast upon the Chinese for 
 their ridiculous fancy for the small feet of their females, 
 which are prevented from growing, by being compressed 
 4 
 
33 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 in iron shoes, it is not so cruel nor absurd, as the practice 
 among the females of all civilized countries, at the present 
 day, of preventing the growth of the waist. 
 
 Physicians, philanthropists and philosophers, have each 
 exerted themselves, to awaken an interest, — to arouse 
 females to a sense of their danger, but it has been to little 
 purpose. Though seriously deformed, they cannot be 
 persuaded to abandon a custom, which, in their apprehen- 
 sion, improves their otherwise beautiful forms. 
 
 We here introduce the following drawings, to show 
 what is the actual condition, of the chest that has become 
 permanently diminished by artificial means, compared with 
 one that has been developed as nature intended. 
 
 Young ladies require nearly as much exercise as boys, 
 but of a less violent character, as their physical organiza- 
 tion is not calculated, it is reasonable to suppose, for se- 
 vere exertions of the muscles. They certainly require 
 loose, easy clothing, that the bones concerned in the forma- 
 tion of the apartment in which is placed the vital ap- 
 paratus, may be free, unimpeded, and unrestrained. 
 
 Contracted chest. 
 
 An outline is here presented of the 
 chest of a female, to show the actual 
 condition of the bones, as they appear 
 after death, in every lady who has 
 habitually worn stays. 
 
 All the false ribs, from the lower end 
 of the breast bone, are unnaturally 
 cramped inwardly towards the spine, 
 so that the liver, stomach and other di- 
 gestive organs in the immediate vicini- 
 ty, are pressed into such small compass, 
 that their functions are interrupted, 
 and in fact, all the vessels, bones, and viscera, on which the individ- 
 ual is constantly depending for health, are. more or less distorted 
 and enfeebled. 
 
 Whatever has a tendency to confine those parts of the 
 frame which were designed for motion, positively tends to 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 39 
 
 Skeleton of a well formed female 
 chest. 
 
 By comparing the accompanying 
 plan of a well developed and natur- 
 ally proportioned female chest, with 
 the frightful skeleton appended to 
 the preceding note, the difference 
 is strikingly apparent. Here is 
 breadth, — space for the lungs to act 
 in ; and the short ribs are thrown 
 outwardly, instead of being curved 
 and twisted down towards the spine, 
 by which ample space is afforded 
 for the free action of all those or- 
 gans, which in the other frame, 
 were too small to sustain life. 
 The first iriav be regarded as the 
 exact shape and figure of a short lived female ; and this may be 
 contemplated as an equally true model of the frame of another, who, 
 so far as life depends upon a well-formed body, would live to a good 
 old age. 
 
 the production of disease ; it is therefore of the highest 
 interest to the well being of our species, that an elementa- 
 ry knowledge of the structure of the human body should 
 be taught, and everywhere understood, — that precautions 
 may be taken to avoid a threatening danger. Physical ed- 
 ucation is not only too much neglected, but what is still 
 more lamentable, scarcely appreciated in this country. If 
 parents, in the first place, and instructers in the second, 
 studied more the education of the body, the intellectual 
 faculties would be more fully, and energetically developed. 
 Above all, the young should be instructed correctly, in 
 the knowledge of the laws of animal life. 
 
 The lungs too suffer, — and in those cases, which are 
 ninety in a hundred , where the stays have been laced on 
 in very early life, before the ribs have become perfectly 
 ossified, the chest is never developed ; — it never assumes 
 the form which it would have had, were it not for this 
 mechanical restraint; consequently, for want of capacity, 
 or in other words, for the want of room, the lungs are too 
 
 Vig. ec. 
 
40 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 small for the requirements of the body; — they cannot 
 oxygenate the blood, — an indispensable vital process. 
 
 Corset boards are quite as reprehensible, though the in- 
 juries to which they give rise, are less apparent in the be- 
 ginning. The busk operates almost exclusively on the 
 sternum or breast bone, which is easily bent out of its 
 original position, at its lower extremity. 
 
 By a constant pressure of an inelastic board, the lower 
 end of the sternum, which juts down into the abdominal 
 muscles two or three inches, is forced inward, and be- 
 coming ossified irr that direction, is productive of serious 
 injury to the stomach, which lies just behind it. 
 
 A multitude of painful and protracted ' diseases, by 
 which females in the higher walks of society, in this age, 
 are hurried to an early grave, have their origin in this hor- 
 rible custom of wearing stays. Thousands upon thou- 
 sands of young ladies are the yearly victims, even in the 
 United States, to consumption, which is wholly referable 
 to this fashionable, but perverted taste, of conforming to 
 a practice which has for its object, the improvement of 
 the female form ; as though the Creator, in constructing 
 the most beautiful work of his creation, neglected to give 
 that last finishing process, which they imagine them- 
 selves to have discovered, and which can alone be satisfac- 
 tory to the sex. 
 
 While we lament the tolerance of an evil in our coun- 
 try that sweeps the young, the beautiful, and the intelligent 
 to the tomb, before the summer of life has fairly commenc- 
 ed, we scarcely indulge the hope of a reformation : per- 
 nicious customs which are preserved by common consent, 
 cannot be easily overcome by persuasion or argument. 
 
 If, notwithstanding the many illustrations given of the 
 sad effects of stays and busks, by various philanthropic 
 writers, mothers and nurses manifest no disposition to be 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 41 
 
 influenced by their opinions and advice, the duty most 
 certainly devolves on all public teachers, in a delicate and 
 appropriate manner, to instruct their pupils in the first 
 principles of preserving health, by explaining the morbid 
 effects which arise from confining the body in stays. 
 
 One of the first lessons in physical education should be, 
 to strip from the pupil every unnecessary artificial restraint 
 upon the body and limbs. 
 
 TEETH. 
 
 In manhood, there are thirty-two teeth, divided in the 
 following manner : 
 
 8 Incisores, — or cutting teeth. 
 
 4 Cuspidati, — or dog shaped, — being pointed. 
 
 8 Bicuspides, — or two pointed double teeth. 
 
 8 Molares, — or giinding teeth. 
 
 4 Dentes Sapienlis, — or wisdom teeth. 
 
 The first set, or milk teeth, are twenty in number, ap- 
 pearing from time to time, from the age of about ten 
 months, to three years, when they are all developed. 
 There are, however, many variations as respects the peri- 
 od of cutting them, depending on constitutional causes. 
 When the roots are absorbed, the tops fall off from the 
 gums, and the second set are protruded. The jaws, in the 
 mean time, become longer and broader, which allows room 
 for an increased number, of a greater size. 
 
 In the centre of each tooth, is a cavity, in which the pulp 
 of a nerve lies, and which is the seat of pain, when the 
 body of the tooth is so decayed as to expose it to the air, 
 or bring it in contact with food. Each root is also hollow, 
 allowing the fibre of a nerve to communicate with the 
 nerves of the jaw, and blood vessels also run in by the 
 side of it, to nourish the whole. 
 
 The enamel is the outside, hard crust, which gives the 
 requisite finish to the tooth, and renders it strong enough 
 4 * 
 
42 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 for mastication. This enamel is much thinner on the teeth 
 of some persons than on others, and scaling off, the bony 
 part of the teeth being exposed, soon falls into disease by 
 the contact and influence of various kinds of food, drink, 
 heat and colds. 
 
 Acids of all kinds are particularly injurious to the teeth, 
 because they act chemically on the lime contained in the 
 enamel, — destroying the connexion of the particles, and 
 thus, ultimately, exposing the nerve. Hot drinks are 
 also pernicious. 
 
 Individuals living on moderately cool food, and drinking 
 cold water, simply, preserve their teeth in all their origi- 
 nal beauty and goodness, to an advanced period. 
 
 Sugar is not destructive to the teeth, as generally sup- 
 posed : slaves, on sugar plantations, possess the finest sets, 
 uninjured, apparently to extreme old age. 
 
 Cold water only is advisable, applied with a soft brush, 
 for keeping them white, clean and in a healthful condition. 
 The various dentifrices, salt, ashes, charcoal, &.c, actually 
 injure them by attrition in the application, and should 
 never, therefore, be used. Chewing and smoking tobacco, 
 is very destructive to the teeth. To youth these few prac- 
 tical considerations are worth their recollection. 
 
 When the teeth are all extracted, the sockets which sup- 
 ported them are absorbed, and hence the jaws are nar- 
 rower, which explains the reason why, in old age, the 
 mouth is smaller and the lips sunken : it also accounts 
 for the difficulty with which words are articulated. The 
 tongue being compressed, moves with less freedom, and 
 distinct enunciation becomes extremely difficult. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 43 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is understood by Anatomy ? 
 
 What is Comparative Anatomy and its use ? 
 
 Into how many parts is the science divided ? 
 
 What is Osteology ? 
 
 What is Syndesmology ? 
 
 What is Myology ? 
 
 What is Bursology ? 
 
 What is Angiology ? 
 
 What is Adenology ? 
 
 What is Splanchnology ? 
 
 What is Ilygrology ? 
 
 How are the bones classed ? 
 
 How are the names of bones derived P 
 Are they hollow or solid ? 
 
 What are processes and their use ? 
 
 What is a natural skeleton ? 
 
 What is an artificial skeleton? 
 
 How many bones compose the skeleton ? 
 
 How is the skeleton divided by anatomists P 
 How many bones compose the skull ? 
 
 How many are there in the face ? 
 
 How many teeth and how arranged ? 
 
 Has the tongue any bone ? 
 
 Is the sense of hearing dependent upon bones? 
 
 How many bones compose the trunk ? 
 
 What are Sutures ? 
 
 Where is the Coronal Suture? 
 
 How does the male differ essentially from the female skele- 
 ton ? 
 
44 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Why are some bones hollow ? 
 
 What is the use of marrow ? 
 
 How many bones in the fore arm ? 
 
 How many in the wrist? 
 
 What is the carpus ? 
 
 Where is the metacarpus ? 
 
 How many phalanges in the fingers ? 
 
 How many bones in the foot? 
 
 Are extra bones ever found — and if so, where ? 
 
 How are bones said to be united ? 
 
 Where is the os frontis ? 
 
 Of what use are the cavities in the bones of the forehead 
 and cheeks ? 
 
 Where is the occipital bone situated ? 
 
 What circumstance renders the temporal bone particu- 
 larly interesting ? 
 
 What do you understand by the spine ? 
 
 Why are persons taller in the morning than at night? 
 
 Why are aged persons inclined to be crooked, and shorter 
 than in their youth ? 
 
 How many ribs are there ? 
 
 What is meant by pronation of the hand ? 
 
 What by supination ? 
 
 What is the use of the periosteum? 
 
 What is osteogeny ? 
 
 Have bones any sensibility ? 
 
 How do they grow, or how are they repaired when injured? 
 What is the use of the skeleton ? 
 
 What is the metatarsus? 
 
 What are ligaments ? 
 
 How many bones in the arm? 
 
 How many teeth in adults ? 
 
 Where is the sternum? 
 
 What is the use of the clavicle ? 
 
 How many bones in the foot ? 
 
 Of what use is a bone in the tongue ? 
 
 Are there more ribs in a male than in a female skeleton ? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 45 
 
 LIGAMENTS. 
 
 OR SYNDESMOLOGY. 
 
 In the economy of the system, the skeleton would have 
 been in a very imperfect condition, if so many bones were 
 not firmly connected together. The bands and straps 
 which so effectually and strongly connect them, one with 
 another, are called ligaments, and syndcsmology is the 
 study or doctrine of them. 
 
 Such is the prodigious tenacity of the ligaments, that 
 the bones are sometimes fractured, before they are torn 
 from their points of adhesion. 
 
 Ligaments, like the bones themselves, are nearly insen- 
 sible, white and shining, and commonly short, thin and 
 tough. Where the ends of two bones meet, as in the con- 
 struction of a joint, their situation is maintained by liga- 
 ments running from one to the other. Possessing but a 
 very slight degree of elasticity, the joints do not become 
 loose or shackling, unless extension is maintained a very 
 long time. 
 
 Were it not for ligaments, the bones of our bodies would 
 fall down by their own weight. A natural skeleton is 
 one on which they have been preserved, with reference to 
 showing the precise connexion of the bones. 
 
 Some ligaments are exceedingly interesting, from the 
 
4(5 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 27. 
 e, J, are the crucials or cross liga- 
 ments, so remarkable in structure and 
 office ; f, the tendon of an extensor 
 muscle; c, the head of the fibula , 
 joining the side of the shin bone ; a, 
 the articulating surface of the lower 
 end of the thigh bone, covered by the 
 knee pan ; b, refers to the broad liga- 
 ment, turned down from the joint to 
 expose the cross ligaments, having 
 the knee pan on it. 
 
 circumstance that they keep a joint from bending the 
 wrong way. The knee would be the weakest, and most 
 liable to get out of order, of any, were it not for its nume- 
 rous ligaments. 
 
 Within this joint, two ligaments are so arranged, that 
 they cross each other, like the legs of a saw-horse, com- 
 pletely preventing the leg from being carried too far back- 
 ward or forward. The lateral ligaments guard against dis- 
 locations on either side. 
 
 One single round ligament fastened on the head of the 
 thigh bone, ties it into the centre of its socket, keeping it 
 always in place, however much the limb be moved in 
 opposite directions. 
 
 Ligaments exist wherever two bones meet at their ex- 
 tremities, and also abound in the cavities of the body, 
 in the form of flat or round cords, to sustain the weight 
 of important organs, as the liver, spleen, and pancreas. 
 Without these supports the liver would inevitably fall 
 down, from its place just under and behind the false ribs 
 of the right side, upon the hollow organs below. The 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 47 
 
 Fi S . 28. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 28. 
 
 Complex as the ligaments appear 
 in this plan, there is certainly an 
 admirable simplicity, conducing ex- 
 actly to the perfection of the frame 
 of the hand. Each letter, as in 
 other diagrams, shows the place of 
 each individual ligament, as found 
 on dissection, joined to the bones, 
 which are thus drawn together like 
 so many wedges. it would he 
 utterly impossible for the most in- 
 genious mechanic to take the dry 
 bones and secure (hem together by 
 wires, clasps, rivets or straps, so 
 strongly as nature has done by means 
 of these little shining ligaments. 
 
 gall-bladder is tied lo the liver by a ligament ; the intes- 
 tines are kept in their places by ligaments ; — the stomach, 
 too, without ligaments would soon be thrown by its own 
 muscular exertions, during digestion, from its natural lo- 
 cality. Even in the skull, ligaments assuming various 
 forms, support the lobes of the brain, protect vessels, and 
 give strength to the architecture of the head during the 
 first years of life. Indeed, ligaments are indispensable 
 throughout the animal frame. 
 
 By means of them, the small hones of the foot are kept 
 firmly together in the shape of an arch, in the instep : — 
 otherwise the weight of the body, in the exercise of walk- 
 ing, would crush them apart, and forever destroy their 
 curious connexion. 
 
48 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 29. 
 
 By this drawing, which is true to 
 nature, it will be seen, distinctly, how 
 the bones of the instep and ankle, are 
 articulated; — how the instep and pha- 
 langes or toe bones meet; and lastly, 
 the small letters direct the eye to the 
 locality of each ligament, which assists 
 in binding this congeries of large and 
 small blocks firmly together, like a 
 pavement. 
 
 g Incases of club-foot, the ligaments 
 are very much deranged, in conse- 
 quence of the distortion and displace- 
 ment of the bones. But, however for- 
 midable the case may appear, if season- 
 able exertion is made, the very worst 
 club-foot may be re-modelled by an iron 
 shoe, provided with metallic rods run- 
 ning up by the sides of the ankle, so 
 that both the apparatus and bones may 
 
 11 be kept in place. Without the advice 
 of a surgeon, any ingenious mechanic 
 can remedy a malformation of the foot, 
 if the trial is commenced while th# 
 bones are imperfectly ossified. 
 
 By ligaments the wrist is fastened to the arm, indepen- 
 pendently of muscles ; the shoulder to the shoulder blade ; — 
 the head to the first bone of the neck ; — the ribs (o the 
 spine, and the vertebrae to each other. The office, there- 
 fore, which these deep seated, almost unnoticed straps 
 hold, in binding the whole frame together, cannot be 
 overlooked by any one who contemplates the marvellous 
 work of God, as exhibited in our own complex, yet beau- 
 tifully fashioned bodies. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 40 
 
 Fig. 30. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 30. 
 
 Having; completed a general description of all the individual bones, 
 and exhibited some of the principal ligaments of the limbs, the object 
 of this third drawing of an entire skeleton, is first, to give aside view 
 of the parts adverted to in the foregoing pages, — without letters or 
 references to deface the engraving, or to perplex the mind. The 
 peculiar attitude of the figure was given it by the artist, merely be- 
 cause a larger sized drawing could thus be given in a little space. 
 
 5 
 
50 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOS, 
 
 THE MUSCLES. 
 
 OR MYOLOGY. 
 
 An interesting department of anatomy is called myology r 
 or the doctrine of the muscles. 
 
 We would by no means surfeit our young readers with 
 the consideration of subjects which are only considered 
 valuable to the anatomist : — but we wish general inquirers 
 to participate in some of those sublime manifestations of the 
 all-creative Power, presented in the mechanism of animal 
 bodies, which have too long been locked up in libraries. 
 
 All that pertains to anatomy, either human or compara- 
 tive, possesses the highest degree of interest. 
 
 We are not so enthusiastic as to suppose that every 
 body can be induced to feel so earnestly devoted to this 
 science as ourselves; — nor is the desire entertained of 
 making dry bones a fashionable topic of general conversa- 
 tion ; but we do most fervently hope that the leading 
 principles of anatomical and physiological knowledge 
 will be diffused; will yet be taught in all the schools of 
 this country. 
 
 The advantages to youth, arising from a public dissemi- 
 nation of these sciences, will be very numerous, as it will 
 lead the young to correct view's: — it will dispel that 
 vulgar kind of mystery in w'hich the functions of individual 
 organs are enveloped : — it will strengthen the morals, 
 elevate the mind, and finally, be one of the surest means 
 of fixing the attention to the considerations of the char- 
 acter and Omnipotence of God. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 51 
 
 Ordinarily, there is more vulgar curiosity, seeking to 
 be gratified on a variety of topics, embraced in these 
 valuable sciences, than in almost any other. Next to 
 the insane expectation of converting the base metals into 
 gold ; — the desire and the hope to prolong the period of 
 life, to raise the dead, and to avert disease, has always 
 been founded on a limited and false knowledge of anato- 
 my. Those who are truly learned in the science, dis- 
 cover the impossibility of maintaining never failing youth : 
 they are convinced of the necessity of death, the only 
 means of allowing a succession of beings; — the only 
 means by which matter can assume the forms that insure 
 this unfailing result. 
 
 Our bodies are indeed marvellously constructed ; the 
 materials of which they are composed, possess the most 
 opposite characters, — and the effects produced by the 
 harmonious operation of each fibre, however minute 
 or remote, contributes something towards the perfec- 
 tion of the whole. The moving powers, the self-acting 
 levers, and the invisible something which guides the 
 movement, or limits the duration of action, belong to 
 another inquiry ; yet, before arriving there, it is first 
 necessary to investigate the instruments of motion, the 
 muscles. 
 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 There are 527 muscles in man, 257 being in pairs. 
 
 Wherever there is a joint to be flexed, a bone to be 
 moved, or a motion of any kind to be effected, it is entirely 
 executed by muscles. Muscles are, in popular language, 
 Jlcsh; but instead of being an irregular mass, as too com- 
 monly supposed, exact order is maintained ; a certain 
 number of threads are invariably deposited, with syste. 
 matic attachments, with reference to a specific kind of 
 motion. 
 
52 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Chance has nothing to do with the muscular tissues. 
 Eacli muscle is formed by an exact rule, from which 
 nature never departs, without exhibiting a monster, 
 whose motions are so far a deviation from the species, that 
 the individual is physically defective, and incapable of 
 transmiting it to its offspring. A majority of the cases in 
 which too many or too few organs are seen, are to be im- 
 puted to incidental causes, which prevented nature from 
 completing those portions, the absence or excess of 
 which constitutes the essential characteristics of a species. 
 The laws of the animal economy are immutable. 
 
 The figures of the muscles are as various as possible, 
 some being round, others square, triangular, or flat like a 
 ribbon. In length too, the variations are remarkable. 
 Belonging to the vocal box, the (larynx,) the muscles, 
 opening and closing the rima glotidis, to vary the strength 
 of voice, are only about an eighth of an inch : the sar- 
 torius, or tailor’s muscle, by which the legs are crossed, 
 arises on the top of the hip bone, and extends six inches 
 below the knee, passing two joints, — being nearly three 
 feet long. On the back, the latissimus dursi, by which 
 the hand is brought downward and backward, as by a 
 blacksmith in using a hammer, is a foot broad on the 
 back, scarcely an inch in width at its attachment to 
 the arm, below the shoulder, but all of two feet in 
 length. 
 
 All muscles, are large in the middle, but small at the 
 extremities : — each one, too, is enveloped in a sheath, to 
 keep it separate from a contiguous one, that the action 
 may not interfere with the assigned office of any other. 
 Indeed, each bundle of fibres of which the muscle is com- 
 posed, is secured in a sheath of its own, and the whole 
 are finally encased in the outside tissue, that binds down 
 and secures the whole. 
 
 These coverings of the muscles are elastic, stretching 
 
ANATOMICAL CUSS BOOK. 
 
 53 
 
 and recovering their original form when the contents are 
 relaxed. When the greatest degree of contraction takes 
 place, as in the muscles of the thigh, the power of the 
 muscle is increased a hundred fold by the tightness of 
 the fascia. On the arm, for example, between the elbow 
 and shoulder, the flexor of the fore arm, in a state of 
 action, produces a very prominent ball near the middle 
 of the bone: on the inferior extremities, were the muscles 
 to project out in such a manner, all symmetry would inevi- 
 tably be sacrificed, and the power too, would be very 
 much abridged. Laborers bind a cord round the arm 
 when they wish to exert an extraordinary degree of 
 strength : — sailors, too, in order to increase their muscu- 
 lar power, usually wear a tightly girded leather belt just 
 above the hips, — the principle of which is to bind down 
 the bellies of the muscles, more closely than the straps 
 which nature has placed over them. 
 
 The muscles are divided into two classes, viz : the vol- 
 untary, and involuntary ; the first are subservient to the 
 will ; but the second order is wholly beyond its influence. 
 To put the voluntary muscles in action, we have only to 
 will it; to incline the power to effect an orderly contrac- 
 tion. It is only necessary to will the bending of a finger, 
 and it is done — to will the clenching of the hand, and 
 the action follows instantly ; to flex the leg, or extend the 
 foot, and the command of the brain is obeyed. 
 
 On the other hand, the muscular fibres of the stomach 
 are independent of the mind : the ear receives sonorous 
 rays, and propagates them to the labyrinth, by the com- 
 bined muscular apparatus within, nor can we prevent it 
 by any effort of the mind to the contrary. 
 
 Before muscles become orderly — before they can serve 
 the mind, they must be taught. Thus the child is obliged 
 
 5 * 
 
54 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 to totter round the room, receiving severe falls, before the 
 muscles become trained to the business for which they 
 were designed. The infant that has crept, feels safer on 
 its hands and knees, than on its feet, because, by prac- 
 tice, the locomotive muscles obey the child in that posi- 
 tion, and it is conscious of its security, from its recollection 
 of the fact. 
 
 When the child first endeavors to maintain an erect 
 posture, its step is insecure, the muscles not having 
 been associated to act in the new trial ; the positive influ- 
 ence of mind, therefore, must not be suspended an in- 
 stant; if it is, the infant falls to the floor. 
 
 When, therefore, any number of muscles have had 
 practice in any particular mode or time, a habit is ulti- 
 mately established, enabling them to continue the accus- 
 tomed motion, without the watchful efforts of the mind. 
 It is in this way that we learn to walk, to articulate words, 
 to rise, to sit, or assume a daily multitude of positions. 
 
 The principal difficulty the young musician has to en- 
 counter in learning to play an instrument, consists in 
 teaching the muscles of the fingers to move as rapidly as 
 the notes are presented by the brain. Hence the long 
 practice required, before rapid execution is attained. By a 
 long course of schooling, the player can at length partially 
 withdraw the mental superintendence, — he can slumber, 
 or abstract his thoughts from the air, or enter into conver- 
 sation, but the fingers continue their unerring course, in 
 time and with surprising accuracy. 
 
 The most opposite, and apparently incongruous associ- 
 ations of muscular action, are exhibited by rope-dancers, 
 in throwing carving-knives, which fall in a perfect line, 
 points downward, toward the crown of the head, while 
 heavy brass rings are whirled with extreme rapidity in op- 
 posite directions, on each of the great toes. Such exam- 
 ples of the extraordinary feats that may be accomplished 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 55 
 
 by teaching muscles to act differently from what they ap- 
 pear to have been expressly intended, are exceedingly 
 common, but not the less surprising. 
 
 It must not be lost sight of that the two orders of mus- 
 cles are obedient to their proper rulers ; the one being 
 under the express dominion of the mind, and the other 
 influenced only by its appropriate stimulus. Food is the 
 natural excitant of the muscular tissue of the stomach, 
 and the blood, by its presence, stimulates the fibres of the 
 heart. 
 
 But the most perplexing circumstance in relation to 
 the muscles, is the property of contraction. Every mus- 
 cle in the body is always tense ; relaxation is a misapplied 
 expression, if it were understood that the rest of the 
 muscle is like a rope slacked till it becomes pendulous 
 between two points of attachment. However much a 
 joint may be bent, the muscles always remain tense ; ap- 
 parently as much so, as when actually put upon the stretch 
 by the extension of the same joint. They carry their 
 contraction still further in cases of luxations. 
 
 When the hip joint is dislocated, the muscles of the 
 thigh, finding nothing to oppose them, shorten the limb by 
 inches, and hold their grasp so tenaciously that pulleys are 
 required to overcome their unrestrained, unauthorized 
 activity. 
 
 When the joint has been too long neglected, and the 
 head of the bone cannot be carried back to the socket, on 
 account of the violent rigidity of the surrounding muscles, 
 they invariably continue in that condition through life. 
 Such a limb is consequently thicker than its fellow, the 
 circumference being gained at the expense of its length. 
 
 Muscles are never 10 ear y — no, never, under any cir- 
 cumstances whatever ; if that were possible, there would 
 be examples of their inability to answer the requirements 
 of the will, from this cause. The mind’s control over 
 
56 
 
 ANATOMICAL, CLASS BOOK. 
 
 them may be suspended or even lost, as will be shown 
 directly, but still they are always active, and always in a 
 state of contraction. If their irritability were reduced 
 by fatigue, it could not be recalled ; the vis insita, the 
 life of the muscle, survives the departure of the soul, and 
 keeps it in a moderate contraction long after the vital tem- 
 perature has been lost. 
 
 Nothing,, indeed, short of putrefaction, destroys its con- 
 tractility. Death, by which is meant the separation of the 
 spiritual essence from the material body, does not destroy, 
 suddenly, the life of the flesh, as that survives for days and 
 even weeks. The truth of this position is established by 
 the application of galvanism to the bodies of malefactors 
 — the rolling eye-balls, the cramped limbs, the heaving 
 chest, and in the fiendish expression of the muscles of 
 the face. 
 
 An illustration of the permanency of this irritability 
 may be seen also in the quivering meat hung up in the 
 shambles of the market; it is exhibited in the writhings 
 of the eel deprived of its head and its skin ; and in the 
 violent snapping of the tortoise’s jaws, many days after 
 decapitation. 
 
 When we are perfectly exhausted, by reason of long 
 continued fatigue, the muscles are not the sufferers ; they 
 then show their activity by violent exertions. Cramps, 
 severe paroxysms, and painful contractions, at such times 
 supervene, and rarely at any other. These arise from the 
 loss of the nervous power , which is the regulator of the 
 system. 
 
 That power may be diminished by long continued ex- 
 ercise, by extreme watchfulness, or by many other causes. 
 Yet while it is feeble, the muscles twitch, and permanent 
 distortions ensue, if the nerves do not recover their ener- 
 gy. We retire to our beds, not to give the muscles an 
 opportunity of reposing, but to recover nervous influence. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 57 
 
 Every muscle has an antagonist, with a few exceptions. 
 Where there is one to draw in one direction, there is an 
 opponent to counteract ; by this contrivance, a complete 
 freedom of motion is given to the extremities. Each 
 flexor has, opposed to it, an extensor ; and the contraction 
 of one, is partially accomplished by the relaxation of the 
 other ; but the simultaneous action of both, fixes the part 
 on which they exert their power ; thus, the flexors on the 
 fore part of the neck, and their antagonists on the 
 back side, maintain the head in a vertical line with the 
 body. 
 
 Each muscle terminates in a hard, white cord, appa- 
 rently the compressed threads constituting its volume, al- 
 though such is not the fact. These are called tendons. 
 
 At the place of origin, the tendon is thin, inelastic, and 
 short, soon intermingling itself with the substance of the 
 muscle ; but at the other end it assumes another form, 
 being either round, or delicately smooth, tape-like and 
 narrow. This is the part which passes over a joint to be* 
 come attached to the next bone. Tendons are nearly in* 
 sensible, being so far removed from the ordinary sensibil- 
 ity of everything else, that they rarely participate in the 
 diseases to which all the soft portions of the frame am 
 subject. 
 
 To obviate friction, and prevent interference with its 
 neighbors, each tendon is invariably conducted through a 
 sheath, in which there is a copious secretion of a fluid, 
 resembling oil, that keeps the cord soft, that it may glide 
 easily. 
 
 Symmetry of form is wholly referable to the tendons. 
 Without them, the exceeding bulk of the muscle would 
 produce, according to our present notion of the beautiful, 
 the most hideous deformities. 
 
 Were the muscles of the fore arm carried to the palm, 
 of the same size that they have at the elbow, the wrist 
 
5 $ 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 would be the diameter of the elbow — rendering the hand 
 unwieldy and nearly useless. 
 
 To the free circulation of the blood into its inmost re- 
 cesses, the muscle is indebted for its vigor; and to the 
 nerves, for that sensitiveness which renders it susceptible 
 of painful or pleasurable sensations. 
 
 In its constitution, however, the muscle possesses a 
 sensibility, completely beyond the control of any nerves in 
 the body ; a curious circumstance indeed, referred to in 
 speaking of its vis insita. An exhibition of this proper- 
 ty — this disposition to recoil under excitement ; to remove 
 itself from the contact of foreign substances ; in short, to 
 preserve itself from the destructive agency of whatever 
 has a tendency to exhaust its latent irritability, is within 
 common reach. A demonstration of this phenomenon 
 may be witnessed in the hearts of reptiles, pulsating by 
 the prick of a pin, long after being removed from the ani- 
 mal ; in the motion of the intestines of cats and dogs, cut 
 into strips. While the vital temperature remains, they 
 move like earth-worms, and when they have ceased to 
 move, their irritability can be roused again by the applica- 
 tion of stimuli. 
 
 Here, then, is exemplified the existence of a property, 
 purely vital, which never was, and irt the instance before 
 us, could not be influenced by the nervous system. 
 
 Removed as this property is, from the direct influence 
 of the nerves, it becomes, under peculiar circumstances, 
 the only hope. In cases of suspended animation, as in 
 drowning, swooning, &c, there is a prostration of the 
 nervous system — it cannot act — the will cannot produce 
 an impression on the muscles, because its messengers, the 
 nerves, are no longer in a condition, from some unknown 
 cause, to transmit the orders. At this juncture, if no 
 saving efforts are made, the individual dies. But a skil- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 59 
 
 ful application of agents to the muscles, raises their tone 
 to that high degree of excitability, that they actually re- 
 suscitate the expiring spirit of the nerves. The instant 
 that is effected, the sign of success is manifested by 
 the obedience of the muscles; the poor sufferer moves a 
 limb, because he determines it; order is at the same in- 
 stant restored in the nerves, and the sufferer is restored 
 to life, and his weeping friends to happiness. 
 
 A CATALOGUE OF THE PRINCIPAL MUSCLES. 
 
 Perhaps it may be thought that the following table is 
 not only unnecessarily minute, but altogether too techni- 
 cal; but as we could devise no method of rendering it 
 much more simple, without making the whole unintelligi- 
 ble, — the scientific names of the points of origin and in- 
 sertion, have been preserved. It is not expected that 
 children will either be interested or required to learn this 
 intricate division of anatomy, even should the first prin- 
 ciples of the science be generally taught in common 
 schools. 
 
 For instructors, however, drawing-school pupils and 
 young artists, the few technical words which are retained, 
 will be of consequence, as they will be able to refer to the 
 skeleton, (which we also hope will be considered, at no 
 very remote period, an indispensable part of school appa- 
 ratus,) for the exact places to which they refer. 
 
 Note. — Where the muscle has no fellow, it is marked 
 thus. * It should be recollected that the muscles of one side 
 of the body only, are here considered. 
 
60 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 M USCLE3 OF THE HEAD, EYELIDS, EYEBALL, NOSE AND MOUTH. 
 
 Name. Arises from 
 
 Occipito-frontalis.* The upper ridge of the oc- 
 
 cipital bone ; its aponeurosis 
 covers the upper part of the 
 head. 
 
 Corrugator supercilii. Above the root of the nose. 
 
 Orbicularis palpebrarum. 
 
 Levator palpebrae superi- 
 oris. 
 
 Rectus superior. } 
 Rectus inferior. f 
 Rectus internus. t 
 Rectus externus. j 
 Obliquus superior, or Tro- 
 chlearis. 
 
 Obliquus inferior. 
 
 Around the edge of the 
 orbit. 
 
 The bottom of the orbit 
 near the optic foramen. 
 
 Around the optic foramen 
 of the sphsenoid bone, at the 
 bottom of the -orbit. 
 
 Near the optic foramen, and 
 passes through a loop in the 
 internal canthus of the eye, 
 and is reflected to be 
 
 The ductus nasalis, and is 
 inserted 
 
 Fig 31. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 
 31. 
 
 a, the pyramidalis 
 nasi; o, the com- 
 pressor nasi; a, oc- 
 cipito frontalis ; c, 
 orbicularis palpe- 
 brarum; p, corruga- 
 tor supercilii ; n, le- 
 vator palpebrce supe- 
 rioris ; f, zygomati- 
 cus major ; e, zygo- 
 maticus minor ; i, 
 orbicularis oris ; k, 
 depressor anguii or- 
 is ; m, depressor la- 
 bii inferioris ; h, the 
 masseter muscle ; g, 
 the buccinator ; d. 
 levator labiisuperio- 
 sis alteque nasi ; g, 
 the parietal bone 
 seen beyond the cor- 
 onal suture. 
 
 m 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS EOOR. 
 
 61 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE HEAD, EYELIDS, EYEBALL, NOSE AND MOUTH. 
 
 Inserted, into 
 
 The skin of the eyebrows 
 and root of the nose. 
 
 The inner part of the occi- 
 pito-frontalis. 
 
 The inner corner of the 
 eyes. 
 
 The cartilage of the tarsus 
 of the upper eyelid. 
 
 The anterior part of the 
 tunica sclerotica, opposite to 
 each other. 
 
 The posterior part of the 
 bulb, between the rectus and 
 the entrance of the optic nerve. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To pull the skin of the head 
 backward — raise the eye- 
 brows and skin of the fore- 
 head. 
 
 To wrinkle the eyebrows. 
 
 To shut the eye. 
 
 To open the eye, by raising 
 the upper eyelid. 
 
 To raise it upward. 
 
 To pull it downward. 
 
 To turn it to the nose. 
 
 To move it outward. 
 
 To roll the eye, and turn 
 the pupil downward and out- 
 ward. 
 
 Opposite to the former. To roll the eye. 
 
 By recurring to the plate, (Fig. 31,) the pupil will form a tolera 
 bly accurate idea of the muscles of the face. They lie very super- 
 ficially, just under the skin, and are all muscles of expression ; 
 therefore only perfectly developed in the European, or white man’s 
 face, in whose countenance the passions of the mind arc strongly 
 exhibited. In the negro, owing partly to the color of the skin, the 
 expression is necessarily very imperfect: — he can never have maj- 
 esty nor dignity, or an elevation of thought, portrayed in his fea- 
 tures. When the jet black negro expresses his emotions, — unless 
 the teeth, and the whites of the eyes are exposed, — there is little va- 
 riety of expression, because no shades are created by the contrac- 
 tions of the muscles. This fact is familiar to artists, — to the en- 
 graver and the painter. The pictures of colored persons are always 
 very nearly alike ; the portrait of one, indeed, will answer for 
 many, — and the circumstance is wholly referable to the imperfect 
 manner in which the light and shadows are created on the skin. 
 
 The muscles of expression are fewer and smaller, as animals de- 
 scend the scale of creation. 
 
 6 
 
62 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS IIOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Levator labii superions 
 alseque nasi. 
 
 Levator labii superioris pro- 
 prius. 
 
 Levator anguli oris. 
 Zygomaticus major. 
 
 Zygomaticus minor. 
 Buccinator. 
 
 Depressor anguli oris. 
 Depressor labii inferioris. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The nasal process of the 
 superior maxillary bone. 
 
 The upper jaw, under the 
 orbit. 
 
 Tbe orbitar foramen of the 
 sup. max. bone. 
 
 The os jugale, near the 
 zygomatic suture, and runs 
 downward. 
 
 Above the zygomaticus ma- 
 jor. 
 
 The sockets of the last mo- 
 lares, and the coronoid pro- 
 cess of the lower jaw. 
 
 The lower edge of the un- 
 der jaw, near the chin. 
 
 The inferior part of the 
 lower jaw, next the chin. 
 
 Fig. 32. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 6:J 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The upper lip and ala of 
 the nose. 
 
 The middle of the upper 
 lip. 
 
 The orbicularis, at the an- 
 gle of the mouth. 
 
 The angle of the mouth, 
 with the depressor of the lip. 
 
 Use. 
 
 It raises the upper lip, and 
 dilates the nostrils. 
 
 To pull the upper lip di- 
 rectly upward. 
 
 To raise the corner of the 
 mouth. 
 
 To inflate the cheek and 
 raise the angle of the mouth. 
 
 The angle of the mouth. 
 
 The angle of the mouth, 
 and is perforated by the duct 
 ■of the parotid gland. 
 
 The angle of the mouth. 
 
 The middle of the under lip. 
 
 To raise the angle of the 
 mouth outward. 
 
 To contract the mouth, and 
 draw the angle of it outward 
 and backward. 
 
 To draw the corner of the 
 mouth downward. 
 
 To draw the under lip down- 
 wardand outwar d. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 32. 
 
 d. The occipitofrontalis. 
 
 e. The orbicularis palpebrarum. 
 
 f. The corrugator supercilii. 
 
 g. The compressor naris. 
 
 h. The orbicularis oris. 
 
 i. The levator labii superioris alaeque nasi. 
 
 j. The levator anguli oris. 
 
 k. The zygomaticus major and minor. 
 t. The depressor anguli oris. 
 
 >n. The depressor labii inferioris, 
 
 n. The buccinator. 
 
 o. The masseter. 
 
 p. The temporal fascia, or aponeurosis. 
 
 2. The parotid gland, which supplies the mouth with saliva. 
 
 3. Steno’s duct, to conduct the fluid into the mouth. 
 
 4. The temporal artery. 
 
 5. The facial artery. 
 
 Farts seen in the neck. 
 
 q. The sterno-cleido mastoideus. 
 
 r. The omo-hyoideus. 
 
 s. The sterno-hyoideus. 
 
 t. The sternothyroideus. 
 m. The digastricus. 
 
 v. The stylo-hyoideus. 
 
 The mylo-hyoideus. 
 
 6. The submaxillary gland , — also pours saliva into the mouth. 
 
 7. The external jugular vein. 
 
 S. The sheath containing the carotid artery. 
 
(54 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Orbicularis oris.* 
 
 Depressor labii superions 
 aleque nasi. 
 
 Constrictor nasi. 
 
 Levator menti vel labii in- 
 ferioris. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE 
 
 Superior auris, or attoliens 
 aurem. 
 
 Anterior auris. 
 
 Posterior auris, or retrahens 
 auris. 
 
 Helicis major. 
 
 Helicis minor. 
 
 Tragicus. 
 
 Antitragus. 
 
 Transversus auris. 
 
 ' MUSCLES OF THE 
 
 Laxator tympani. 
 
 Tensor tympani. 
 
 Stapedius. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 This muscle surrounds the 
 lips, and is in a great measure 
 formed by the buccinator, zy- 
 gomatici, and others, which 
 move the lip. 
 
 The sockets of the upper 
 incisor teeth. 
 
 The root of one wing of the 
 nose, and 
 
 Tire lower jaw, at the root 
 of the incisors. 
 
 EXTERNAL EAR. 
 
 The tendon -of the occipito- 
 frontalis above the ear. 
 
 Near the back part of the 
 zygoma. 
 
 The mastoid process, by 
 two and sometimes three fas- 
 ciculi. 
 
 The upper, anterior, and 
 acute part of the helix. 
 
 The interior and anterior 
 part of the helix. 
 
 The outer and middle part 
 of the concha, near the tragus. 
 
 From the root of the inner 
 part of the helix. 
 
 The upper part of the con- 
 cha. 
 
 INTERNAL EaR. 
 
 The spinous process of the 
 sphienoid bone. 
 
 The cartilaginous extremity 
 of the Eustachian tube. 
 
 A little cavern in the pe- 
 trous portion, near the cells 
 of the mastoid process. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 65 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The root of the ala nasi and 
 upper lip. 
 
 goes across to the other. 
 
 The skin in the centre of 
 the chin. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE 
 
 The root of the cartilagi- 
 nous tube of the ear. 
 
 The eminence behind the 
 helix. 
 
 The septum that divides the 
 scapha and concha. 
 
 The cartilage of the helix, 
 a little above the tragus. 
 
 The crus of the helix. 
 
 The upper part of the tra- 
 gus. 
 
 The upper part of the anti- 
 tragus. 
 
 The inner part of the helix. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE 
 
 The long process of the 
 malleus. 
 
 The handle of the malleus. 
 
 The posterior part of the 
 head of the stapes. 
 
 6 * 
 
 Use. 
 
 To shut the mouth, by con- 
 tracting the lips. 
 
 To pull the ala nasi and 
 upper lip down. 
 
 To compress the wings of 
 the nose. 
 
 To raise the under lip and 
 skin of the chin. 
 
 EXTERNAL EAR. 
 
 To draw the ear upward, 
 and make it tense. 
 
 To raise this eminence for- 
 ward. 
 
 To draw the ear back, and 
 stretch the concha. 
 
 To depress the upper part 
 of the helix. 
 
 To contract the fissure. 
 
 To depress the concha, and 
 pull the tragus a little out- 
 ward. 
 
 To dilate the mouth of the 
 concha. 
 
 To draw these parts toward 
 each other. 
 
 INTERNAL EAR. 
 
 To draw the malleus ob- 
 liquely forward, toward its 
 origin. 
 
 To pull the malleus and 
 membrane of the tympanum 
 toward the petrous portion. 
 
 To draw the stapes oblique- 
 ly upward toward the cavern. 
 
m 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 Name. • 
 Temporalis. 
 
 Masseter. 
 
 Pterygoideus internus. 
 Pterygoideus externus. 
 
 ./Irises from 
 
 The lower part of the pari- 
 etal bone and os frontis ; 
 squamous part of the tempo- 
 ral bone : back part of the os 
 jugale ; the temporal process 
 of the sphsenoid bone, and the 
 aponeurosis which covers it. 
 
 The sup. max. bone, near 
 the os jugale; and from the 
 anterior part of the zygoma. 
 
 The internal pterygoid pro- 
 cess of the sphtenoid bone. 
 
 The external pterygoid pro- 
 cess. 
 
 MUSCLES ABOUT THE NECK. 
 
 Platysma myoides. The cellular membrane cov- 
 
 ering the pectoral and deltoid 
 muscles. 
 
 Sterno-cleido-mastoideus. The upper part of the ster- 
 num, and fore part of the clav- 
 icle. 
 
 Fig. 33. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 67 
 
 muscles of the lower jaw. 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The coronxnd process of the 
 lower jaw, its fibres being' 
 bundled together and pressed 
 into a small compass, so as to 
 pass under the jugum, or zyg- 
 oma. 
 
 The angle of the lower jaw 
 upwards to the basis of the 
 corOnoid process. 
 
 The lower jaw on its inner 
 side, and near its angle. 
 
 The condyloid process of 
 the lower jaw and capsular 
 ligament. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To move the lower jaw up 
 ward. 
 
 To raise and move the jaw 
 a little forward and back- 
 ward. 
 
 To raise the lower jaw, and 
 draw it a little to one side. 
 
 To move the jaw, and to 
 prevent the ligament of the 
 jaw from being pinched. 
 
 MUSCLES ABOUT THE NECK. 
 
 The side of the chin and 
 integuments of the cheek. 
 
 To draw the cheeks and skin 
 of the face downward. 
 
 The mastoid process, and as To move the head to one 
 far back as the occipital su- side and bend it forward, 
 ture. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 33. 
 
 A, and b. sterno cleido mastoid eus ; h. stylo hyoidens ; g, g, the 
 two bellies of the digastricus ; f, sterno hyoidens ; i, the lower end 
 of the mastoideus ot the right side; e, omo hyoidens; d, the 09 
 hyoides ; c, the clavicle; k, complexus. 
 
 Under the sterno cleido mastoid muscle, bounded by the letters a 
 and b, in the opposite drawing, are a vaiiety of b< aulilul, libbon- 
 like muscles, which are generally attached to the bone of the 
 tongue, and the vocal box, — called the larynx , which is the protu- 
 berance in the front part of the throat. Again, those muscles which 
 arise about the base of the skull, under the ear, and angle of the 
 under jaw, are also inserted into the same places, — so that the bone 
 and larynx are moveable fulcrums, — increasing the power of the 
 muscles on cither side, by changing their position. By this simple 
 contrivance, the contraction of the muscles compress the windpipe, 
 and thus increase, or vary the tone of the voice, by diminishing the 
 diameter of the air tube. Thus, bad singers in sounding a high note 
 stretch back the head ; thus, too, unconsciously press the musical 
 pipe into the smallest diameter. To sound a bass note, the chin is 
 brought towards the bi east, — and the same muscles are relaxed, 
 and the diameter of the tube is at once ir.cieased. 
 
63 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETff] 
 
 OF T 
 
 Name. 
 
 Digastricus. 
 
 Mylo-hyoideus. 
 
 Genio-hyoideus. 
 
 Genio-glossus. 
 
 Hyo-glossus. 
 
 Lingualis. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN 
 
 Sterno-hyoideus. 
 
 Omo-hyoideus. 
 
 Sterno-thyroideus. 
 
 Thyreo-hyoideus, or Ilyo- 
 thyroideus. 
 
 Crico-thyroideus. 
 
 THE LOWER JAW AND BONE 
 TONGUE. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 A fossa at the root of the 
 mastoid process. 
 
 The inner surface of the 
 jaw bone. 
 
 The inside of the chin. 
 
 The inside of the chin. 
 
 The horn, basis, and carti- 
 lage of the os hyoides. 
 
 The root of the tongue lat- 
 erally. 
 
 THE os HYOIDES AND TRUNK. 
 
 The sternum and clavicle. 
 
 Near the coracoid process 
 of the scapula. 
 
 The upper and inner part of 
 the sternum. 
 
 Part of the basis and horn 
 of the os hyoides. 
 
 The side of the cricoid 
 cartilage. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN THE LOWER JAW AND OS 
 
 HYOIDES, 
 
 Stylo-glossus. 
 
 Stylo-hyoideus. 
 
 Stylo-pharyngeus. 
 
 Circumflexus, 
 
 or 
 
 Tensor palati. 
 
 Levator palati mollis. 
 
 LATERALLY. 
 
 The apex of the styloid 
 process. 
 
 The basis, and about the 
 middle of the styloid process. 
 
 The root of the styloid pro- 
 cess. 
 
 Near the Eustachian tube, 
 and passes through the hamu- 
 lus of the pterygoid process, 
 to be 
 
 The point of the os petros- 
 um, the Eustachian tube, and 
 sphsenoid bone. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 69 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN THE LOWER JAW AND BONE 
 OF THE TONGUE. 
 
 Inserted, into 
 
 The lower and anterior part 
 of the chin. 
 
 The basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 The basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 The tongue, forming part 
 of its substance. 
 
 Into the tongue laterally. 
 
 The extremity of the tongue. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To draw the lower jaw 
 downward. 
 
 To move the os hyoides up- 
 ward. 
 
 To move the os hyoides up- 
 ward. 
 
 To move the tongue in va- 
 rious directions. 
 
 To draw the tongue down- 
 ward and inward. 
 
 To shorten and draw the 
 tongue backward. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN 
 
 The basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 The basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 The thyroid cartilage. 
 
 The side of the thyroid car- 
 tilage. 
 
 The inferior horn of the 
 thyroid cartilage. 
 
 THE OS HYOIDES AND TRUNK. 
 
 To draw the os hjoides 
 downward. 
 
 To draw the os hyoides 
 downward. 
 
 To pull the thyroid cartilage 
 downward. 
 
 To raise the cartilage, and 
 depress the bone. 
 
 To pull the thyroid cartil- 
 age towards the cricoid. 
 
 os 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN THE LOWER JAW AND 
 HYOIDES, LATERALLY. 
 
 The side of the root of the 
 tongue. 
 
 The basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 The edge of the pharynx, 
 and back of the thyroid carti- 
 lage. 
 
 The velum pendulum pal- 
 
 ati. 
 
 To pull the tongue back- 
 ward. 
 
 To draw the os hyoides up- 
 ward. 
 
 To dilate the pharynx, and 
 raise the cartilage. 
 
 To draw the velum pendu- 
 lum palati obliquely down- 
 ward, and stretch it. 
 
 The velum pendulum pal- 
 ati, being expanded upon it. 
 
 To pull the velum pendu- 
 lum backward and upward. 
 
70 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ABOUT THE ENTRY OF THE FAUCES. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Constrictor faucium. 
 
 Palato-Pharyngeus. 
 
 Azygos uvulae.* 
 
 Jl rises from 
 
 Near the root of the tongue, 
 on each side, and goes round 
 to be 
 
 The middle of the soft 
 palate, goes round the entry 
 of the fauces, the tendon of 
 the circumflexus palati, and 
 velum pendulum palati, to be 
 
 The commissure of the ossa 
 palati. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE POSTERIOR PART OF THE PHARYNX. 
 
 Constrictor pharyngius infe- 
 rior. 
 
 Constrictor pharyngius me- 
 dius. 
 
 Constrictor pharyngius su- 
 perior. 
 
 The cricoid ar.d thyroid 
 cartilages. 
 
 The horns, and appendix of 
 the os hyoides. 
 
 The pterygoid process, the 
 lower jaw, and the cuneiform 
 process of the os occipitis. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ABOUT THE GLOTTIS. 
 
 Crico-arytenoideus posti- 
 cus. 
 
 Crico-arytiEnoideus later- 
 alis, or obliquus. 
 
 Thyreo-arytenoideus. 
 
 Arytenoideus obliquus.* 
 
 Arytenoideus transversus.* 
 
 Thyreo-epiglottideus. 
 
 Aryteno-epiglottideus. 
 
 The cricoid cartilage poste- 
 riorly. 
 
 The side of the cricoid car- 
 tilage. 
 
 The back of the thyroid 
 cartilage. 
 
 The root of one arytenoid 
 cartilage- 
 
 One of the arytenoid car- 
 tilages. 
 
 The thyroid cartilage. 
 
 The upper part of the ary- 
 tenoid cartilage laterally. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 71 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ABOUT THE ENTRY OF THE FAUCES. 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The middle of the velum 
 pendulum palati, near the 
 uvula. 
 
 The upper and posterior 
 part of the thyroid cartilage. 
 
 The extremity of the uvula. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To raise the tongue, and 
 draw the velum toward it. 
 
 To contract the arch of the 
 fauce. 
 
 To shorten and raise the 
 uvula. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE POSTERIOR PART OF THE PHARYNX. 
 
 The middle of the pharynx. 
 The ambit of the pharynx. 
 
 The middle of the pharynx. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED 
 
 The back of the arytienoid 
 cartilage. 
 
 The side of the arytenoid 
 cartilage. 
 
 The fore part of the aryte- 
 noid cartilage. 
 
 The extremity of the other. 
 
 The other arytenoid carti- 
 lage. 
 
 The side of the epiglottis. 
 
 The side of the epiglottis. 
 
 To compress part of the 
 pharynx. 
 
 To compress the pharynx, 
 and draw the os hyoides up- 
 ward. 
 
 To move the pharynx up- 
 ward and forward, and to 
 compress its upper part. 
 
 BOUT THE GLOTTIS. 
 
 To open the glottis. 
 
 To open the glottis. 
 
 To draw the arytenoid car- 
 tilage forward. 
 
 To draw them toward each 
 other. 
 
 To shut the glottis. 
 
 To pull the epiglottis ob- 
 liquely downward. 
 
 To move the epiglottis out- 
 ward. 
 
72 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE ABDOMEN. 
 
 .Arises from, 
 
 The lower edges of the 
 eight inferior ribs near the 
 cartilages. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the three last lumbar verte- 
 bra, back of the sacrum, and 
 spine of the ilium. 
 
 the ilium. 
 
 Rectus abdominis. The outside of the sternum 
 
 and xyphoid cartilage. 
 
 Pyramidalis. The anterior upper part of 
 
 J the pubis. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Obliquus descendens exter- 
 
 nus. 
 
 Obliquus ascendens inter- 
 
 nus. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 73 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE ABDOMEN. 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The linea alba, ossa pubis, To compress the abdomen, 
 and spine of the ilium. 
 
 The cartilages of all the To compress the abdomen, 
 false ribs, linea alba, and pu- 
 bis, and sternum, by a flat 
 tendon. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 34. 
 
 g. The obliquus internus, with its tendon divided, to show 
 
 h. The pyramidalis. 
 
 i. The rectus, abdominis. Beneath the internal oblique there is 
 situated 
 
 k. The transversalis abdominalis, and 
 
 l. The fascia transversalis. 
 
 The tendons of the abdominal muscles, form junctions in front, 
 where their broad white tendons meet, which are denominated 
 lines ; — and that which runs exactly in the middle, from the lower 
 point of the sternum, to the pubis, is the linea alba or white line. 
 Again, the long abdominal muscles, lying each side of this linea 
 alba, are intersected, several times, between their two extremities, 
 by similar tendinous lines, which, in reality, divides them into a 
 chain of muscles. This structure has reference to increasing their 
 power, by a series of contractions, along their course, which thereby 
 answers a second intention, viz, preserving a symmetry of form. By 
 consulting' Fig. 34, page 72, bolh the vertical and transverse lines 
 are discoverable. Statues representing action, invariably' exhibit 
 the muscles of the bowels thrown into ridges. Upon the princi- 
 ples adverted to in the preliminary essay on myology, without these 
 transverse bands, the bellies of the long recti muscle, in order to 
 pull the chest, as in stooping for example, while seated in a chair, 
 so as to bring the breast down to the knees, would have a bulk, by 
 the process of contraction, equal to a two quart measure. B the 
 introduction of the transverse tendinous lines, two vastly im; (rant 
 results are obtained, — increased power and beauty of form. 
 
 The linea alba throughout To compress the abdominal 
 its whole length, and into the viscera, 
 ensiform cartilage. 
 
 The side of the symphysis 
 of the pubis. 
 
 The linea alba, below the 
 umbilicus. 
 
 To compress the abdomen, 
 and bend the trunk. 
 
 To assist the lower portion 
 of the rectus. 
 
 7 
 
74 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK,' 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED WITHIN THE PELVIS. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Obturator internus. 
 Coccygeus. 
 
 Jh'ises from 
 
 The foramen ovale, obtura- 
 tor ligament, ilium, ischium, 
 and pubis. 
 
 The spinous process of the 
 ischium. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED WITHIN THE CAVITY OF THE ABDOMEN. 
 
 Quadratus lumborum. The posterior part of the 
 
 spine of the ilium. 
 
 Psoas parvus. The transverse process of 
 
 the last dorsal vertebra. 
 
 Fig. 35. 
 
 Explanation of Fig 35 
 K. The iliacus internus. 
 
 R. The psoas magnus. 
 
 S. The obturator exter- 
 nus. 
 
 S 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 75 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 A large pit between the tro- 
 chanters of the femur. 
 
 The extremity of the sa- 
 crum and os coccygis. 
 
 WITHIN THE PELVIS. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To roll the femur obliquely 
 outward. 
 
 To move the coccyx for- 
 ward and inward. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED WITHIN THE CAVITY OF THE ABDOMEN. 
 
 The transverse apophyses To support the spine and 
 of the loins and last spurious draw it to one side, 
 rib. 
 
 The brim of the pelvis, To bend the loins forward, 
 near the place of the aceta- 
 bulum. 
 
 On the inside of the broad hip bone, os innominatum, seen on the 
 opposite page, Fig. 35, and also running up by the side of the lumbar 
 vertebrae, thiee muscles have their oiigin, — that bear a highly im- 
 portant part in the locomotive power of the body. In these, as in 
 every other place in the system, a two fold intention is answered. 
 First, — these thiee muscles are cushions, — on which the coils of 
 the intestines rest. Without them, some other provision would have 
 been necessary, as a soft bed is indispensable for then. , in the violent 
 exercises of running, leaping, or even walking Secondly, the 
 tendons of the psoas magnus and iliacus internus, are sent over the 
 brim of the pelvis, to wind down the inside of the groin, close to the 
 bone, to reach the backside of the thigh bone, where they are fast- 
 ened. Obscure as they are, these muscles, when standing on our 
 feet, maintain the body in an erect position. If we desire to move 
 forward, these muscles lift up the whole limb, — and when they re- 
 lax, the foot strikes the ground again. If, while sitting, the knee is 
 raised towards the chest, the act is accomplished by these two mus- 
 cles. In walking and running, therefore, as they are the lifters-up 
 of the leg, their services could not be dispensed with. A lumbar 
 abscess, a painful disease, wholly forbidding the movement of the 
 limb of the side in which it occurs, is a collection of matter under 
 the psoas magnus, and next to the back bone, near the line R, on 
 the plate. As the abscess cannot be very safely discharged by a 
 surgical operation, through the muscles ol the back, in protracted 
 cases, the matter sometimes follows the muscles, quite into the limb, 
 and forces its way down, even to the knee, before it escapes. This 
 dreadfu^disease has been induced, by lying on the damp ground, 
 after freely exercising; and by unnecessary feats of strength, in 
 lifting burdens, in the careless days of youthful vigor. 
 
76 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 Psoas magnus. 
 
 lliacus interims. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The bodies and processes 
 of the last dorsal and all the 
 lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 The internal surface of the 
 spine of the ilium. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE THORAX. 
 
 Pectoralis major. The clavicle, sternum and 
 
 seven true ribs. 
 
 Fig. 36. 
 
 Stibclavius. 
 
 The cartilage of the first rib. 
 
 The third, fourth, and fifth 
 ribs. 
 
 Pectoralis minor. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 77 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The os femoris, a little be- To bend the thigh forward, 
 low the trochanter minor. 
 
 The femur in common with To assist the psoas magnus. 
 the psoas magnus. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE THORAX. 
 
 The upper and inner part of To draw the arm forward, 
 the humerus. or obliquely forward. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 36. 
 
 а. The pectoralis major. 
 
 б. b. The obliquus abdominis externus descendens : beneath these 
 muscles the following: — 
 
 c. The pectoralis minor. 
 
 d. The serratus magnus antieus. 
 
 e. The external intercostal muscles. 
 
 f. The internal intercostal muscles. 
 
 g. The obliquus abdominis internus ascendens. 
 
 By returning to the anatomy of the ribs, it is there shown that 
 they are constructed to move : — breathing is effected by increasing 
 and diminishing the capacity of the chest, as the lungs are inflated 
 or collapsed. To carry on this operation, an appropriate class of 
 muscles take their rise on, and about the libs and sternum, to be ex- 
 clusively engaged in this respitory action. Between the edges of 
 the ribs, short oblique muscles, one the internal and the other the 
 external , crossing each other, like suspenders on a man’s back, — 
 are untiring in their labors : — when they contract, the ribs are 
 brought together; and when relaxed, the diameter of the chest is 
 enlarged. All the muscles on the breast and sides, are remotely 
 respitory agents. If the arms are fixed, by their contraction the 
 ribs are drawn outwardly. Asthmatic persons, because the small 
 intercostal muscles do not relax enough, bring the pectoral muscles 
 to their aid, by raising their hands and holding on to a door, or a 
 beam, for example, above the head. This enables them to pull 
 open, as it were, the bottom of the chest. Ladies often swoon and 
 sometimes drop down dead instantly, in consequence of lacing the 
 chest so tightly, that the ribs cannot possibly move. 
 
 The under surface of the 
 clavicle. 
 
 The coracoid process of the 
 scapula. 
 
 7 * 
 
 To move the clavicle down- 
 ward. 
 
 To roll the scapula. 
 
78 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Serratus major anticus. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The eight superior ribs. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN THE RIBS AND WITHIN THE 
 THORAX. 
 
 Intercostales externi. 
 Intercostales interni. 
 
 Triangularis, or 
 
 Sterno-costalis. 
 
 . 1 
 
 The lower edge of each 
 upper rib. 
 
 Like the former, their fibres 
 are directed from behind for- 
 ward. 
 
 The middle and inferior 
 part of the sternum. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE NECK, 
 CLOSE TO THE VERTEBRAL 
 
 Longus colli. 
 
 Rectus internus capitis ma- 
 jor. 
 
 Rectus internus capitis mi- 
 nor. 
 
 Rectus capitis lateralis. 
 
 The bodies of the three 
 upper dorsal and transverse 
 processes of the four last 
 cervical. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the five last cervical vertebra. 
 
 The fore part of the atlas. 
 
 The transverse process of 
 the atlas. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE POSTERIOR PART OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 Trapezius, or Cucullaris. 
 
 Latissimus dorsi. 
 
 Serratus posticus inferior- 
 
 The os occipitis and the 
 spinous processes of all the 
 vertebrae of the neck and 
 back. 
 
 The spine of the ilium spin- 
 spinous process of the sacrum, 
 lumbar and inferior dorsal ver- 
 tebras ; adheres to the scapula 
 and inferior false ribs. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the two last dorsal and three 
 lumbar vertebra. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 79 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The base of the scapula. To bring the scapula for- 
 
 ward. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED BETWEEN THE RIBS AND WITHIN THE 
 THORAX. 
 
 The superior edge of each To elevate the ribs, 
 lower rib. 
 
 The cartilages of the five To depress the cartilages 
 last true ribs. of the ribs. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE ANTERIOR PART OF THE NECK, 
 CLOSE TO THE VERTEBRA. 
 
 The anterior tubercle of the To pull the neck to one 
 dentatus. side. 
 
 The cuneiform process of 
 the os occipitis. 
 
 The os occipitis, near the 
 condyloid process. 
 
 The os occipitis, near the 
 mastoid process. 
 
 To bend the head forward. 
 
 To assist the former. 
 
 To move the head to one 
 side. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE POSTERIOR PART OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 The clavicle, part of the 
 acromion, and the spine of the 
 scapula. 
 
 The os humeri, between its 
 two tuberosities in the edge 
 of the groove for the tendon 
 of the biceps muscle. 
 
 The lower edge of the three 
 or four lowermost ribs, near 
 their cartilages. 
 
 To move the scapula, bend 
 the neck, and pull the head 
 backward. 
 
 To draw the os humeri 
 backward, and to roll it upon 
 its axis. 
 
 To draw the ribs outward, 
 downward, and backward. 
 
80 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Rhomboideus. 
 
 Splenius. 
 
 Serratus superior posticus. 
 
 Spinalis dorsi. 
 
 Levatores costarum, or 
 Supra-cotales. 
 
 Sacro-lumbalis. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the three last cervical, and 
 four first dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 The spines of the four last 
 cervical, and four superior dor- 
 sal vertebrae. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the three last cervical, and two 
 superior dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 Two spinous processes of 
 the loins, and three lower of 
 the back. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the last cervical and the dor- 
 sal vertebrae. 
 
 The sacrum, spine of the 
 ilium, and the spinous and 
 transverse processes of the 
 lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 Explanations of 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 a. The trapezi- 
 us. 
 
 b. The latissimus 
 
 dorsi. 
 
 c. The rhomboi- 
 deus minor. 
 
 d. The rhomboi- 
 deus major. 
 
 e. The serratus 
 posticus inferior. 
 
 f. The levator 
 anguli scapulae. 
 
 Blocks were in- 
 troduced to repre- 
 sent the figure in a 
 horizontal position, 
 that the muscles 
 might be more dis- 
 tinctly seen. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 81 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The basis of the scapula, at 
 its upper and lower part. 
 
 The two first cervical verte- 
 bra, and the side of the os 
 occipitis. 
 
 The second, third, and fourth 
 ribs, by three neat fleshy 
 tongues. 
 
 All the spinous processes of 
 the back, except the first. 
 
 The angles of the ribs. 
 
 The lower edge of each rib, 
 by a flat tendon. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To move the scapula up- 
 wards and backward. 
 
 To move the head back- 
 ward, and also to one side. 
 
 To expand the thorax, by 
 elevating the ribs. 
 
 To extend the vertebra. 
 
 To lift the ribs upward. 
 
 To draw the ribs down- 
 ward, to move the body upon 
 its axis, to assist the longissi- 
 mus dorsi, and to turn the neck 
 back, or to one side. 
 
 All the muscles of the back, clearly defined in Fig. 37, on the 
 opposite page, are broad, thin, and generally produce the slow mo- 
 tion of the limbs. In the middle of the trapezius , marked a, is a 
 white line, where the fibres of the muscle, on either side meet and 
 adhere to the spinous processes of the bones of the neck. On this 
 line, in quadrupeds, is placed a powerfully strong cord, by the far- 
 riers called paxwax, — but by anatomists — ligamentum nucha:, 
 which, being attached to the back bone, between the shoulders, pre- 
 vents their heavy head from drooping to the ground, It will not re- 
 lax : — when they drink or feed, on a level with their feet, the nose, 
 even by a voluntary effort, barely reaches to the earth. 
 
92 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fiff. 38. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 83 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 38. 
 
 a, upper portion of the trapezius ; i. sterno cleido mastoideus ; d. 
 the deltoid portion of the trapezius ; f. the latissimus dor si ; 
 n. n. n. n. portions of the latissimus, rising by (limitations from the 
 ribs ; g. and b. tendinous continuation of the latissimus into the 
 fibres of the gluteus maxirnus ; h. the deltoides muscle, to raise the 
 arm; k, e, m, the infra spinatus, belonging to the shoulder; c, the 
 clavicular portion of the deltoides ; l, the intermingling of the fibres 
 of the gluteus maximus, and latissimus dorsi. 
 
 The artist was particularly fortunate in delineating the muscles in 
 the accompanying diagram. No plate could more accurately show 
 the relation which one bears to the other, nor more truly represent 
 the converging fibres, all centering in the tendons. As in the de- 
 monstration of the eye, it can also be said here, — that there are 
 coats of muscles on the back and sides. One overlaps the edges of 
 another, in such a perfect manner, as to leave no deep spaces : — an 
 even covering is thus spread over the skeleton. The latissimus 
 dorsi. marked/, is one of the most beautiful in the body; and its 
 utility is proved every moment. Its office is to bring down the hand. 
 Before man invented instruments which have superseded, to consid- 
 erable extent, the primitive use of the hand, in some particulars, — 
 his fist was a mallet, — the arm the handle, and this muscle, the 
 power that gave force to the blow. Those mechanics who are con- 
 stantly using hammers, and axes, increase its size and strength, 
 amazingly. If the arm, on the other hand, be firmly fixed, in a 
 horizontal position, the digitations marked n, n, n, n, by their strong 
 hold upon the false ribs, would open the bottom of the chest, quite 
 effectually. Over the shoulder joint, and from thence, running to 
 the middle of the arm bone, is a splendid muscle, — the deltoides , 
 marked h, which raises the arm to a level with the shoulder; its 
 lateral portions, even carry the elbow very much above the level 
 of their origin. If it were divided, no remaining muscle could per- 
 form its office. Just above f, winding partially under the deltoides, 
 is that muscle which extends the arm. The name of triceps exten- 
 sor cubiti is given it, because it arises by three heads, which uniting 
 in one tendon, passes the elbow joint, on the back of the arm, to be 
 inserted into the ulna, or, as the bone is sometimes called, the cubit. 
 Lastly, k, e , m, directs the eye to the infra spinatus, arising on the 
 external surface of the shoulder blade, and inserted into the arm 
 bone. By its contraction, the arm is raised a very little, and carried 
 backward; — its tendon, as it passes over the shoulder joint, adheres 
 to the capsular ligament and keeps it drawn out, so that it may not 
 be pinched, by the rolling motion of the ball in the socket. 
 
84 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Longissimus dorsi. 
 Complexus. 
 
 Trachelo-mastoideus. 
 Levator scapulae. 
 Semi-spinalis dorsi. 
 Multifidus spinae. 
 
 Semi-spinalis colli, or 
 Spinalis cervicis. 
 
 Transversalis colli. 
 
 Rectus capitis posticus ma- 
 jor. 
 
 Rectus capitis posticus mi- 
 nor 
 
 Obliquus capitis superior. 
 Obliquus capitis inferior. 
 Scalenus. 
 
 Interspinales. 
 
 Inter-transversales. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The same parts as the for- 
 mer, and by one common 
 broad tendon. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the four inferior cervical, and 
 seven superior dorsal verte- 
 brae. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the five lower cervical and 
 three upper dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the four superior cervical ver- 
 tebrae. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the 7th, 8th, -9th, and 10th 
 dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 The sacrum, ilium, oblique 
 and transverse processes of 
 the lumbar, the transverse of 
 the dorsal, and four cervical 
 vertebrae. 
 
 The transverse processes 
 of the six upper dorsal verte- 
 brae. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the five upper dorsal verte- 
 brae. 
 
 The transverse process of 
 the second cervical vertebrae. 
 
 The first vertebrae of the 
 neck. 
 
 The transverse process of 
 the atlas. 
 
 The spinous process of the 
 dentatus. 
 
 The upper surface of the 
 first and second rib. 
 
 Between the spinous pro- 
 cesses of the six inferior cer- 
 vical vertebrae. 
 
 Between the transverse 
 processes of the vertebrae. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 So 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 all the dorsal and one cervical 
 vertebra. 
 
 The middle of the os occi- 
 pitis, at its tubercle. 
 
 The os occipitis, behind the 
 mastoid process of the tempo- 
 ral bone. 
 
 The upper angle of the 
 scapula. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the four superior dorsal and 
 the last cervical vertebra. 
 
 The spinous processes of the 
 lumbar dorsal, and cervical 
 vertebra, except the atlas. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the five middle cervical. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the cervical vertebra. 
 
 The lower ridge of the os 
 occipitis. 
 
 The os occipitis at its tu- 
 bercle. 
 
 The end of the lower occi- 
 pital ridge. 
 
 The transverse process of 
 the atlas. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the cervical vertebrae. 
 
 The spinous processes of 
 the vertebras above. 
 
 The transverse processes of 
 the vertebrae above. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To stretch the vertebra ot 
 the back, and keep the trunk 
 erect. 
 
 To draw the head back- 
 ward. 
 
 To draw the head backward. 
 
 To move the scapula for- 
 ward and upward. 
 
 To extend the ^pine ob- 
 liquely backward. 
 
 To extend the back, and 
 draw it backward, or to one 
 side, and prevent the spine 
 from being too much bent for- 
 ward. 
 
 To stretch the neck ob- 
 liquely backward. 
 
 To turn the neck obliquely 
 backward, and to one side. 
 
 To extend the head, and 
 draw it backward. 
 
 To assist the rectus major. 
 
 To draw the head back- 
 ward. 
 
 To draw the face to one 
 side. 
 
 To move the neck forward, 
 or to one side. 
 
 To draw the spinous pro- 
 cesses towards each other. 
 
 To draw the transverse pro- 
 cesses towards each other. 
 
 8 
 
S6 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE SUPERIOR EXTREMITIES, 
 
 Name. 
 
 Supra-spinatus. 
 
 Infra spinatus. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The basis, spine, and upper 
 end of the scapula. 
 
 The cavity below the spine 
 of the scapula. 
 
 Fig. 39 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 39. 
 
 a. The supra-spinatus. 
 
 b. The infra spinatus. 
 
 c. The teres minor. 
 
 d. The teres major. 
 
 e. The latissimus dorsi. 
 
 f. The deltoid. 
 
 g. The triceps extensor cubiti. 
 
 Teres minor. 
 Teres major. 
 Deltoides. 
 
 Coraco brachialis. 
 
 The inferior edge of the 
 scapula. 
 
 T he inferior angle and edge 
 of the scapula. 
 
 The cavicle, and the acro- 
 mion and spine of the scapula. 
 
 The coracoid process of the 
 scapula. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 87 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE SUPERIOR EXTREMITIES. 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 A large tuberosity at the To raise the arm. 
 head of the os humeri. 
 
 The upper part of the same To roll the os humeri out- 
 tuberosity. ward. 
 
 Anatomists have sought for an explanation of the superiority of 
 the right hand, over the left, in the muscles, arteries and nerves of 
 the arm ; but no very satisfactory light has been thrown upon the 
 subject. At one time, it was a common mode of getting over the 
 difficulty, to say that the preference we give to the right hand arises 
 from its superior strength; and that quality is owing to the man- 
 ner in which the artery arises from the arch of the aorta, just above 
 the heart. There is certainly a considerable difference in the size 
 of the arteries in the two aims. The right in this respect, being 
 the largest, derives its blood more directly from the fountain head. 
 As the power of the muscle actually depends on the blood circulat- 
 ed in its substance, it was very natural to refer the origin of its su- 
 perior force to this cause. Here the inquiry has rested, so far as 
 anatomical demonstration is concerned. But a formidable objection 
 to that old fashioned theory arises, when we find a left-handed man, 
 whose arm does not differ essentially from any other person’s left arm, 
 and ambidexters, men using one hand just as well as the other, for 
 example, in writing, throwing balls, turning a gim'blet, using a cabi- 
 net-maker’s plane, Arc, seem to be entirely out of the reach of the 
 old stereotyped theory about the artery. The preference, given to 
 the right hand, conduces to its muscular development ; it is both 
 larger, and stronger, by use. So it is with the right foot, and lvmce 
 the extreme difficulty, with some, of wearing a pair of shoes made 
 on one last. 
 
 The evidence is pretty conclusive, from the universality of the 
 law, which embraces all the inferior animals, as well as man, that it 
 was expressly designed by the Creator, that the limbs on one side of 
 the body should possess certain physical advantages over the other. 
 Both rapidity of motion, and strength, are thus combined, constantly 
 improved upon by practice, and a certain mechanical excellence 
 is thus bestowed, without which we should be incompetent to 
 the discharge of those duties which devolve upon us. 
 
 The greater tuberosity of 
 the humerus. 
 
 The side of the groove for 
 the long tendon of the biceps. 
 
 The anterior and middle 
 part of the os humeri. 
 
 The middle and inner side 
 of the os humeri. 
 
 To assist the former. 
 
 To assist in rotating the 
 arm. 
 
 To raise the arm. 
 
 To roll the arm forward and 
 upward. 
 
66 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUA 
 
 Name. 
 Subscapularis. 
 
 Biceps flexor cubiti. 
 
 Bvachialis internus. 
 
 Triceps extensor cubiti. 
 
 Anconeus. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED 
 
 Supinator radii longus. 
 
 Extensor carpi radialis lon- 
 gior. 
 
 Extensor carpi radialis bre- 
 vior. 
 
 Extensor digitorum commu- 
 nis. f 
 
 Extensor minimi digiti. 
 
 Extensor carpi ulnaris. 
 
 Flexor carpi ulnaris. 
 
 Palmaris longus. , 
 
 Flexor carpi radialis, 
 Pronator radii teres. 
 
 Sppinator radii brevis. 
 
 ON THE OS HUMERI. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The basis, superior and in- 
 ferior edge of the scapula. 
 
 Two heads, one from the 
 coracoid process, the other, 
 called the long head, from the 
 edge of the glenoid cavity 
 of the scapula. 
 
 The os humeri at each side 
 of the tendon of the deltoides. 
 
 The neck of the scapula, 
 and the neck and middle of 
 the humerus. 
 
 The external condyle of 
 the humerus. 
 
 ON THE FORE ARM. 
 
 The external condyle of the 
 humerus. 
 
 The external condyle of the 
 humerus. 
 
 The external condyle of the 
 humerus. 
 
 The external condyle of the 
 os humeri. 
 
 The outer condyle of -the 
 humerus. 
 
 The outer condyle of the os 
 humeri. 
 
 The inner Condyle of the 
 humerus and olecranon. 
 
 The internal condyle of the 
 os humeri. 
 
 The internal condyle of the 
 os humeri. 
 
 The internal condyle of the 
 humerus and coronoid process 
 of the ulna. 
 
 The outer condyle of the 
 humerus and edge of the ulna. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 89 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE OS HUMERI. 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The protuberance at the 
 head of the os humeri. 
 
 The tuberosity at the upper 
 end of the radius, at its fore 
 part, and a little below its 
 neck. 
 
 The coronoid process of the 
 ulna. 
 
 The upper and outer part 
 of the olecranon. 
 
 The back part or ridge of 
 the ulna. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To roll the arm inward. 
 
 To bend the fore arm, 
 which it does with great 
 strength, and to assist the 
 supinators. 
 
 To assist in bending the 
 fore arm. 
 
 To extend the fore arm. 
 
 To assist in extending the 
 fore arm. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE FORE ARM. 
 
 The radius near the styloid 
 process. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 fore finger. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 middle finger. 
 
 The back of all the bones 
 of the fingers. 
 
 The second joint of the 
 little finger. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 little finger. 
 
 The os pisiforme, at its fore- 
 part. 
 
 The annular ligament of the 
 wrist, and there forms the 
 aponeurosis of the hand. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 fore finger. 
 
 The outer ridge of the radi- 
 us, about the middle of its 
 length. 
 
 The anterior, inner, and 
 upper part of the radius. 
 
 To assist in turning up the 
 palm of the hand. 
 
 To extend the wrist. 
 
 To assist the former. 
 
 To extend the fingers. 
 
 To assist in extending the 
 fingers. 
 
 To assist in extending the 
 wrist. 
 
 To assist in bending the 
 hand. 
 
 To bend the hand. 
 
 To bend the hand. 
 
 To roll the hand inward. 
 
 To roll the radius outward, 
 and assist the anconeus. 
 
 S* 
 
90 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. Arises from 
 
 Extensor ossis metacarpi The middle of the ulna, in- 
 pollicis manus. terosseous ligament and radius. 
 
 Fig. 40. 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 91 
 
 Inserted, into Use. 
 
 The os trapezium, and first To stretch the first bone of 
 bone of the thumb. the thumb outward. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 40. 
 
 f. extensor digitorum communis, for extending the fingers ; h, ex- 
 tensor proprius minimi digid, to extend the little finger ; f where 
 it unites with others ; i, extensor carpi ulnaris ; l, anconeus , ex- 
 tensor ossis metecarpi pollicis ; e, extensor primi internodii pollicis ; 
 e, extensor secundi internodii pollicis; d, indicator ; g, annular 
 ligament of the wrist ; m, will be recognised ; k, an abductor of 
 the little finger ; e, supinator radii longus. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 41. 
 
 a. pronator teres ; b, flexor carpi radialis ; c, d, palmaris longus , 
 e, flexor carpi ulnaris ; g, flexor carpi radialis Ion goir. 
 
 Between the elbow and ends of the fingers there are about fifty 
 muscles. Some of them, — particularly those by the sides of the fing- 
 ers, are quite short and delicate. All the quick short motions of the 
 fingers are made by them. Their name, musculi fidicinales, 
 fiddling muscles, in old books, is quite appropriately given, because 
 the strings of the instrument are operated upon almost entirely by 
 them. A back and front view of the fore arm is presented in 
 the opposite page. Fig’s 40, and 41, in which all the long mus- 
 cles, on the inside flexors, and on the back of the arm exten- 
 sors, may be very accurately observed. Just under the skin, a 
 silvery, tough membrane, like a silk case, is drawn closely over the 
 muscles, to keep them from swelling too much, in their contractions. 
 As before remarked, the strength which a muscle exerts, by being 
 pressed down to the bone, when in action, is increased a hundred 
 fold. The beauty and proportion of the limb is wholly preserved 
 by the case, which is called fascia. It is taken away, in these 
 plans, in order to show more distinctly the parts below. 
 
92 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 Extensor primi internodii. Near the middle of the ulna> 
 
 interosseous ligament, and 
 radius. 
 
 Extensor secundi interno- The back of the ulna and 
 
 dii. 
 
 Indicator. 
 
 interosseous ligament. 
 The middle of the ulna. 
 
 Fig. 42. 
 
 Fig. 43. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 93 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The convex part of the 
 second bone of the thumb. 
 
 The third and last bone of 
 the thumb. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 fore finger. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To extend the second bone 
 of the thumb outward. 
 
 To stretch the thumb ob- 
 liquely backward. 
 
 To extend the fore finger. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 42. 
 
 d, e, flexor digit orurn sublimis, attached to the second bone of 
 each finger, by four tendons, to bend the second joint, — f h. flexor 
 longus policis manus, to bend the thumb ; a , b, c, pronator teres , 
 to pronate the hand ; g, a slit in the tendons of the flexor digitorum 
 for the passage of four other tendons of another muscle which go 
 to the points of the fingers, for bending the last joint. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 43. 
 
 c, d, d, the pronator quadratus, is one of two small muscles 
 for pronating the hand; a, b, the other, — pronator teres. 
 
 In Fig’s. 42, and 43, the muscles are distinctly engraven, which 
 roll the fore arm in supination and pronation. By turning a key 
 in a door-lock, both sets are called into action, and it is recommend- 
 ed to the reader to do it, and at the same time to feel the contractions 
 of the muscles with the other hand. Fig. 43, the bones are made 
 so plain, as to show the exact relation which the pronators have to 
 them. On the other, Fig. e, points to the four tendons of the 
 muscle that bends the last bone of the fingers. Looking back to Fig. 
 41, page 90, it is there concealed by the flexor of the second bone of 
 the fingers. This, in order to reach its place of destination, pierces, 
 as it were, the tendons of the upper muscle, and thus sends its own 
 tendons onward, through the slit. 
 
94 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Flexor digitorurn sublimis. 
 
 Flexor digitorurn profundus 
 vel perforans. 
 
 Flexor longus pollicis. 
 
 Pronator radii quadratus 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The inner condyle of the os 
 humeri, coronoid process of the 
 ulna, and upper part of the 
 radius. 
 
 The upper part of the ulna, 
 and interosseous ligament. 
 
 The upper and fore part of 
 the radius. 
 
 The inner and lower part 
 of the ulna. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED CHIEFLY ON THE HAND. 
 
 Lurnbricales. 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicis manus. 
 
 Opponens pollicis. 
 
 Abductor pollicis manus. 
 
 Abductor pollicis manus. 
 
 Abductor indicis manus. 
 
 Palmaris brevis. 
 
 Abductor minimi digiti man- 
 us. 
 
 Abductor minimi digiti. 
 Flexor parvus minimi digiti. 
 Interossei interni, and 
 Interossei externi. 
 
 The tendons of the flexor 
 profundus. 
 
 The os trapezoides, liga- 
 ment of the wrist, and the os 
 magnum. 
 
 The os scaphoides and liga- 
 ment of the wrist. 
 
 The annular ligament, and 
 os trapezium. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 middle finger. 
 
 The first bone of the thumb, 
 and os trapezium. 
 
 The annular ligament, and 
 palmar aponeurosis. 
 
 The annular ligament and 
 os pisiforme. 
 
 The os cuneiforme and car- 
 pal ligament. 
 
 The annular ligament and 
 os cuneiforme. 
 
 The metacarpal bones. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE INFERIOR EXTREMITIES. 
 
 The anterior edge of the 
 os pubis. 
 
 Pectinalis. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 95 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The second bone of each 
 finger, after being perforated 
 by the tendons of the profun- 
 dus. 
 
 The fore part of the last 
 bone of each of the fingers. 
 
 The last joint of the thumb. 
 
 The radius opposite to its 
 origin. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To bend the second joint of 
 the fingers upon the first, and 
 the first upon the metacarpal 
 bones. 
 
 To bend the last joint of the 
 fingers. 
 
 To bend the last joint of the 
 thumb. 
 
 To roll the radius inward. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED CHIEFLY ON THE HAND. 
 
 The tendons of the extensor 
 digitovum communis. 
 
 The ossa sesamoidea and 
 second bone of the thumb. 
 
 The first bone of the thumb. 
 
 The root of the first bone of 
 the thumb. 
 
 The root of the first bone of 
 the thumb. 
 
 The first bone of the fore 
 finger posteriorly. 
 
 The metacarpal bone and 
 skin of the little finger. 
 
 The first bone of the little 
 finger. 
 
 The metacarpal bone of the 
 little finger. 
 
 The first bone of the little 
 finger. 
 
 The sides of the metacarpal 
 bones. 
 
 To bend the first and extend 
 the second phalanx. 
 
 To bend the second joint of 
 the thumb. 
 
 To bend the thumb. 
 
 To draw the thumb from 
 the fingers. 
 
 To pull the thumb toward 
 the fingers. 
 
 To move the fore finger to- 
 wards the thumb. 
 
 To contract the palm of the 
 hand. 
 
 To draw the little finger 
 from the rest. 
 
 To move that bone toward 
 the rest. 
 
 To draw the little finger 
 from the rest. 
 
 To extend the fingers, 
 and move them toward the 
 thumb. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE INFERIOR EXTREMITIES. 
 
 The upper part of the linea To bend the thigh, 
 aspera of the femur. 
 
Triceps adductor feinoris. 
 
 9 G 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Adductor longus femo- 
 ris. 
 
 Adductor brevis femo- 
 ris. 
 
 Adductor magnus femo- 
 ris. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The upper and fore part of 
 the pubis. 
 
 The fore part and ramus of 
 the os pubis. 
 
 The lower and fore part of 
 the ramus of the pubis. 
 
 Fig. 44 . 
 
 Explanation of Fig. . 
 
 c. The gluteus medius. 
 
 d. The pyriformis. 
 
 e. The geminus superior. 
 f The geminus interior. 
 
 g. The obturator internus. 
 g*. The quadrator femoris. 
 
 h. The biceps flexor cruris. 
 
 i. The semitendinosus. 
 
 k. The semimembranosus 
 
 l. The superficial gluteal 
 artery and nerve. 
 
 m. The greatischiaticnerve. 
 
 n. The ischiatic artery. 
 
 o. The popliteal nerve. 
 
 p. The fibular or peroneal 
 P nerve. 
 
 q. The popliteal vein. 
 
 r. The popliteal artery. 
 
 s. The internal pudic artery 
 vein, and nerve. 
 
 t. t. The muscles on the 
 anterior part of the thigh. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 97 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The middle and back part 
 of the linea aspera. 
 
 The inner and upper part 
 of linea aspera. 
 
 The whole length of the 
 linea aspera. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To bend the thigh. 
 
 To bend the thigh, and 
 move it inward. 
 
 To move the thigh inward, 
 and assist in bending it. 
 
 Besides the muscles, nerves, veins, tendons, bands, and ligaments, 
 there are absoi bents — an exceedingly minute class of tubes, of the 
 utmost importance in the animal economy. From the inner edge 
 of the great toe, to the groin, there is a chain of absorbents, re- 
 sembling, when magnified by a lens, a multitude of threaded eggs. 
 It is the office of the absorbents to pick up whatever might otherwise 
 have been wasted, and return it to the heart, that it may be appro- 
 priated to the wants of the body. These egg-shaped particles are 
 receiving organs, immensely larger than the tubes which bring into 
 them the fluids they suck up about the muscles. By the agency of 
 these small bodies, which are greedy to seize whatever is presented 
 to them, the physician is able to convey medicines into the circula- 
 tion, when they could not be taken into the stomach. It ma3' be 
 desirable to salivate, or in other words, to increase the quantity of 
 fluid in the mouth, in order to overcome some local disease, but as 
 mercury, in the form best adapted to produce that effect, would be 
 injurious to swallow, it is rubbed on the skin, over these lymphat- 
 ics or absorbents, being called by either name, which at once convey 
 it into the blood ; — but being offensive and injurious to the body, ano- 
 ther set of vessels discover the presence of the unwelcome visitor, and 
 speedily go to work to throw it out of the system. In the case of mercu- 
 ry, it is eonveyedout at the mouth, and the great flow of saliva, which 
 keeps up a constant spitting, is nothing more than nature’s scheme to 
 wash away the noxious matter. 
 
 These absorbents sometimes suck in a poisonous matter; — here 
 an action. at once takes place, of an extraordinary character. It 
 seem as though the lymphatic thus loaded, was conscious of 
 its destructive burden, and instead of allowing it to flow to the 
 next one, towards the heart, it inflames, bursts open, and discharg- 
 es its contents in the form of a sore. Sometimes this ulceration may 
 extend to the neighboring lymphatic, and so the disease be propagated 
 even into the cavities of the body. If a serpent’s fang wound the skin, 
 the absorbents convey the venom onward, like couriers, to head-quar- 
 ters, the heart, whence it is distributed at once through the sys- 
 em. If a bee stings, the poison is ushered along by the same organs. 
 
 The absorbents are exceedingly active agents, but so small, that 
 their existence was unknown, a long time after the discovery of the 
 circulation. 
 
 9 
 
98 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Obturator externus. 
 
 .Arises from 
 
 The obturator ligament, and 
 half of the thyroid hole. 
 
 Gluteus maximus. 
 
 The spine of the ilium, pos- 
 terior sacro ischiatic ligaments, 
 and os sacrum. 
 
 Gluteus medius. 
 
 The spine and superior sur- 
 face of the ilium. 
 
 Gluteus minimus. 
 
 The outer surface of the 
 ilium and border of its great 
 notch. 
 
 Pyriformis. 
 
 The anterior part of the os 
 sacrum. 
 
 Gemini. 
 
 The spine and tuberosity of 
 the ischium. 
 
 Quadratus femoris. 
 
 The tuberosity of the is- 
 chium. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE THIGH. 
 
 Facialis, or 
 
 Tensor vaginae femoris. 
 
 The upper spinous process 
 of the ilium. 
 
 Sarto rius. 
 
 The upper spinous process 
 of the ilium. 
 
 Gracilis. 
 
 The fore part of the ischium 
 and pubis. 
 
 Rectus femoris, or 
 Rectus cruris. 
 
 The lower spinous process 
 of the ilium, and edge of the 
 acertabulum. 
 
 Vastus externus. 
 
 The root of the great tro- 
 
 Vastus internus. 
 
 chanter, and linea aspera. 
 
 The trochanter minor, and 
 
 Cruralis, or Cruraeus. 
 
 the linea aspera. 
 
 The anterior part of the 
 lesser trochanter. 
 
 Semi-tendinosus. 
 
 The tuberosity of the is- 
 chium. 
 
 Semi-membranosus. 
 
 The tuberosity of the is- 
 chium. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 99 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The femur near the root of 
 the great trochanter. 
 
 The upper part of the linea 
 aspera of the femur. 
 
 The great trochanter of the 
 os feinoris. 
 
 The root of the great tro- 
 chanter. 
 
 A cavity at the root of the 
 great trochanter. 
 
 The same cavity as the 
 pyriforinis. 
 
 A ridge between the two 
 trochanters. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To pull forward, and rotate 
 the thigh. 
 
 To extend the thigh, and 
 assist in its rotatory motion. 
 
 To assist the gluteus maxi- 
 mus. 
 
 To assist the two former. 
 
 To roll the thigh outward. 
 To roll the thigh outward. 
 To move the thigh outward. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATE 
 
 The inner side of the mem- 
 branous fascia which covers 
 the thigh. 
 
 The upper and inner part 
 of the tibia. 
 
 The upper and inner part 
 of the tibia. 
 
 The upper and fore part of 
 the patella. 
 
 The upper and lateral part 
 of the patella. 
 
 The upper and inner part of 
 the patella. 
 
 The upper part of the patel- 
 la. 
 
 The upper and inner part of 
 the tibia. 
 
 The back part of the head 
 of the tibia. 
 
 ON THE THIGH. 
 
 To stretch the fascia. 
 
 To bend the leg inward. 
 
 To bend the leg. 
 
 To extend the leg. 
 
 To extend the leg. 
 
 To extend the leg. 
 
 To extend the leg. 
 
 To bend and draw the leg 
 inward. 
 
 To bend the leg. 
 
100 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 45. 
 
 Explanation cf Fig. 
 
 45. 
 
 a. The tensor vag- 
 inas femoris. 
 
 b. The sartorius. 
 
 c. The rectus fe- 
 moris. 
 
 d. The vastus ex- 
 ternus. 
 
 e. The vastus in- 
 terims. 
 
 f. The pectinalis. 
 
 g. The adductor 
 longus. 
 
 h. The adductor 
 magnus. 
 
 i. The gracilis. 
 
 k. Iliacus internus. 
 
 l. The anterior 
 crural nerve. 
 
 m. The femoral ar- 
 tery. 
 
 n. The femoral 
 vein. 
 
 1. The external ep- 
 igastric artery. 
 
 2. The external cir- 
 cumflexa ilii. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Biceps fluxor cruris. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The tuberosity of the is- 
 chium. 
 
 The external condyle of the 
 thigh bone. 
 
 Popliteus. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 101 
 
 To a person unaccustomed to anatomical language, the names of 
 the muscles will undoubtedly appear exceedingly unmeaning, and 
 difficult to pronounce. This is true, as respects the pronunciation ; 
 but the name, in a majority of cases, is really expressive, — giving 
 both origin and insertion. An example of this double office of the 
 name, may be noticed in stylo-glossus — meaning that it arises from 
 the styloid process, and is inserted into the tongue. In hyo-glossus, 
 the same advantage occurs : it simply informs us that it arises from 
 the liyoideus , the bone of the tongue, and is inserted into the tongue. 
 The muscles of the thigh and leg, are particularly vexatious, in this 
 respect, to a young beginner. However, by patiently exercising the 
 mind, in a little time the system becomes familiar. 
 
 Though one bone only is embraced by the muscles o( the thigh, 
 the circumference is vastly greater of this part of the limb, than the 
 leg. This depends on the number and magnitude of the muscles, 
 which pas3 over the fernoris, from the pelvis, to reach the bones of 
 the leg below the knee joint. All the muscles on the fore part of the 
 thigh, come from the upper end of the bone, and the hip, or ilium, 
 and instead of being at all devoted to the service of the bone over 
 whose surface they run, they are all concentrated in the knee pan, and 
 therefore belong to the leg, as its extensors or straighteners. So 
 violently have they been known to contract, that they have actually 
 broken the knee pan into two pieces, — one half held by its ligament, 
 down to its place, but the other, drawn by the uncontroled energy 
 of the muscles, several inches up the thigh. When rising from a sitting 
 posture, the entire weight of the body is raised by these same muscles; 
 but they would be inadequate to the task, were it not for the sliding 
 of the knee pan up the thigh, thereby increasing the power, by re- 
 moving the fulcrum from the centre of motion, till the body is erect, 
 when it slips into a pit, made by the meeting of the ends of the thigh 
 and leg bones. While sitting, the muscles being at rest, the knee pan 
 falls into the space between the ends of the bones, made by bending 
 the limb. It is on this principle that the sessamoid bones are thrown 
 in under the tendons of the toes, to increase the power of the flexor, 
 by removing the centre of motion further from the joint. This is a 
 plan of nature’s to protect the toe, which, being over worked, would 
 be ruined, were not an immediate provision made for increasing its 
 power to meet the exigency of the case 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The upper and back part of 
 the tibia, forming the outer 
 hamstring. 
 
 The upper and inner part of 
 the tibia. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To bend the leg. 
 
 To assist in bending the 
 leg. 
 
 9 * 
 
102 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 4G 
 l 
 
 \ 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE LEG. 
 
 JYame. Arises from 
 
 Gastrocnemius externus, or The internal and external 
 Gemellus. condyle of the femur. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 103 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 46. 
 
 a Tensor vaginas femoris. 
 
 b. Sartorius reflected. 
 
 c. Rectus reflected. 
 
 d. Vastus externus. 
 
 e. Vastus internus, pulled outward. 
 
 f Pectinalis reflected. 
 
 g Adductor longus reflected. 
 
 h. Adductor magnus. 
 
 i Gracilis. 
 
 lc. Iliacus internus. 
 
 1. The anterior crural nerve. 
 
 in. The femoral artery. 
 
 5. The arteria profunda. 
 
 6. The external circumflex artery. 
 
 7. The internal circumflex artery. 
 
 7i. The femoral vein. 
 
 o. The cruralis. 
 
 p. The adductor brevis. 
 
 q. The obturator artery and nerve. 
 
 o. The cruralis, vel crureus. 
 
 p. The adductor brevis. 
 
 Were it not for the tendons of the vast number of muscles which 
 slide by the knee joint, as remarked in speakingof the anatomy of the 
 bones, this would have been an imperfect articulation. Behind, the 
 hamstrings contribute, on either side, to the formation of a canal, in 
 which the artery, vein and great nerve of the leg, carefully cushioned 
 up in a quantity of fat, lie so securely, that they very rarely come to 
 any injury. One object of introducing Fig. 45, opposite, was to 
 show the general relation of some of the blood vessels, — the nerve 
 that supplies the fore part of the thigh, and to exhibit the muscles 
 already shown in a preceding figure, differently displayed, which 
 have such a bearing on the anatomy of the joint. Several of the 
 long ones are divided, in order to give a clearer view of those which 
 would otherwise be too much hidden, to be understood. The sarto- 
 rius or tailor’s muscle, so called because it crosses the legs, is marked 
 c — the upper portion being taken away to show i, the gracilis. 
 In nearly all operations on the artery of the thigh, the surgeon is 
 guided by the edge of the sartorius — a sure index ; it also contrib- 
 utes to the lateral security of the knee. 
 
 MUSCLES SITUATED ON THE LEG. 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The os calcis, with the To extend the foot, 
 tendon of the soleus. 
 
104 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS fiOOR. 
 
 J\'nme. Jlrises from 
 
 Gastrocnemius internus, or The head of the fibula, and 
 
 back part of the head of the 
 tibia. 
 
 The outer condyle of the os 
 femoris and capsular ligament. 
 
 Soleus. 
 Plantaris. 
 
 Fig. 47. 
 
 Fig. 48. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 105 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The os calcis, by a common To extend the foot, 
 tendon, which is called tendo 
 Jt chilis. 
 
 The os calcis, near the To assist in extending the 
 tendo Achilis. foot. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 47. 
 
 h. The tibialis antieus. 
 
 i. The extensor longus digitorum. 
 k. The peroneus tertius. 
 
 /. The extensor longus, or proprius pollieis. 
 
 m. The extensor digitorum brevis. 
 
 n. The peroneus longus. 
 
 o. The peroneus brevis. 
 
 p. The annular ligament. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 4S. 
 
 h. The tibialis antieus. 
 
 i. The extensor longus digitorum. 
 
 1. The extensor longus pollieis. 
 
 q. The anterior tibial artery. 
 
 r. The anterior tibial nerve. 
 
 A similar provision is made in the leg for keeping the muscles 
 down to their proper places, that has been noticed in the fore arm. 
 Those bands, called annular ligaments, which encircle the ankle, to 
 prevent the tendons, as they run upon the top of the instep, from 
 flying out from the bones, in a high state of contraction, must excite 
 admiration. This they have a constant tendency to do. If a 
 person is walking up a flight of stairs on his toes, he will then per- 
 ceive the strong action of the tendons, and the reaction of the liga- 
 ments upon them. All those animals which climb, as squirrels, 
 monkeys, bears, and some others, have the fascia or limb cases, 
 much thicker, in proportion to the size of the body, than in man. 
 All the tendons of the toes and fingers are bound down to the bones 
 by inelastic bands, — in a similar manner. Birds, particularly those 
 that roost, have a beautiful web of ligementarv threads woundround 
 the leg, just above the toes, for restraining the tendons. 
 
 Fig. 46, displays an intricate mass of muscles, originating between 
 the upper extremities of the leg bones. For nearly a foot below the 
 knee, it is difficult to designate one from the other, on account of the 
 intermingling of the fibres. However, the tendons of each, are distinct. 
 No important vessels or nerves are exposed on the skin : — on the 
 opposite side, however, they are to be found, safely protected by 
 muscles, bones aqd fascia. 
 
106 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 Tibialis anticus. 
 
 Tibialis posticus. 
 
 Arises Jrom 
 
 The upper and fore part of 
 the tibia. 
 
 The back part of the tibia, 
 interosseous ligament, and ad- 
 jacent part of the fibula. 
 
 Fig. 49. Fig. 50. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 107 
 
 Inserted into Use. 
 
 The os cuneiforme inter- To bend the foot, 
 num. 
 
 The middle cuneiform bone, To move the foot inward, 
 and upper part of the os navi- 
 culare. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 49. 
 
 q. The plantaris. 
 
 r. The popliteus. 
 
 s. The soleus. 
 
 t. The biceps, forming the outer hamstring. 
 
 u. u. The semitendinosus and semimembranosus, forming the in- 
 ner hamstring. 
 
 About the knee and ankle joints, professional bone-setters have 
 played, and are still playing, a high handed game of quackery and 
 imposition. On that account, therefore, it has been an important 
 object, to embody as much general information, in relation to the 
 anatomy of the lower limbs, as possible, and at the same time avoid 
 writing a professional essay on the diseases and incidents to which 
 they are particularly predisposed. Three bones, only, enter into the 
 composition of the knee joint ; yet in this land of common sense, indi- 
 viduals injure the articulation, and have it made well, by the reduc- 
 tion of six or seven ! The ankle joint, made up entirely of three 
 bones, — is often cured by having several little bones thrust into 
 place 1 
 
 In the immediate neighborhood of these joints, a multitude of 
 tendons have been seen, in the preceding diagrams, on which their 
 perfection depends. By a thousand accidents to which they are ex- 
 posed, the tendon of a particular muscle may be so prodigiously 
 strained as finally to become inflamed. No pain is more severe nor more 
 tedious in point of duration, than sprains — or over stretching of the 
 tendons and ligaments. Though slow to feel, — when once roused, 
 they are as difficult to manage as the bones, because they possess a 
 vitality so low and so far removed from the sensibility of the soft 
 parts, that remedies are a long time in effecting a restoration. To an 
 inflammation therefore, and not to the out-of-joint condition of the little 
 bones, is to be imputed the cause of protracted lameness in a majority 
 of cases. The metatarsal bones of the instep are not thrown out of 
 place once in a hundred instances where it is supposed they are. 
 To youth, these remarks are addressed. 
 
108 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Peroneus longus. 
 
 Peroneus brevis. 
 
 Extensor longus digitorum 
 pedis. 
 
 Extensor proprius pollicis 
 pedis. 
 
 Flexor longus digitorum 
 pedis, profundus, persorans. 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The head of the tibia, and 
 upper and outer part of the 
 fibula. 
 
 The outer and fore part of 
 the fibula. 
 
 The upper part of the tibia, 
 interosseous ligament, and in- 
 ner edge of the fibula. 
 
 The upper and fore part of 
 the tibia. 
 
 The upper and inner part 
 of the tibia. 
 
 Flexor longus pollicis pedis. A little below the head of 
 
 the fibula. 
 
 Fig. 51. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 51. 
 f The external plantar artery. 
 
 g. The internal plantar. 
 
 h. The tendon of the flexor longus pol- 
 licis. 
 
 i. The tendons of the flexor longus. 
 digitorum. 
 
 j. j. The massa carnea Jacobi Sylvii. 
 
 k. k. k. The lumbricales. 
 
 MUSCLES CHIEFLY SITUATED ON THE FOOT. 
 
 Extensor brevis digitorum The upper and anterior part 
 p e di 3 . of the os calcis. 
 
 Flexor brevis digitorum pe- The lower part of the os 
 dis, perforatus sublimis. calcis. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 109 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The metatarsal bone of the 
 great toe. 
 
 The metatarsal bone of the 
 little toe. 
 
 The first joint of the small 
 toes by the four tendons. 
 
 The convex surface of the 
 bones of the' great toe. 
 
 The last bones of all the 
 toes, except the great toe, by 
 four tendons. 
 
 The last bone of the great 
 toe. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To move the foot outward. 
 
 To assist the peroneous 
 longus. 
 
 To extend the toes, and 
 separate them from one ano- 
 ther. 
 
 To extend the great toe. 
 
 To bend the last joint of 
 the toes. 
 
 To bend the great toe. 
 
 Notwithstanding the multitude of bands, muscles, cords and ves- 
 sels, were it not for the broad sheet in the sole of the foot, reaching 
 from the heel to the roots of the toes, like the sole.of a shoe, all the 
 parts we have been considering would have been inadequate to its 
 security. The plantaris, the name of this ligament, binds the arch 
 of the foot, and effectually prevents the bones from being spread 
 apart, and at the same time constitutes a firm external defence for 
 the muscles, nerves and vessels. A similar broad ligament exists in 
 the palm of the hand, for the same purpose. 
 
 MUSCLES CHIEFLY SITUATED ON THE FOOT. 
 
 The first bone of the great 
 and other toes, except the 
 little. 
 
 The second phalanx of each 
 of the small toes, by four ten- 
 dons, which are perforated by 
 those of the flex. long. dig. 
 ped. 
 
 To extend the toes. 
 
 To bend the second joint of 
 the toes. 
 
 10 
 
110 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Lumbricales pedis. 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicjs pedis. 
 
 Abductor pollicis pedis. 
 Abductor pollicis pedis. 
 
 Abductor minimi digiti pe- 
 dis. 
 
 Flexor brevis minimi digiti 
 pedis. 
 
 Transversales pedis. 
 Interossei pedis interni. ^ 
 Interossei pedis externi. 3 
 
 Arises from 
 
 The tendons of the flexor 
 longus digitorum pedis. 
 
 The fore part of the os cal- 
 cis, and external cuneiform 
 bone. 
 
 The inner and lower part 
 of the os calcis. 
 
 The ligament extended from 
 the os calcis to the os cuboi- 
 des. 
 
 The tuber of the os calcis, 
 and metatarsal bone of the 
 little toe. 
 
 The root of the metatarsal 
 bone of the little toe. 
 
 The ligament connecting 
 the bones of the tarsus. 
 
 The metatarsal bones. 
 
 Fig. 52. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 52. 
 
 l. The plantar arch, 
 
 m. The flexor brevis pollicis. 
 
 71 . The adductor pollicis. 
 
 o. The flexor brevis minimi digiti. 
 
 p. The transversalis pedis. 
 
 q. The interossei. 
 
 r. The long ligament of the calcis.' 
 
 s. The tendon of the peroneus longus. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 11 ] 
 
 Inserted into 
 
 The tendinous expansion at 
 the upper part of the toes. 
 
 The first joint of the great 
 toe, by two tendons. 
 
 The first joint of the great 
 toe. 
 
 The outer sesamoid bone, 
 or first joint of the great toe. 
 
 The first joint of the little 
 toe externally. 
 
 The root of the first bone of 
 the little toe. 
 
 The tendon of the adductor 
 pollicis. 
 
 The metatarsal bones. 
 
 Use. 
 
 To draw the toes inward. 
 
 To bend the first joint of 
 the great toe. 
 
 To move the great toe from 
 the rest. 
 
 To draw the great toe 
 nearer to the rest, and to 
 bend it. 
 
 To draw the little toe out- 
 ward. 
 
 To bend the little toe. 
 
 To contract the foot. 
 
 To draw the smaller toes 
 
 towards the great toe, and 
 
 assist in extending the toes. 
 
112 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 Where are the ligaments found ? 
 
 What is Syndesmology ? 
 
 Have the ligaments sensibility ? 
 
 Are they elastic ? 
 
 Are there ligaments within the skull ? 
 
 What prevents the bones of the foot from separating', when 
 we stand ? 
 
 What do you understand by Myology. 
 
 What is a muscle ? 
 
 What are the characteristics of a muscle. 
 
 Their use ? 
 
 What makes them red ? 
 
 Have they nerves ? 
 
 Are they all of the same figure ? 
 
 How do muscles act ? 
 
 How are muscles divided? 
 
 Where are the involuntary muscles found ? 
 
 Why does it require practice to play musical instruments? 
 Have the muscles a vitality which survives the death of the 
 nerves ? 
 
 Has each muscle an antagonist ? 
 
 Are they ever relaxed? 
 
 Ho they ever become weary ? 
 
 What is contractility, as applied to the muscle ? 
 
 What are tendons? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 113 
 
 Where are they found ? 
 
 In cases of suspended animation, through the agency of 
 what organs is vitality recalled ? 
 
 How many muscles are there ? 
 
 Are muscles always in pairs ? 
 
 How many muscles from the elbow to the fingers ? 
 
 What muscle raises the whole arm to a horizontal posture ? 
 What muscle surrounds the eye, within the eyelids ? 
 
 Has the nose any muscles? 
 
 Are there muscles connected with the external ear P 
 What muscles bend the head forward, as in bowing? 
 
 What muscles assist us in walking ? 
 
 What muscles are in action, in sounding the vowels ? 
 
 What muscles sustain the upright position of the back ? 
 What muscles extend the fore finger? 
 
 What muscle bends the fore arm on the arm ? 
 
 What is the fascia and its use ? 
 
 What muscle is the longest in man ? 
 
 Are there muscles in the tongue ? 
 
 Do muscles have any agency in modulating the tones of the 
 voice ? 
 
 By how many muscles is the eye moved in its socket ? 
 
 What muscle rolls the eye downward, towards the shoulder ? 
 What muscle lies over the back of the neck, like a tippet ? 
 What muscle extends the whole fore arm? 
 
 What muscle rolls the fisre arm to and fro ? 
 
 What muscles constitute the calf of the leg ? 
 
 Where do the flexois of the toes run, to reach them ? 
 
 What muscle enables us to blow with the mouth ? 
 
 10 * 
 
114 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 APPARATUS OF JOINTS. 
 
 OR BURSOLOGY. 
 
 Within the joints or in their immediate vicinity, there 
 are small sacs, containing a glairy, oily fluid, which is 
 poured out between the articulating surfaces, to prevent 
 friction ; the name of this substance is synovia. Upon the 
 same principle that any machinery is kept oiled, the joints 
 arc lubricated. When the secretion of the synovia, is im- 
 perfect, or scantily effused into the joint, the highly polish- 
 ed surfaces of the cartilages become rough, dry and sub- 
 sequently inflamed. 
 
 Even in the sheaths of the tendons, these oil bags are 
 considerably numerous. About the wrist, elbow, shoulder, 
 hip, knees, and ankle, they are large, but of various 
 shapes, according to the space afforded them. Where the 
 most motion is required, there are the largest sacs, secret- 
 ing and throwing into the place, a copious quantity of 
 the oil. A disease of the bursa; mucosa;, which is the 
 scientific name of the sacs, is familiarly known as the 
 white swelling, — particularly of the hip and knee. 
 
 It would not be profitable in a simple elementary trea- 
 tise to dwell minutely on this subject. The few observa- 
 tions here made, will satisfy the inquirer, that the care 
 which is everywhere displayed in animal mechanism, de- 
 monstrates in the most happy and unobjectionable man- 
 ner, the contrivance of a Being antecedent and superior 
 to ourselves. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 115 
 
 FLUIDS, OR AN GIOLOGY, 
 
 THE HEART AND CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 
 
 It is one of the most curious facts in the whole range of 
 physiological science, that the ancients were totally igno- 
 rant of the circulation of the blood. 
 
 By a long course of observations, it was commonly ad- 
 mitted that there were in man, for example, two sets of 
 tubes, which coursed through the body, and they assigned 
 to each many absurd and ridiculous functions. 
 
 As one set of vessels were superficial, directly under the 
 skin, filled with the venous blood, which quietly moved 
 along the smooth duct, — from some unknown point, to 
 another, equally obscure, they were fully satisfied that it 
 belonged, in some way, to the body. On the other hand, 
 by various accidents, they had frequent opportunities of 
 viewing the deeper seated vessels, throbbing and getting 
 blood in recent wounds: — but as the color of their con- 
 tents was different from that in the veins, and the activity 
 that was manifested by these tubes, when exposed to their 
 astonished vision, altogether different from the motionless, 
 well behaved veins, the idea was at once admitted that 
 these, which were denominated arteries, constituted the 
 laboratory of thd animal spirits, — or, in other words, it 
 was in the arteries that the powers of the soul were gene- 
 rated, in combination with atmospheric air, which found 
 its way into the reservoirs of life, through the puffing and 
 blowing exercises of the lungs. When the artery was cut, 
 
116 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK.' 
 
 and the warm blood was forced out by strong pulsations, 
 then the spirit within was angry, — and so vented its 
 displeasure and spite, like a snarling child, by spirting 
 out its own precious self through the incidental aperture. 
 
 Upon notions as rational as these, learned men con- 
 structed some of the strangest theories that ever beset the 
 imagination. When the whole subject of the use of the 
 arteries and veins were supposed to be clearly understood, 
 those sage investigators of the sublime and beautiful, 
 rested from the weight of their labors, and, subsequently, 
 established certain doctrines, which held a despotic sway 
 for centuries ; yet they were as far from truth, as possible, 
 — and worse than all, no person of common sense dared 
 to call them in question. 
 
 Who but a blockhead would ever have entertained a 
 notion like this, viz. that the blood ran out from the heart 
 through the day, or while one was awake, and returned 
 again at night, when the individual retired to his slumbers ! 
 Who but a profound dunce would have suggested the novel 
 theory that weariness , the sensation of being tired, was in 
 consequence of being so long awake, that the blood had 
 all run out from the fountain head: — and when one could 
 not move any longer, from complete exhaustion, why nature 
 indicated at once what was to be done: — only lay the 
 poor sufferer on a bed, the recumbent posture being 
 highly favorable, the blood immediately took a downhil 
 direction, and when it had all reached home, and was 
 snugly settled down in one of the chambers of the heart, 
 the tendency to death was suspended, — the man recov- 
 ered his accustomed strength, and bright and early the 
 next morning the same truant blood was ready to travel 
 over the old ground again ! 
 
 Thus it will be plainly understood, that the arteries were 
 expressly set apart as a habitation for the spirit or vital 
 principle : the veins, because they were less noble, were 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 1 17 
 
 on the outside, while the others within, were exclusively 
 appropriated to the to and fro, night and morning cir- 
 culation of the blood. 
 
 Another discovery, equally surprising, and in exact 
 keeping with the foregoing arrangement, related to the 
 heart. They saw a little thing carefully boxed up in the 
 chest, between the right and left lung, which to all intents 
 and purposes satisfied the student of nature, that it was 
 very hot, or it would not have been confined and sur- 
 rounded by two great bags of wind : — it was kept tolera- 
 bly cool by constant respiration ! 
 
 The heart being decidedly a hot affair, there was a grand 
 field for exclaiming and proclaiming the wisdom of nature, 
 in providing such a delicate and at the same time simple, 
 but perfect contrivance for keeping down its temperature 
 below the boiling point ! It was laced up in a straight 
 jacket, — the pericardium, vulgarly called heart-case, of a 
 
 fpYl n» Q o/~» firm , tfinl it wrnc no cDlfimn^ont ap .tkat tlio oarlli 
 
 was the centre of the solar system, that this organ was liable 
 to prodigious paroxysms of rage, and would burst from its 
 prison, were it not thus secured. Two points were thus 
 satisfactorily settled : viz. that it was very hot, and very 
 unruly. 
 
 Again, — within, there were certain apartments, which 
 took the sensible and significant names of auricles and 
 ventricles, — because the walls of the one bore some fanci- 
 ful resemblance to the ears of a dog — but which, by the 
 way, bear just as much resemblance to the horns of the 
 new moon ; and in these cavities certain curious opera- 
 tions were going on, which none but very wise philoso- 
 phers understood. These consisted in the mixing of air 
 and blood, — the instantaneous development of certain 
 matters and things which constituted life, and gun-powder- 
 like explosions, consequent upon the ingress of cold air in 
 the furnace of the heart. 
 
118 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 In reality, had those investigating geniuses of the olden 
 time, whom it is so fashionable to admire, so classical to 
 praise, known anything of the modern properties of the 
 steam-engine, it is altogether probable they would have 
 had much to say on the heart’s property of generating 
 power by converting its liquid contents into vapor, and, 
 in the sequel, laboriously explained the causes which oc- 
 casionally oppressed, — which clogged the wheels of vital 
 action, and which, in plainer language, sometimes burst 
 the boiler. 
 
 We have merely sketched an outline of the general 
 views which were entertained of the physiology of the sys- 
 tem by the ancients ; — views it would seem, so absurd that 
 the reflections of a school-boy would have overturned them : 
 yet, strange as it now appears, they were carefully trans- 
 mitted from one generation to another, for many centuries, 
 and treasured up as the profound discoveries of antiquity. 
 
 THE HEART. 
 
 It would seem, at first view, from the high office of the 
 heart, so constantly found in all animals with which we 
 are familiar, that no organized being could possibly exist 
 without it. Strange, however, as it may appear, there 
 are various classes, in the lowest orders of animal crea- 
 tion, which are totally destitute of it; still, they have blood, 
 and that can under no circumstances be dispensed with, — 
 but is not propelled by one single organ through the ves- 
 sels. There is a compensation, however, in the structure 
 of the primitive vessels, — or to be understood, a blood- 
 vessel takes upon itself all the functions of a heart, ex- 
 erting by successive pulsations, a power adequate to the 
 physical requirements of the body in which it is found. 
 
 Numerous, indeed, are the insects and vermin, in 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 119 
 
 which this kind of organization is discoverable. But it 
 is not an organization favorable to longevity, for those in 
 which this simple apparatus exists, are the beings only of 
 a day ; they flit in the sunshine a few hours; the object 
 of their creation is attained, and they die. 
 
 A resemblance to this sort of machinery is noticed in 
 fishes; though they have a heart, it is exceedingly imper- 
 fect, when compared to the same organ in warm-blooded 
 animals. 
 
 Fig. 53. 
 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 53. 
 
 A. A. are the fringes of the gills, attached to half hoops ot cartil- 
 age. These threads, which are of a bright red, are the extreme 
 terminations of the branchial arteries ; in an animal breathing air, — 
 the same vessels are called bronchial arteries. 
 
 B. the ventricle of the heart, or forcing-pump, which drives the 
 blood with which it is distended, into a single artery. Just beyond 
 B, the artery D divides into two branches, leading to the gills on 
 either side, in equal quantities. Precisely like this, is the right 
 heart of man. Instead of being thrown into gills, the branches di- 
 rect the blood into the lungs. C, the auricle, or first receiving cav- 
 ity of the heart. All the veins of the body in all animals, whether 
 belonging to the land or water, ultimately unite into one tube, and 
 that empties it.s blood into the auricle. 
 
 E. In this diagram, E is the branchial vein, of the right gill soon 
 united to that from the left side The blood has been changed in the 
 gills, where it was sent by the heart, by being brought in contact 
 with the air in the water, and now being fit for the purposes of the 
 system, is returned by these veins, to a great vessel, lying under the 
 backbone. 
 
 F. This is the reservoir of the revitalized blood: — at its com- 
 mencement in the gills, it is like a vein, — but the main trunk now 
 assumes the functions of an artery, or indeed a second heart. It 
 contracts and propels its contents over the body. Here then is a tube 
 taking upon itself the office of the left heart of land-dwelling ani- 
 mals. 
 
120 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Were it profitable, reference might be made to very many curious 
 modifications of this blood-propelling apparatus, so positively neces- 
 sary to the existence of all organized beings, in the oyster, cuttle- 
 fish, birds, lizards, serpents, tortoises, frogs, tadpoles and some other 
 reptiles. 
 
 Indeed, the fish has but half a heart. All their blood, — 
 and in some of tire huge monsters of the ocean there is a 
 prodigious quantity, — is sent its rounds by an artery , and 
 not by a heart or any particular part of one. Here we 
 perceive that a force is exerted by the contractions of a 
 single vessel, equal, (for it must he in sharks of thirty feet 
 in length,) to a moderate sized fire-engine. We positive- 
 ly know it to he so, because the blood, by each pulsation, 
 is driven through as much space in a giveri time, as the 
 water is thrown by the piston of the engine. 
 
 In the mammalia, that is, animals breathing air, the 
 heart is the centre of the circulation — the point from 
 whence the blood starts, and the instrument of propulsion, 
 by which it is kept going in an endless round, in the body. 
 It is a forcing-pump, by which a column of fluid is raised, 
 and an imitation of its mechanism may be examined in 
 every house in which one of those convenient machines 
 is used for filling tanks in the upper apartments. One is 
 self-moving, having incorporated within ils own substance, 
 the wonderful power of generating physical strength ; while 
 in the other, an extraneous force must be applied, some- 
 where, to put it in motion. 
 
 Surely the most sceptical must acknowledge in this in- 
 stance, and it is only one of many millions which might 
 be cited, that the work of an Almighty Being is here most 
 certainly manifested. How simple the contrivance, yet 
 how astonishing the results! 
 
 In warm-blooded animals, the heart is a compound en- 
 gine. If we go back to the fishes it is there single ; but 
 in man, quadrupeds and birds, it is double : they have two 
 hearts, and both of them are forcing pumps. Man has 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 121 
 
 two hearts, but they occupy less room by being joined to- 
 gether, though, for aught we can discover, the system 
 could be just as well supported, had one of them been 
 placed at one side of the chest, and the other at another 
 part. By being united less substance is required ; sym- 
 metry is preserved, and the union of the two actually con- 
 duces to the greater muscular power of both. 
 
 Fig. 54. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 54. 
 
 By this engraving, the reader will readily understand what we 
 mean by the two hearts of man, and other warm-blooded animals, as 
 they are here exhibited, and as they appear when dissected apart. 
 Each one of them is a perfect organ, by itself, and the one is per- 
 fectly independent of the other. That having the letter b upon it, 
 is the right heart, — and that with a g, the left. This is a front 
 view, or like looking into the chest of another person. The right 
 heart is the engine of the lungs, — for it supplies those organs ex- 
 clusively. The left heart throws the blood, as already remarked in 
 the text, round the curve above g, in the direction indicated by the 
 arrows, over the entire body. 
 
 a a are the cavas, or great veins, — returning blood from the 
 head and arms, and lower extremities. The uppermost is the su- 
 perior vena cava, and the one below, the inferior vena cava. The 
 arrows show the direction of the returning currents of venous blood, 
 to 6, the auricle, which forces it into c, the ventricle, which again 
 forces it up into a, the pulmonary artery, where it divides, to go to 
 each lung ; e, is one of the four pulmonary veins, which convey the 
 hlood just forced into the lungs, into the auricle f, of the left heart. 
 When that contracts, it drives its blood into g, the ventricle, which, 
 in its turn, forces it onward again into the arch, or the aorta, the 
 
 11 
 
122 
 
 AN ATOMIC All CLASS BOOK. 
 
 main pipe, where it glides along in the direction of the arrow, di- 
 viding into smaller streams on its way, and finally goes down the 
 descending aorta h, to supply the body below. 
 
 There are many animals which have only the right heart, but 
 none that possess the left one alone. The fishes heart, in the plan 
 preceding this, is the single, equivalent to the right heart of man. 
 
 That there might be no interference, no irregularity, 
 but perfect order and harmony, only one acts at a time. 
 The right heart rests while the left moves, and then, in 
 perfect obedience to a law which cannot be explained, 
 operates in its turn. 
 
 In configuration, the heart has no such vulgar shape as 
 we are told in some of the books, like the ace of hearts 
 on a playing card. It is a short cone, lying obliquely 
 across the breast, the point of which beats, when in an 
 erect posture, between the sixth and seventh ribs of the 
 left side. 
 
 Within, there are four apartments, so irregularly shap- 
 ed, that they cannot be likened to anything. Each heart 
 has its two cavities, communicating with each other by 
 an orifice, about an inch in diameter, but a complete valve 
 is suspended on the margin of the opening, like a gate, 
 to close it, that all communication may be instantaneously 
 interrupted, as we shall ascertain to be indispensably 
 necessary, at each pulsation. Moreover, to prevent the 
 heart from ever being over distended, from having its walls 
 put too much upon a stretch, little cords of astonishing 
 tenacity, run from one side to the other crossing and re- 
 crossing each other in all directions, which also assist, by 
 contracting, to squeeze it, as it were, together, in forcing 
 out its contents. 
 
 To secure it still farther, guarding against all contin- 
 gencies, the heart is enveloped in a tough, slightly elastic 
 case. Having this support, were the internal straps to be 
 rent from their attachments, the swelling heart would be 
 met from without, by its covering, and prevented from 
 being ruptured by the accumulation of the blood within. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 123 
 
 Lastly, that the freedom of motion might never be 
 abridged, the heart is suspended at the top of the chest, by 
 its own lubes, being at liberty to swing in the triangular 
 space given it between the lobes of the lungs, according 
 to the various attitudes the body assumes. This is not 
 all ; the heart constitutes a hollow muscle, being as com- 
 pletely flesh as the muscles of the arm. Besides, it pos- 
 sesses all the essential characteristics of every muscle, the 
 inherent property of contractility. 
 
 Having explained the fact that there are two hearts, it 
 is now necessary to show the necessity of this arrange- 
 ment, which is no easy matter, inasmuch as we are to 
 adapt our demonstration to the capacity of the young. 
 
 Throughout the system there are two sets of tubes for 
 conveying blood ; — one conducting it through the body, 
 and the other returning it. To be serviceable to the 
 system, which is the final cause of the elaborate machi- 
 nery under consideration, two other important organs must 
 necessarily claim attention, viz. the stomach and the 
 lungs. 
 
 In the former, the food is converted into a milky liquor, 
 from whence it is actually conveyed into one of the cavi- 
 ties of the heart ; but before it can be of any service, it 
 must first be mixed with that already in the veins. A 
 chemical change is effected in it by being exposed to the 
 action of the atmospheric air, that makes it blood. 
 
 As the first process is completed, the next object nature 
 has in view, is to distribute it, and the left heart is the 
 apparatus by which it is effected. There is no communi- 
 cation between the cavities of the two hearts, but we per- 
 ceive that the blood which is pouring into the right side, 
 must be thrown somewhere, and as it cannot go into the 
 left, where, the query will arise, does it move ? — directly 
 into the lungs. From thence it is collected, and by four 
 branching tubes carried to the left heart. Thus, the left 
 
124 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 heart forces it in all directions from the centre, and the 
 l ight heart forces that which has been returned into the 
 lungs. 
 
 By an untiring labor of the two hearts, acting alter- 
 nately, from birth till death, the blood, that important sub- 
 stance, on which life depends, is kept always going and 
 coming, and whatever property or quantity is lost on the 
 loute, is supplied by the activity of the stomach, the great 
 laboratory in which the material is manufactured of which 
 it is originally made. 
 
 Authors detail the particulars of what they call the 
 two circulations , — viz. the greater and lesser, by which is 
 to be understood, that the right heart and lungs constitute 
 this lesser, because the force of the engine is only exerted 
 to throw its contents into the air cells of the lungs. On 
 the other hand, the greater circulation, means the left 
 heart and all the arteries leading from it, quite to the ex- 
 tremities. 
 
 As the power to be exerted by the left heart, in order 
 to throw the blood the entire length of the body, is vastly 
 superior to its fellow, which is only required to push its 
 volume of blood about ten inches, so it is proportionably 
 stronger in its substance : thicker in its walls, and more 
 sensitive to the application of stimuli. In the act of dying, 
 the left heart invariably clears all its cavities, — and there- 
 fore is always empty on dissection, but the right heart re- 
 mains full and burthened, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 125 
 
 Fig. 55. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 55. 
 
 The double heart of man : — q, descending vena cava ; o, ascend- 
 ing vena cava ; n, right auricle ; b, right ventricle ; k, pulmonary 
 artery; 1,1, right and left branches of this artery, going to the 
 lungs on either side of the chest; m, m, veins of the lungs, which 
 return what the artery sent in, to r, the left auricle ; a, the left ven- 
 tricle ; c, e,f, aorta or great artery of the body, rising out of the left 
 heart; g, arteria innominata ; h, the subclavian artery , going to the 
 left arm ; i, the carotid artery, which goes up the side of the neck 
 to the head. JYote — the arrows show the course the blood moves 
 in each of the vessels demonstrated with the heart; n, right auricle; 
 m , m, veins of the lungs ; s, left coronary artery. P, veins returning 
 blood from the liver and bowels. 
 
 There is no essential difference in the external appearance, or in- 
 ternal organization of the heart of man, and breathing animals gen- 
 erally ; hence, in a cabinet, it would be exceedingly difficult for a 
 practical anatomist to designate the human, from the heart of a'brute, 
 provided they were of equal dimensions. 
 
 Nothing is easier, than to fill a heart with wax, or even plaster 
 paris, in order to exhibit, distinctly, all its vessels and its exact shape 
 in a state of distention. The heart of any of the domestic animals, 
 procured at the market may he thus filled, and kept for many years. 
 
 11 * 
 
126 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Ultimum moriens, the last part to die, was an accurate 
 remark of the old anatomists. In reptiles and fishes s° 
 irritable is the heart, — and it is to be remembered, they 
 possess only one half of ours, equivalent to the left one, — 
 that long after the body is dead, the heart, separated from 
 all its connexions, will continue to pulsate upon the table 
 for half an hour ; — when it has exhausted itself, if it be 
 touched with the point of a pin, it will be roused into ac- 
 tivity again, and beat and throb as though it were con- 
 scious of making a desperate struggle for existence. 
 
 When the frog’s heart has been a whole hour under in- 
 spection, it will continue to pulsate, even by blowing it. 
 The mangled body, all this time disemboweled, shocking 
 as it may seem, leaps about the house, without a heart, 
 without blood, and with lacerated nerves and muscles, 
 apparently just as well as before those cruelties were com- 
 menced. 
 
 Each heart has two cavities, as repeatedly remarked, — ■ 
 but for the sake of conforming to the usual method of de- 
 scription we will say, the heart has four cavities, two of 
 which are the auricles, being uppermost, and two directly 
 beneath them, the ventricles. 
 
 The numerous threads, already spoken of, reaching 
 from one side to the other, are called cordce tendincce, and 
 those which are fleshy in the middle columnce and massce 
 carnecE. Their office is merely to prevent the auricle from 
 being overcharged, — acting precisely upon the principle 
 of a tape the manufacturer tacks in to keep the lid of a 
 trunk from falling open so far as to wrench off the hinges. 
 
 From the lower part of the auricle, the opening into the 
 ventricle is a smooth round hole, opened and closed by a 
 valve that springs downward, but never, in any instance on 
 record, has it been pushed up through. The valve is curi- 
 ously supported by little tags, lines and weights to prevent 
 its being pressed by any force that might have a tendency 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 127 
 
 to press it the wrong way, — and at the same time, these 
 accompaniments assist in moulding the edges precisely to 
 the ragged surface of the border of the hole, so that it 
 shall be completely tight. That it is impervious, may be 
 inferred from the fact, that the heart has been repeatedly 
 ruptured by its own exertion, on the blood filling its ventri- 
 cles, or auricles, yet the strong walls, half an inch in 
 thicknesss, gave way, while the tiny, transparent valve, 
 maintained its place. 
 
 The strips which enter into its composition, being fanci- 
 fully imagined to be three, takes the name of tricusped , 
 because it has three points supposed to resemble teeth. 
 On the top of the auricle, two or three large veins pre- 
 sent their mouths : — one is the vena cava superior , the 
 great trunk which brings all the blood from the head and 
 arms into the reservoir; and another, nearly opposite, is 
 the vena cava inferior, in which all the blood is brought 
 from the feet and body. There is a third, very much 
 smaller, however, the coronary vein, returning the blood 
 which has circulated exclusively in the substance of the 
 heart. Over this last opening, is a crescent shaped valve, 
 highly important, for were it not there, every time the 
 auricle contracted, it would force the blood wherever there 
 was no resistance, which therefore, instead of allowing the 
 venous blood to return into the common fountain, would 
 be continually driven onward, so that the heart itself would 
 suffer from an obstructed circulation : this half moon 
 shaped valve, swinging downward, entirely opposes the 
 ingress of blood from the auricle, yet freely allows that 
 coming from the heart to make its exit by the valve. 
 
 Can we contemplate anything more purely mechanical 
 than this contrivance. Can any one in his senses argue 
 himself into the absurd belief, that this peculiar arrange- 
 ment, this striking adaptation of parts, all concurring to the 
 
128 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 utmost perfectablility of the machine, splendid in its struc- 
 ture happened all by chance ! 
 
 The auricle being filled, — the sense of fulness, a pro- 
 perty entirely independent of the mind, wholly beyond the 
 control of the laws of volition, prompts it to expel it. This 
 it does by collapsing ; by simultaneously contracting all 
 its parts upon the mass within, which is thereby driven 
 per saltum, through the great canal, down into the ventri- 
 cle, — the second apartment. To admit it there, a pre- 
 paration is necessary on the part of the ventricle, — and 
 that consists in relaxing itself to enlarge its capacity for 
 receiving the portion that is on the way from the auricle. 
 At the instant of being filled, the tricusped valve, which 
 was before pendulous, flaps back, cuts off all further com- 
 munication, and thus holds all that has been admitted, to 
 be afterwards disposed of. 
 
 Because the auricle is obliged to make an effort only 
 strong enough to urge its contents by the valve, it is com- 
 paratively slightly made, and weaker than the ventricle. 
 
 Having the ventricle filled, let us watch the process by 
 which it clears itself. It has been premised, that its duty 
 is to push the blood to the lungs, a distance of about ten 
 inches, though if we suppose that the extreme ramifica- 
 tions of the bronchial arteries are gorged by each throw 
 of the ventricle, the power is equal to projecting the 
 stream between seventy and eighty feet. This point is 
 rather dubious ; anatomists have not satisfied themselves 
 whether the ventricle actually presses the blood to the ex- 
 treme twigs of the lungs, or only sends it beyond the 
 valves in the mouth of the pulmonary artery, hardly a dis- 
 tance of seven inches. Be that as it may, the fact is no- 
 torious, — if it were not designed to exert a force more 
 than ten times as great as the auricle, surely it would not 
 have been made so very much stronger, and so amply pro- 
 vided with materials for that purpose. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 129 
 
 If the auricle can send a column of blood ten feet, the 
 ventricle, by its additional physical advantages, could 
 throw the same quantity fifty feet in precisely the same 
 time. This looks a little like being able to reach the 
 lungs, notwithstanding the reasonings of authors to the 
 contrary. Suffice it, that when the stimulus of distention 
 creates the exciting sensation, the walls contract, as in 
 the other case, and every drop of the blood goes through 
 a very delicately smooth, round hole, — the only outlet 
 from the ventricle, besides the place of entrance, — and 
 this is the beginning of the pulmonary artery, the great 
 blood vessel of the lungs. Here w'e leave the description 
 of the right heart, for the present, lest minuter details 
 should distract, rather than enlighten those who may, per- 
 haps, endeavor to obtain their first accurate notions of this 
 local piece of anatomy, from our dissertation. 
 
 Much as the heart of the body, that on the left side, re- 
 sembles the one before us, there are peculiarities requiring 
 a careful and patient investigation, if we are desirous of 
 perfectly comprehending its structure and interesting 
 functions. 
 
 Were a well prepared specimen of the heart to be lying 
 before the reader, he would regard the general appearance 
 of strength in the left side, as though more depended upon 
 it in the economy of life, than on its associate. Such 
 is truly the fact, that the power manifested by it, is im- 
 mensely superior. 
 
 United, as just seen, are the left auricle and ventricle, 
 with a similar valvular communication between them. 
 The left auricle is considerably larger than the right, but 
 bears more resemblance to a square box, in a state of dis- 
 tention, than a sac. The entire office of this is to expel 
 the blood forcibly into its neighboring ventricle. Uniting 
 by degrees, all the veins gradually terminate in four con- 
 siderable trunks, in the two sides of the auricle, nearly 
 
130 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 opposite to each other. Two of them bring the blood 
 from the right, and the others from the left lobes of the 
 lungs. 
 
 When the ventricle is full, let it be recollected that it 
 must send its blood in two directions, viz., .towards the 
 head, as well as the feet; and at the same time, supply all 
 the intermediate viscera, muscles, nerves, and even the 
 very bones themselves, however hard or remote from the 
 centre of the circulation. Whether the ventricle accom- 
 plishes the feat, remains to be discussed hereafter. By its 
 contraction, a valve called the mitral, shuts back to pre- 
 vent a regurgitation, — hence the blood can only escape 
 through the canal provided for it. This is a long, strong 
 tube, nearly an inch in diameter, in man, known as the 
 aorta. Directly in the calibre of the aorta are three valves, 
 so adjusted to the condition and shape of the artery, that 
 the three, in being spread horizontally, (the posture has 
 no influence on the action) they effectually close the chan- 
 nel, so that nothing which may have passed the portals, 
 can possibly be returned. Thus the functions of the two 
 hearts are analogous; the principle of propulsion is the 
 same, and indeed, when the office and organization of one 
 is understood, it illustrates sufficiently tvell, the other. 
 
 The line of union between the two, is termed the sep- 
 tum cordis. All the fibres of the two ventricles have a 
 winding direction, which give the heart a twisting or ver- 
 micular kind of motion in its pulsations. The alternate- 
 ly swelling and collapsing, as when full, or empty, are, the 
 disastole and systole, terms used to express the pulsations. 
 
 Although the heart is the fountain of life, dispensing 
 the blood either directly, or indirectly, to the smallest twig, 
 wherever located, in the body, it requires a circulation of 
 the same vitalizing fluid, to sustain its own existence. 
 
 For this purpose there are vessels creeping out at the 
 sides of the aorta, at right angles with the trunk, just 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 131 
 
 above the semi-lunar valves, which wend their way direct- 
 ly to the divisional horizontal line, between the auri- 
 cles and ventricles, where, carefully imbedded in a trian- 
 gular depression, out of the way, the coronary arteries 
 are continually sending off branches that dip down into 
 the substance of the heart, supplying it abundantly with 
 arterial blood. When it has completed its route, and is 
 in readiness to go on again, to get within the cavities of 
 the heart, from the extremities of the coronary arteries, 
 veins commence, called coronary, which keep gradually 
 uniting, and ultimately coalesce in one single tube, the 
 coronary vein, the diameter of a writing pen, whose mouth 
 was found, on examination of the right auricle, be- 
 hind a beautiful little coronary valve. In this way the 
 substance of the heart is supplied with nutriment, to sus- 
 tain it in a course of activity, that never tires, and which 
 never ceases to palpitate, till death puts a stop to its 
 motion. 
 
 NERVES OF THE HEART. 
 
 These are few, arising from the sympathetic and eighth 
 pair of nerves. The sympathetic , is a kind of line of union 
 receiving a deputation from all the principal nerves 
 throughout the frame, by which a connexion is maintained 
 with all the different parts of the complicated whole. 
 The eighth pair of nerves arise in the brain, but traverse 
 down the side of the neck into the chest, following the 
 course of the windpipe and eesophagus, quite to the stom- 
 ach. F rom these, there being a pair, one on either side, fil- 
 aments shoot off to the heart. The minutas of the course 
 is not essential. In this way the heart holds a line of 
 communication with the work-shop, the stomach, where 
 it looks for the manufacture of the material from which 
 the blood is elaborated ; and by the other set of nervous 
 
132 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 cords, it possesses a general relationship to all the portions 
 of the living body, which look up to it for a maintenance. 
 
 Placing the heart entirely beyond the reach of the in- 
 constant, unstable will, was indeed a happy circumstance 
 in the economy of our being. No one can put a stop to 
 the pulsations of his heart, in a fit of despair or rage, as 
 thousands would, were it possible. It still works on, by 
 night as well as day, though the intellect sleeps, — and 
 thus we are safely protected. If the pulsations and the 
 maintenance of life, through the heart’s agency, depend- 
 ed on our vigilance, how soon we should forget the charge, 
 and suffer the chronometer of life to run down the first 
 time it was left in our care. Wisdom, — the manifesta- 
 tions of an Ever Living, Omniscient Deity, are displayed 
 at every stage of anatomical research. 
 
 HEART-CASE, OR PERICARDIUM. 
 
 An allusion, merely, has been made to the heart-case, 
 or pericardium, the office and importance of which is very 
 likely to be overlooked. It is the membrane which far- 
 mers sometimes make money purses of, on account of its 
 softness, toughness and capacity. In the chest, lying be- 
 tween the breast bone in front and the spinal column be- 
 hind, it is like a bag, kept on the stretch by a hoop : on 
 either side are the lungs, confined, however, in their own 
 appropriate cavities. A duplication of its inner coat in- 
 vests the substance of the heart, closely, and on the sur- 
 face, spread over the heart, as well as from the inside of 
 the pericardium, a halitus is exhaled, that lubricates the 
 cavity, — admitting the gentlest possible motions, as it 
 swings in the apartment. Though the heart is moving 
 about, its apex being sometimes at one point, and some- 
 times at another, according to our position, the pericar- 
 dium never moves from its place, being always kept upon 
 the stretch. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 133 
 
 Fig. 56. 
 
 a, the heart, in its natural position, the sternum being taken away, 
 and the pericardium laid open, in front, to give a full and perfect view 
 of the organ ; c, is the arch of the aorta, or primitive artery of the 
 body, from which all others arise; e, is the diaphragmatic nerve, 
 having its origin high up, on the side of the neck, and travelling 
 down into the chest, on the outside of the 'pericardium, or heart 
 case, to reach the diaphragm, — the partition that divides the chest 
 from the abdomen. If this nerve is divided, all motion in the dia- 
 phragm will cease. It-should be recollected that it is a muscle of 
 respiration, — rising and falling with the inflation and collapse of the 
 lungs. The base, or rather underside of the heart, as it is suspend- 
 
 12 
 
134 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 ed from above, rests on tbo diaphragm at the lower b ; b, b, i, the 
 heart case ; d, the descending cava, or great vein that returns the 
 blood from the head and arms, into the right auricle of the heart. 
 
 ARTERIES. 
 
 To describe the arteries in a manner intelligible to per- 
 sons who have never examined an anatomical preparation, 
 in which these vessels are distended with wax, is certainly 
 a difficult undertaking. 
 
 Fig. 57. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 135 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 57. 
 
 By referring back to the plan of the perfect double heart, i shows 
 the origin of the carotid artery, a branch from the arch of the aorta. 
 In this very accurate plan of the superficial arteries of the head, a 
 is the continued trunk of the carotid artery : it is this vessel which 
 is usually divided by suicides ; it is this vessel also, with its mate 
 on the other side of the neck, which, when compressed, causes ap- 
 poplexv and death, f, the occipital artery, going to the muscles on 
 the back of the head; b, is the larynx, or vocal box; c, indicates 
 the place where the carotid divides into the n, the external carotid, 
 branching onward; b, also is the superior thyroid artery; p, the 
 thyroid gland, and inferior thyroid artery ; k, the temporal artery, 
 felt beating in the temple, and sometimes selected to bleed from in 
 desperate cases ; o , the left subclavian artery ; l , the masseter mus- 
 cle ; h, depressor anguli oris, having running under it the external 
 maxillary artery ; i, the zygomaticus major, directing the eye also 
 to the coronary arteries of the lips ; q, the nasal artery ; r, the ter- 
 mination of the temporal artery, in minute twigs on the top of the 
 head. 
 
 After all that is said about the catalogue of arteries laid 
 down in the human body, there is really but one artery, all 
 others being branches from it. But to answer the purpos- 
 es of the surgeon, it is absolutely necessary to treat of 
 each twig distinctly, in order that its relation to other parts 
 may be impressed on the mind of an operator. 
 
 This one artery, the primitive trunk, is the aorta, rear- 
 ing itself out of the left ventricle of the heart : collectively 
 the parent tube, with its subdivisions into thousands of 
 tortuous pipes, is denominated the aortic system; and 
 when arteries and veins are spoken of together, as a whole, 
 the term sanguiferous system is used. 
 
 i 
 
136 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 58. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 58. 
 
 This diagram may be regarded as perfectly true to nature. The 
 design is to show how the blood is conveyed to deep seated muscles 
 of the face, and to the membranes covering the brain, within the 
 skull: — all the vessels now under the oye, are branches, originat- 
 ing from the trunk of the external carotid artery, shown in the pre- 
 ceding plan. a. is the middle or great meningeal artery of the dura 
 mater. By the side of the ear, lies the trunk of the internal max- 
 illary artery, supplying a vast quantity of blood to the muscles of 
 the face; part of the jaw and the process of the temporal bone is re- 
 moved, to explain the manner of its course under and about them. 
 h, a branch of the inferior maxillary artery , seen in the other plan : 
 c, posterior temporal branch ; d, pterygoid arteries, supplying those 
 muscles which move the jaw, in chewing ; i, buccal artery , going 
 to the buccinator, or trumpeter’s muscle ; f anterior deep temporal 
 branch ; e, infra orbitar artery. 
 
 The bone in this figure, is supposed to have been taken away, in 
 order to exhibit the arteries a which branch, like the limbs of a 
 tree, over the surface of the dura mater. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 J37 
 
 As the great cylinder rises above the top of the heart, 
 thick, white and shining, it is bulged out at the sides, in 
 in three directions, at the place where the three semilunar 
 valves are fixed. The enlargement is known as the sinus 
 of Valsalvi, from its supposed discoverer. Gradually it be- 
 comes smaller, preserving, however, a diameter equal to 
 three fourths of an inch, till it gets above the heart, where 
 
 Fig. 59. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 59. 
 
 This figure has been introduced to show the manner of supplying 
 the brain with arterial blood by the vertebral arteries. It will doubt- 
 less be recollected by the critical student, that in the side arms of 
 the vertebrae of the neck, there were round holes, from one bone to 
 the other. Through those holes, an artery creeps securely into the 
 skull, unexposed to the thousand accidents to which the carotid ar- 
 teries are liable. If, for example, an operation requires that the 
 carotids should be tied, so that no blood can pass in them, a supply 
 for the brain is secured by these vertebrals. When they have ar- 
 rived within the skull, at the underside of the brain, the two mark- 
 ed 6, b, unite into one — which is c, — and then branches off among 
 
133 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 the convolutions of the brain, indicated by the various letters; g, 
 is the little brain or cerebellum ; f, the middle lobe of the brain, or 
 cerebrum; e, the anterior lobe of the cerebrum; and a, the optic 
 nerves, or nerves of vision. This is no fanciful distribution of the 
 arteries of this organ, but a perfectly true representation. 
 
 it is gracefully curved over and upon the spine, down 
 which it runs the entire circuit of the chest and abdomen. 
 On the last joint, though not constantly, of the back, it 
 divides into two trunks, to be sent to the inferior extremi- 
 ties. On the highest point of the arch, branches shoot off, 
 to carry blood to the head and arms. Those going up the 
 side of the neck, are the carotids, the arteries which 
 suicides divide in cutting their throats. It is by com- 
 pressing these, as in hanging, that death is produced : — 
 when they arrive at the angle of the under jaw, they divide 
 into external and internal carotids : — the deep seated or 
 inner ones go through an orifice in the bottom of the skull, 
 to supply the brain ; while the externals creep up by the 
 side of the ear, face, &c., supplying all the muscles and 
 bones in the vicinity. 
 
 Fig. GO. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 139 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 60. 
 
 A very large quantity of blood, as we have seen, is sent to the 
 brain, by four arteries, viz. the two carotids and two vertebrals. By 
 this plan, it will be plainly understood how the blood gets back 
 again to the heart. The superior longitudinal sinus, Fig. 1, is 
 nothing more than a vein, — of a triangular shape, beginning with- 
 in the skull, opposite the root of the nose, and going backward, be- 
 tween the bone and outer membrane of the brain, over the top 
 of the head — increasing in size as it goes, till it reaches the level of 
 the posterior lobe, — where it divides into two canals, marked 3. 3. 
 Many twigs of veins, pointed out by the other figures, bring the 
 blood from other places in the head, but ultimately, they all join one 
 or the other branches of the main trunks of the sinus: 3. 3. are 
 called lateral sinuses, because they are on the sides, as it were of 
 the head. These two trunks pass through a fissure, in the under 
 side of the skull, between the temporals and occipital bone, and ap- 
 pearing by the side of the neck, are there called the jugular veins. 
 The external jugulars return the blood from the face, &c, and finally 
 join the interna! jugulars, — and there, by entering the chest, be- 
 come enlarged by the union of the veins of the arms — when the 
 whole are concentrated in one tube, — that last one, is the descend- 
 in'* vena cava, — emptying all the blood from the head, and brain, 
 and arms, into the auricle of the right heart. The jugular veins, 
 therefore, are the great veins of the brain, and commence behind the 
 forehead bone, just between the eyes, within the skull. 
 
 At the last joint of the spine, the lumbar region, we left 
 the descending artery, divided into two branches. In as- 
 cending from the heart, the large artery is called the as-, 
 cending aorta, and having made the curve, the descend- 
 ing tube is tlic descending aorta. 
 
 These two trunks, now lying just within the brim of the 
 pelvis, divide again, sending a supply of blood to the 
 muscles and apparatus within the pelvis. The first trunks 
 are the external iliacs, and the second set are internal 
 iliacs. Further down, in the thigh, in each limb, the 
 arteries appear under the name of femoral arteries : — in 
 the ham, behind the knee joint, the poplitceal; still fur- 
 ther, by the side of the shin bone, the tibial ; in the foot, 
 the planter, and so on, till the divisions become too minute 
 to be discernible to the naked eye. 
 
 Between the arch and the pelvis, various little twigs 
 are thrown off laterally to nourish the lungs, diaphragm, 
 
140 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 liver, stomach, spleen, and other abdominal viscera, — 
 each bearing a name indicating its destination, or office, 
 or supposed resemblance to familiar objects. Here, then, 
 we have exhibited a scheme of the arterial system, per- 
 haps quite as well as to have accompanied the text with 
 many more drawings. 
 
 The arteries must be nourished themselves, by a free 
 circulation of blood in their coats, as much as the heart; 
 otherwise, were they independent of the rest of the living 
 body, they would be extraneous, and could not contribute 
 to its wants. On the sides of all the arteries, millions of 
 vessels, infinitely fine, more nearly like tho down on a 
 peach than arteries, conduct a circulation. This tissue or 
 net work of miniature arteries, is the vasa vasorum. 
 Finally, the arteries are made up of several coats, as though 
 one tube were thrust into another, — which are muscu- 
 lar and membraneous, according to their importance. 
 
 As they recede from the heart, the tendency is to keep 
 subdividing, to supply every possible part, — hence, ulti- 
 mately, they become too small to be seen. Between these 
 points, and the commencement of the veins, is ah inter- 
 mediate set of real or imaginary vessels, the capillaries, 
 through which the blood must pass to reach the veins. 
 Such is the monstrous size of the aorta in a whale, that 
 the whizzing velocity of the blood, at each systole, is 
 audible to the harpooners : with the stethoscope, quite a 
 modern invention, the rush of the blood may be heard in 
 our own species. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 141 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 61. 
 
 It is utterly impossible as 
 well as unprofitable, in an el- 
 ementary work of this kind, 
 intended for youth, to picture 
 every vessel ; hut we were 
 desirous of displaying the ar- 
 teries of the arm and palm of 
 the hand, on account of the 
 beauty and great importance 
 of the structure. What is 
 seen in this drawing, exists in 
 every living arm. Over the 
 bend of the elbow, a mere 
 web lies between the great 
 artery and vein. The vein is 
 taken away, but it will show 
 how dangerous it is to bleed 
 the vein, at this point, on ac- 
 count of the nearness of the 
 artery, which is liable to be 
 wounded by the point of the 
 lancet. A knowledge of this 
 fact, should deter every one 
 from employing surgeons in 
 whom they have not the most 
 implicit confidence, that they 
 understand anatomy, a, b , c, 
 d, e, f g, h, k, mark the 
 branches of the brachial artery 
 a, as they are, in relation to 
 the muscles ; i is the fassia or 
 the membrane, between the 
 artery and vein, and which is 
 a tendinous strip sent off from 
 the biceps flexor cubiti or 
 bending muscle of the fore 
 arm, as though it was express- 
 ly designed to confine the 
 throbbing artery in its place, 
 and protect it from the injuries 
 to which it seems liable by 
 carrying burdens in the arms. 
 This strip of tendon is like the 
 arch of a bridge, — for if the 
 arm is bent, it is still tense, 
 and therefore always a de- 
 fence. 
 
 This brachial artery, near 
 the elbow, divides into branch- 
 
142 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK.; 
 
 es; — one of them sinks into the muscles, to supply them, by the 
 side of the ulna, on a line with the little finger, and hence called the 
 ulnar artery. The main trunk of the brachial , however, travels 
 downward, quite superficially, near the edge of the radius, and 
 therefore has the name of radial artery. In the wrist, being just 
 under the skin, it is pressed against the bone, where its pulsations 
 are felt : — feeling the pulse, in the language of physicians, simply 
 means the sensation conveyed by the throbbings of this artery, when 
 thus compressed. Further on in the palm of the hand, it forms half 
 a circle, termed the palmer arch, and from its outward curve, digital 
 branches convey the blood to the fingers and thumb. 
 
 That the arteries possess the property of contracting 
 upon the blood cannot be denied. The heart, were it in- 
 tended to force the column, independently of any assis- 
 tance from the arteries, through their whole extent, we 
 should suppose, was not adequate to the undertaking, be- 
 cause the proportions are unequal, in comparing the engine 
 with the distance to which it is required to send the blood. 
 The pulsations of the arteries, indicate that they continue 
 and propagate the action which was commenced by the 
 heart. 
 
 Were it not so, of what Use are the valves at the mouth 
 of the aorta and in the pulmonary artery ? If the volume 
 to which an onward impetus had been given, could pur- 
 sue the tortuous windings, quite to the capillaries, of what 
 need were the valves 1 The truth appears fo be this, viz., 
 the ventricle only throws the blood beyond the valves, 
 which are thrust across the canal to prevent a regurgita- 
 tion, and then the artery compresses it in turn. Onward 
 it moves, to some other place, where, before the velocity 
 that has been given it is lost, a second, third and fourth 
 pulsation, as the case may be, conpletes the circle of ac- 
 tion. Do we not actually feel that the artery pulsates in 
 the wrist ; and do we not also recollect that in the fish, an 
 artery, the aorta, assumes the office of a heart ; in the 
 vermin too, did we not show that the aorta and accompa- 
 nying arteries carried on the perfect circulation, without 
 any heart at all ? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 143 
 
 The arteries are not passive tubes, imbedded in the 
 concealed interstices of the muscles to conduct a fluid in 
 which they have no part nor interest. They are not qui- 
 escent, like the wooden pump logs of an aqueduct corpo- 
 ration, remaining at rest, till something disturbs them : — 
 no ; they are portions of a living whole, endowed with a 
 vitality which results from this peculiar combination of or- 
 ganized matter. They feel the vigor, or the decay of other 
 parts ; they become diseased by over excitement ; sicken, 
 refuse to pursue their accustomed service ; and when the 
 crazy, shattered frame of the old man begins to tottle, the 
 arteries, too, begin to flag, and finally cease to act at all. 
 In old age they ossify — becoming perfectly bony tubes, 
 for many inches together : by over action, they are en- 
 larged into irregular sacks, or aneurisms ; and in ad- 
 vanced cases, they burst, and the heart’s blood is wasted 
 so quickly, that life may be said to have exploded. 
 
 The tendency of age, is to relax the muscular fibre, and 
 in this general debility, the arterial coats suffer — their 
 diameters enlarge, and their power is diminished as their 
 transverse diameter increases. The energy of the pulse 
 is lost; the arteries, however, make an effort to sustain 
 their accustomed vigor, by assuming a more tortuous 
 course, — showing, that the short curves which are made 
 under these circumstances, are favorable to the accumula- 
 tion of physical power. 
 
 VEINS. 
 
 It is much easier to account for the propulsion of the 
 blood from the heart, through the arteries, than to explain 
 the process of its return through the veins. Their origin 
 is in the capillaries, quite at the extreme terminations of 
 the arteries, growing larger as they advance towards the 
 centre of the body. They are seen through the skin at 
 the ends of the fingers, on the arms, and indeed every- 
 
144 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 63. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 62. 
 
 The anatomy of the veins being 
 much less intricate than the arteries, 
 to understand, it has not been thought 
 necessary to present more than one 
 plan of some of the most superficial 
 vessels of this order. 
 
 On the calf of the leg, there are 
 g numerous veins, just under the skin, 
 uniting into fewer and fewer branches, 
 as they rise upon the limb, till they 
 finally unite in two principal trunks, 
 one deep seated, and the other super- 
 ficial, which pass into the pelvis, at 
 the gi'oin, and thus convey the blood to 
 the ascending vena cava , the great 
 vein that carries all the blood to the 
 heart, which has been collected below 
 it. By turning to the drawing of the 
 double heart, Fig. 2, that great vein 
 will be seen. 
 
 d. The gastrocnemius. 
 
 e. The nervus saphaer.us minor. 
 
 f The branch arising from the pop- 
 liteal. 
 
 g. The nervus communicans, aris- 
 ing from the fibular nerve. 
 
 h. The popliteal nerve. 
 
 i. Tlie fibular nerve. 
 
 k. The popliteal vein. 
 
 /. The vena saphaena minor. 
 
 m. The popliteal artery. 
 
 n. n. The arterise, distributed upon 
 the calf of the leg. 
 
 p, p. The muscles on the back of the 
 thigh. 
 
 d. The gastrocnemius. 
 
 where, creeping upward, becoming increased in size at 
 every step, till they eventually are reduced in number to 
 two principal trunks, the superior and inferior cavas, at 
 the right auricle. Their coats, which are the same as the 
 arteries, are thinner and weaker — more dilatable, and 
 consequently much oftener diseased and liable to acci- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 145 
 
 dents. Through their whole track, with a few excep- 
 tions, there is a line of valves, the office of which is to 
 hold the column from falling back, that has once passed 
 above the lock. So frequent are these valves, that they 
 may be detected every inch, in the great veins of the arms. 
 By compressing the vessel above one of them, the blood 
 at once accumulates in the form of a knot, — showing ac- 
 curately the exact place of its locality. The principle of 
 fixing a ligature round a limb, as a preparatory step to 
 bleeding, with a lancet, is to stop the blood in its course, — 
 there being no possibility of its going backward, as it is 
 held by the valve, — therefore, as the canal is closed by 
 compression above, the escape is at the incision. 
 
 We will not pretend to inform our readers how the blood 
 travels up the veins, — lying, as they do, perfectly quies- 
 cent. It seems as though there must he a propulsive force 
 exerted somewhere in the vicinity of the capillaries, to 
 thrust the blood along, yet dissection gives us no clue to 
 the mystery. 
 
 The veins also perform other interesting duties, acting 
 as absorbents, accompanying the arteries, wherever they 
 may go, to be servants in waiting, — to pick up, and carry 
 home whatever may have been conveyed to a distance by 
 their superiors. 
 
 CIRCULATION OF TIIF. BLOOD. 
 
 Were it not necessary in the plan of animal life to pre- 
 sent every particle of blood, at certain intervals, to the 
 influence of atmospheric air, there would have been no 
 need of a heart. We might have been born with a suffi- 
 cient quantity in our bodies, where it might have remained 
 undisturbed, fulfilling the intentions of its design. Such 
 a state of things, however, is not admissible, because it is 
 secreted into the vessels to increase the growth, to repair 
 13 
 
146 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS ROOK, 
 
 the wastes, and to sustain the whole by its vivifying pres» 
 ence. Every bone, muscle, tendon, nerve, membrane and 
 fluid, is made out of the blood. As the parts to be made 
 cannot fabricate themselves, and afterwards take their ap- 
 pointed stations, the blood goes to the spot where this is to 
 be effected, leaving material for a bone in one place, glue 
 to hold particles together in another, and so on, in its ac- 
 tive round. But, on the other hand, these particles can- 
 not fashion themselves ; — the point of an artery, there- 
 fore, at which they are given off, assumes the office of an 
 artisan, and moulds and finishes the work. 
 
 We here discover that the arteries possess a wonderful 
 property, which was not spoken of in the preceding para- 
 graphs. Industrious and unerring in all the first years 
 of life, invariably conveying just the soit of material that 
 may be wanted to mend a broken bone, to heal a cut finger, 
 or to lubricate a joint, they grow careless in forty years : — 
 they neglect supplying the eyes with sufficient quantities 
 of humors to distend the ball, so we meet the emergency 
 by wearing spectacles: they are forgetful of the order by 
 which their early labors were regulated, — and as one 
 mistake leads to the commission of another ; lime is car- 
 ried to the heart, where the valves become bony , the 
 urinary apparatus is carelessly watched, and stones form 
 in the bladder ; the teeth are not supplied with earthy 
 matter in season to prevent their decay : — the hair is not 
 watered at the roots, and it becomes dry and falls off. 
 
 Such cursory remarks as these, exhibit a bird’s-eye view 
 of the importance and multifarious functions of the arte- 
 ries, and demonstrates the high value of the blood, from 
 which so much and such inimitable machinery is formed. 
 
 As we now comprehend the use of the circulation, we 
 will next endeavor to solve another apparently difficult 
 problem — the why it is necessary to throw the blood into 
 the air cells of the lungs. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 J47 
 
 fSig. 63. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 6;?. 
 
 If the student is desirous of thoroughly and clearly understanding 
 the circulation of the blood, as it moves in his own body, let him 
 stow recapitulate the subject, by following the venous or black blood 
 from the two great supplying vein's, till it arrives in the main dis- 
 tributing artery, purified, re-vitalized and in a condition to sustain 
 animal life. 
 
 the descending vena cava, returning black blood from the head 
 and upper extremities. 
 
 n, the ascending vena cava, returning the same kind of blood from 
 the lower parts of the body. 
 
 ti, the right auricle of the heart, where both veins meet. 
 
 ; p , and x, veins from the liver, spleen and bowels, uniting with the 
 inferior cava. 
 
 The auricle being filled, contracts and forces the blood into b, the 
 ventricle: next the ventricle contracts and sends it into k, the pul- 
 monary artery, which branches into 1 , 1 , to supply the lungs in both 
 sides of the chest From'the lungs, where a scarlet color has been 
 given it, four veins of the lungs gather it together, and deposit it in 
 the left auricle r- that contracts, and the blood is driven into the 
 left ventricle a; lastly, the ventricle contracts and throws it into c, 
 
14S 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS COOK. 
 
 (lie aorta, which conducts it over and through every bone, muscle 
 and organ. 
 
 Under a solar microscope, the circulation of the blood in the thin 
 web of a frog’s foot, and several other reptiles, may be distinctly ob- 
 served; and in insects, while they remain worms, the pulsations of 
 (he artery which acts instead of a heart, are readily perceived. In 
 the oyster, the heart pulsates about thirty-seven times in a minute. 
 
 Before birth, the blood, instead of going from the auricle of the 
 right heart down into the ventricle, to be thrown into the lungs, 
 passes directly through a valve in the partition wall between the two 
 auricles, and thus gets into the left side, or left heart. The reason 
 why the blood is not sent to the lungs, is because they have not yet 
 assumed the function of breathing. At biith, when the first breath 
 of air is inhaled that ever entered the lungs, the valve closes up the 
 opening forever, and the blood then takes a circuitous route through 
 the lungs, for the reason which has been already so familiarly ex- 
 plained. 
 
 The sign of the vitality of the blood is its scarlet colon 
 which it only exhibits in the heart and arteries. When it 
 goes from the heart, it is charged with the presence, or 
 admixture, of every material which can possibly be re- 
 quired; but ou its way to the capillaries, all these several 
 materials, supposed to be in solution, are dropped on the 
 way, so that when the refuse, that is, the fluid, which was 
 merely the medium of conveyance, enters the extreme be- 
 ginnings of the veins, its color is almost black. 
 
 Having, therefore, imparted all its needful qualities, it is 
 totally unfit to be sent round a second time, till it is re- 
 charged. To obtain this quality, now lost, the right heart 
 sends it into the lungs. Surrounding each distended air 
 cell, is a thin sheet of black venous blood, which by the 
 mysterious influence of the contained air, changes the 
 color, instanter, to its original scarlet. The orgasm, the 
 suddenness of the change, cannot be conceived — yet 
 the whole mass is re-vitalized, and is now carried into the 
 left heart, to be again sent over the old ground. Such, in 
 familiar language, is the circulation of the blood — a pro- 
 cess well calculated to raise our admiration for the charac- 
 ter and transcendent power, and condescending goodness 
 of our Creator. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 149 
 
 Anatomists in treating of this important fluid, speak of 
 its being composed of three substances, viz ; serum, the 
 watery, yellowish fluid ; fibrin, the crassamention, or cake ; 
 and the coloring matter. Were we not restricted in this 
 work to certain limits, it would certainly be an entertain- 
 ing theme to detail the extravagant whims which the old 
 authors entertained upon the subject of the red globules of 
 the blood. It actually seems, to a calm spectator, who 
 surveys the past and compares it with the present, as 
 though the physiologists of the two last centuries bowed 
 down to make themselves positively ridiculous, by the 
 sweat of the brow. When, by some fortuitous circum- 
 stance, it was ascertained that the florid hue of the blood 
 depended on the actual pressure of floating globules, of 
 different sizes, ye! so minutely small as to appear like the 
 coloring of an infusion, they set to work in earnest to in- 
 vestigate their use and structure. About the same time, un- 
 luckily, a philosopher invented the compound microscope, 
 which enabled every body to peep into microcosms, where 
 they beheld sights, quite imaginary in most cases, more 
 astonishing than were ever before revealed to human eyes. 
 
 Whether they saw distinctly or not, it is now of little 
 consequence ; but at all events, they asserted the want of 
 uniformity in the size of the globules, though each one 
 was a hexagon, built up regularly and mathematically, as 
 an architect could construct a country seat, of six smaller 
 hexagons ! However small — and some where supposed 
 to be immensely beyond the magnifying reach of their 
 glasses — they were all framed in the same workman-like 
 manner. 
 
 All this fine discovery being settled and indisputably 
 admitted — for it would have been outrageously impolite 
 for those who had no microscopes, to call the marvellous 
 discovery in question — their wits were in labor to devise 
 a rank for them in the circulation. This, too, was accom- 
 id* 
 
150 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 plished ; but to find out the diseases that originated in 
 consequence of the mistakes, or refractory conduct of the 
 compound balloons, was a poser. There is nothing, by 
 the way, like perseverance. A man who is lost in a fog, 
 has but one course to pursue, and that is to take care of 
 himself: so it was with our discoverers; they had their 
 mathematical bladders on hand, which must be disposed 
 of — and here they are, in all their beauty of arrange- 
 ment, from the plastic hands of their discoverers. 
 
 Diseases were the effects arising from error loci — that 
 is, some of the large globules, fitted to the calibre of a par- 
 ticular artery, got wedged by some sad mishap at the 
 mouth of a smaller vessel, or, becoming angry, refused to 
 operate in the harness, so puffed up — clogged the pass- 
 age — and this produced inflammation, out of the modifi- 
 cations of which fevers, dropsies, and all the other ills that 
 flesh is heir to, had a bona fida origin ! 
 
 Enough has been written to stimulate our readers to 
 the perusal of the old records of physiological folly, in the 
 original tongue, if they wish for an uninterrupted history 
 of that singular discovery. To those who are more inter- 
 ested in the anatomical facts we have been relating, 
 touching the heart and the arteries, it is needless to re- 
 commend them to the writings of those who are teachers 
 by profession. Perhaps we may have committed ourselves 
 in the ardor of the moment, by advancing ideas quite as 
 absurd as those which we have been condemning; but in 
 the demonstration of parts, we are conscious of being right, 
 having given the anatomy of the circulation as we have 
 found it, by years of toil ; and as it regards theories, things 
 made at little expense, like castles in the air, we are not 
 tenacious about the respect that may be paid to them. 
 Having been right merry over the conceits of our profes- 
 sional predecessors, we are quite willing to be laughed at 
 in turn. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 151 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 Had the ancients a knowledge of the circulation ? 
 
 How did they explain the movements of the blood ? 
 
 What is the heart ? 
 
 Is the heart a single or compound organ ? 
 
 In what animals is the heart single P 
 Why is it necessarily single in fishes ? 
 
 How does it act? 
 
 How many cavities has the heart ? 
 
 What prevents the blood from rushing into the wrong apart- 
 ments ? 
 
 Has it a circulation of blood for its own service P 
 What are the auricles? 
 
 What are the ventricles ? 
 
 What is the use of the valves ? 
 
 Has the heart any nerves ? 
 
 Why has the will no control over it? 
 
 Where is the heart located ? 
 
 Is it covered by any membrane ? 
 
 Why are not the pulsations felt in the right side ? 
 
 How does the right heart differ from the left? 
 
 What is an artery ? 
 
 Where is the principal artery of the body found ? 
 
 What veins return all the blood to the heart ? 
 
 Are there valves in the veins ? 
 
 Has the aorta any valves ? 
 
152 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS COOK. 
 
 Where does the pulmonary artery arise ? 
 
 Where are the carotid arteries ? 
 
 By what arteries is the brain supplied with blood ? 
 
 Is the heart a forcing engine ? 
 
 How are the pulses perceived in the wrist? 
 
 What is the use of the pericardium ? 
 
 What change is effected on the blood in the lungs ? 
 What color has the blood in the veins ? 
 
 What color has the blood in the arteries P 
 Does blood circulate in the bones ? 
 
 By what organs are all parts of the body fashioned ? 
 
 Of what use is the blood in an animal ? 
 
 How is the blood supplied ? 
 
 What is the object of taking food into the stomach ? 
 
 Is it known by what power blood is moved in the veins ? 
 What is the composition of the blood ? 
 
 Why are some animals denominated cold blooded ? 
 
 Is the blood warm in reptiles having a single heart ? 
 
 Can any animal exist long, deprived of its heart ? 
 
 What is understood by the irritability of the heart? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 153 
 
 THE NERVES, 
 
 OR NEUROLOGY. 
 
 Neurology teaches us the anatomy and physiology ot 
 the nerves. 
 
 The brain is the radiating point whence the nerves, 
 to a considerable extent, have their origin. The spinal 
 marrow, from which an immense number of nerves branch 
 out, is considered in reality by some, a prolongation of 
 the brain itself. Phrenologists, on the other hand, sup- 
 pose the brain arises from the spinal marrow, because the 
 brain is sometimes wanting, but the nerves are always 
 present. 
 
 In the first place, the contents of the head are divided 
 into the cerebrum and cerebellum, or in other words, the 
 great and small brains. Above the level of the ears, all 
 the upper portion of the skull is occupied by the cerebrum, 
 wnich is the immediate seat of intellect. Below that level, 
 in the lower and back part of the head, is the cerebellum 
 
154 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 64 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 64. 
 
 This is an exhibilion of a vertical section of the bones of the head, 
 fare and brain, showing precisely the appearance, were the head di- 
 vided in the middle, from the top, down to the neck. No letters of 
 leference have been inlroduced, because the plate will be doubly 
 valuable, when the general relation of the different portions have 
 been learned from the text and the other diagrams. The reader will 
 then trace with his eye the outline of the little brain, the cerebrum, 
 or large brain, the seat of thought ; the ventricles and other interest- 
 ing points, which, though intricate, are nevertheless worth the trou- 
 ble of understanding. The mechanical arrangement is only contem- 
 plated in these illustrations: — the functions of the brain in a treatise, 
 purely elementary, would be wholly useless. 
 
 or little brain. They are separated from each other by a 
 membrane, tensely stretched. Otherwise, the weight of 
 the upper mass would oppress t he functions of the lower 
 one. By a vertical line, the brain is divided into hemi- 
 spheres, as right and left ; but when it is dislodged from the 
 head, and inverted, the underside presents three promi- 
 nent risings, which are denominated lubes. Those por- 
 tions of the brain directly behind each eye, are the ante- 
 rior lobes. Those at the back side of the head, the poste- 
 rior; and the third, between them both, are the middle 
 lobes. 
 
anatomical class book. 
 
 155 
 
 COATS OF THE I! It A I N AND NERVES. 
 
 In this plain exposition of the anatomy of the nervous 
 system, ii would be an endless labor to attempt a minute 
 detail of the three different coverings, which surround the 
 intellectual apparatus, independently of the bony box, the 
 strong wall that envelops the whole. 
 
 firm coat, or — Dura Mater . 
 
 When the skull is opened, a dense, shining membrane 
 is presented, that keeps the brain together, when the 
 bones are taken entirely away. Completely embracing 
 the entire organ, it becomes thicker round the medulla 
 ob/onga, to defend this narrowing of the brain, over the 
 bones of the neck, — then continues its course through 
 the whole length of the back-bone, embracing the mar- 
 row' : wherever a branch or side nerve is given off, a por- 
 tion of the dura mater follows it, precisely as the bark of 
 the trunk covers the branching limbs. In the still smaller 
 divisions of the nerve, a continuous tube of the dura mater 
 is found, till both are finally lost on the exterior surface. 
 This membrane, let it be remembered, holds the office of 
 defending the pulp of the nervous matter within its em- 
 brace, wherever the nerves may traverse. 
 
 transparent coat, or — Tunica Araclmoides. 
 
 Perhaps there is not a more delicate, transparent mem- 
 brane in the whole body than this, — so much resembling 
 a spider’s web, that from this circumstance it has its name. 
 This lies over the convolutions of the brain, directly under 
 the dura mater, and does not dip down between the pro- 
 minences. Beside surrounding the brain, like the other, 
 it has precisely the same infinite distribution — making 
 the second tube for defending the nerve. 
 
156 
 
 : ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 soft coat, or — Pia Malcr. 
 
 Blood must be everywhere freely circulated ; but in the 
 brain, it is necessarily thrown into that portion which is 
 the seat of thought, in very minute, hair-like currents, — 
 otherwise the force of the heart, which acts upon the 
 principle of a forcing-pump or syringe, would tear it to 
 pieces. This pia mater, therefore, is an immense, broad, 
 thin net of blood-vessels, following the fissures and wind- 
 ing into the very centre of the brain, and also pursues the 
 nerves, wherever they may go, always in attendance to 
 furnish the vital fluid, on which health, sensibility, and, 
 indeed, all the vital functions are forever depending. 
 
 STRUCTURE OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 The centre of the nervous system is the brain, within 
 the bones of the head, with the exception of that class 
 of animals, which, as it were, are the uniting links be- 
 tween the vegetable and animal kingdom; — the worms 
 are without it : fishes too, and amphibious reptiles have 
 scarcely a development of the nervous mass, entitling it 
 to the appellation of brain. We suppose, however, that 
 we are contemplating the human brain, a singular, but 
 splendidly constructed piece of mechanism, made up of 
 an infinite congeries of delicate cords, — and equally at- 
 tenuated blood vessels. 
 
 It was once thought that we had but one brain, but 
 modern discovery assures us that we possess four ! and that 
 two of them mutually cooperate, in function, with the 
 others. 
 
 There is no particular point where the brain can be 
 said to begin, nor a point, in fact, where it terminates. Let 
 the reader suppose that on the first joint of the neck, just 
 under the head, two large cords are lying, side by side : 
 entering the great natural opening of the skull, they are 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 157 
 
 subdivided into millions of threads, — portions of which 
 assume different forms, to which anatomists give specific 
 names, — as cruri, pons, &c. But as the threads are 
 merely subdivisions of the one cord, — the mystery is, at 
 first view, how comes such an increased quantity '? noth- 
 is more simple than an explanation. Admitting the fibres 
 to be indefinitely long, — the folding and refolding of one 
 upon another, in conjunction with an artery and vein — 
 there is no difficulty in giving an answer. For the evi- 
 dence of a fibrous structure, this infinite volume of threads, 
 we refer to the positive demonstration of the brain by the 
 late Dr Spurzheim. 
 
 Most of the organs are double, and it was highly neces- 
 sary that the brain should be so also. The great brain 
 cerebrum, in the upper part of the head and over the eyes, 
 is the immediate seat of intellect, and in halves; in 
 other words, there is one on each side, divided, above 
 from each other, in the middle, by a membrane. Under 
 this, in the lower and back part of the head, is the cere- 
 bellum, or little brain, belonging to the animal system, 
 and totally different in function from the other; this too, 
 is in two pieces. 
 
 Below the point on the neck bone on which the two 
 lateral cords, termed medulla oblonga, lie, extending with- 
 in the bones, the whole length of the spine or back-bone, 
 the same cords are seen — giving out, between the points, 
 ribs, &c, branches, — called spinal nerves. Those within 
 the chest take the name of thoracic nerves; — still lower, 
 between the ribs, intercostal , and still further down, be- 
 tween the bones of the back, the lumbar nerves. The 
 •limbs of a tree, shooting out from the trunk, precisely rep- 
 resent this part of the anatomy of the spinal marrow. 
 
 Let it be remembered, that, from the head to the termi- 
 nation of the spinal marrow, two cords, two brains, two 
 little brains, and two distinct sets of lateral nerves exist 
 14 
 
158 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 lying, however, in juxtaposition, intimately united by the 
 decussation of fibres, which run from one to the other. 
 
 This cerebral substance is so soft, that without its en- 
 veloping membranes, it would fall to pieces, by its own 
 weight. These membranes possess but a very slight de- 
 gree of sensibility ; — being of a mealy whiteness, and in 
 the skull possessing but little elasticity, though in the body 
 and limbs, this quality necessarily exists, or they would 
 become elongated and flaccid in the constant flexions of 
 the extremities. 
 
 Whilst this nervous matter preserves its vitality, it pre- 
 serves a slight degree of cohesion, but after death, it 
 speedily begins to decay, and ultimately melts down into 
 an oily fluid. As before remarked, the composition of the 
 pulp of the nerves and the brain, are precisely the same, 
 in appearance, in life, and chemical analysis conclusively 
 presents the same elements after death. 
 
 When wounded, even badly, the brain feels no pain, al- 
 though the very centre of sensation. It is not uncommon 
 for portions of the brain to escape through fractures of the 
 skull, and yet the person perfectly recover, and never suf- 
 fer, in any quality of his mind, from the loss of this impor- 
 tant corporal substance. 
 
 Let it here be recollected that all the nerves which go 
 from the head or spinal marrow, however much they may 
 be distributed within the muscles, invariably run towards 
 the surface of the body ; they do not, however, end in blunt 
 extremities under the skin, like the cut end of a twine; — 
 on the contrary, they are so infinitely subdivided, that the 
 single cord which we find between two points of the spine 
 may finally become a perfect brush, in the course of dis- 
 tribution, and lost in the masses of flesh through which 
 it travels, till it can no longer be recognised by the 
 naked eye. 
 
ANATOMICAL, CLASS BOOK 
 
 159 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 65. 
 
 S, the annular ligament which binds down the muscles and vessels 
 to the ankle bone, to keep them in place- i?, the extensor brevis 
 digitorum, which assists in extending the toes. Fig. 1, superficial 
 threads of the deepseated nerves of the leg and instep, emerging upon 
 the top, and losing themselves in the skin. Fig. 2, are long, but 
 superficial cutaneous branches of the tibial nerve, sent into the skin 
 and cellular membrane at the root of the toes and ball of the great 
 toe. The trunk, from which these twigs have their origin, originated 
 within the pelvis, yet, notwithstanding they were concealed, deep 
 in the flesh, the whole length of the limb, they finally make their 
 appearance at the surface. This figure, therefore, is designed to il- 
 lustrate the position maintained in the text, viz, that all the nerves 
 have a direction towards the external surface of the body. 
 
 THE MECHANISM OF THE NERVES. 
 
 As the brain, all experience proves, is the seat of intel- 
 lect, so also, incontestible evidence teaches us that the 
 nerves are parts which are susceptible of painful or pleas- 
 
 Fig. 65. 
 
 / 
 
1(30 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 urable sensations. Thus a piece of sugar is grateful to 
 the gustitory or tasting nerves of the tongue ; — but to- 
 bacco, before accustomed to its nauseating character, has 
 a directly opposite effect. Pressure on the sciatic or great 
 nerve of the leg, by sitting too long in one position, pro- 
 duces the disagreeable feeling, commonly called sleep in 
 the foot ; if, however, the attitude is not changed, to re- 
 lieve the pressure, a partial palsy of the limb must ensue. 
 
 Difficult as it is to ascertain precisely, the structure of 
 the inner substance of the nerves, it is reasonable to infer, 
 from analogy, as the substance is so exactly like that of 
 the brain, that they are constituted of a multitude of mi- 
 nute, soft, pulpy parallel cords. Instead of saying that the 
 nerves have their origin in the brain or spinal marrow, 
 they should be called the prolongations of the brain. Their 
 internal substance, both physically and chemically con- 
 sidered, presents the same results. They are the tenta- 
 cula3 of the brain, — analogous to the feelers of insects, 
 by which it takes cognizance of external things: — the 
 instruments of the will, and the ever faithful sentinels at 
 the outposts, giving the earliest and most certain intel- 
 ligence of whatever is of consequence to the safety and 
 well being of the individual. 
 
 If they possess an organization like the brain, or in fact, 
 are simply a prolongation of it, into the extremities of the 
 limbs, the question may be asked why they are not con- 
 scious, in their individual capacity — and why it is neces- 
 sary to make reference to the superior mass of the same 
 material, within the skull ? 
 
 In the very lowest orders of animals, such is the case, to 
 a certain extent: the worms are without brain, yet they 
 pursue unvarying instinctive actions, and avoid enemies 
 or caress friends, with as much certainty as those pos- 
 sessing a well marked one. 
 
 Nothing can be more perplexing, than the nerves, being 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 JG! 
 
 of all sizes, from a quarter of an inch in diameter, to hair- 
 like threads, invisible to the naked eye. 
 
 Certain it is, that this apparent confusion presents the 
 same appearance in all animals of the same species : 
 
 Fig. 66. 
 
 14 * 
 
162 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 66. 
 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 A. Pectoral muscle. 
 
 B. Detoid muscle. 
 
 C. Latissimus dorsi muscle. 
 
 D. Serratus major anticus muscle. 
 
 E. Biceps Flexor Brachii. 
 
 F. Round tendon of the biceps, crossing (he elbow joint. 
 
 G. The broad expansion of the biceps, shooting into the fassia of 
 the fore arm. 
 
 H. Triceps extensor muscle. 
 
 I. Bracheus internus muscle, an auxiliary to the biceps. 
 
 K. Coraco Bruchialis muscle, an assistant to the deltuides. 
 
 L. Supinator Brevis muscle, turns the palm of the hand and fore 
 arm foi ward. 
 
 M. Supinator Inngus, operates in unison with the brevis. 
 
 N. Extensor Radialis Longior, extends the fore arm. 
 
 O. Many flexor muscles of the fingers, all arising from one point. 
 
 P. j Flexor digitorum profundis, bends the joint of the fingers. 
 
 R. Annular ligament of the wrist, bending the tendons in a 
 groove. 
 
 S. Short muscles, forming the hall of the thumb. 
 
 T. Flexor and abductor muscles of the little finger. 
 
 N e r v e s . 
 
 1. 1. Radial nerve. 
 
 2. 2. Ulnar do. 
 
 3. External cutaneous nerve. 
 
 4. Muscular spiral nerve; supplies the flesh on the back side of 
 the arm and skin. 
 
 5. A communicating twig. 
 
 6. Articular nerve, round the joint. 
 
 7. Internal cutaneous, supplies the skin under side of the arm. 
 
 8. External cutaneous, again; passing through a muscle, and 
 then becoming a cutaneous nerve. 
 
 9. Bl anch of the external, going to the back of the thumb. 
 
 10. Muscular spiral nerve. 
 
 11. A branch of the external cutaneous. 
 
 12. The radial nerve. } 
 
 , o m i > duierent views. 
 
 13. I he ulnar nerve, j 
 
 14. A branch of the ulnar, to the back of the hand. 
 
 15. Distribution of the radial nerve to the thumb, fore finger, 
 middle and one side of the ring finger. 
 
 16. Distribution of the ulnar nerve to the other side of the ring, 
 and both sides of the little finger. 
 
 N. B. We have exhibited in this plate a mass of muscles and nerves, 
 that the reader may have some idea of the complex machinery ne- 
 cessary to the perfection of only one single limb. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 163 
 
 wherever there is a twig in one body, leading to an organ, 
 precisely such another, fulfilling exactly the same office, 
 may be demonstrated in another : a curious illustration of 
 this remark is strikingly manifested in the nerves of the 
 human hand. 
 
 The arteries are not invariably constant, or undeviating 
 travellers of a particular muscle. With the nerves, the 
 case is altered : — they are constant, as it respects the 
 origin, course and ultimate distribution — go where they 
 may, a precise number of branches are required, to be dis- 
 tributed to every portion and piece in which a blood ves- 
 sel enters. Usually, the deep seated nerves accompany 
 the arteries ; and the nerves of the skin keep in the track 
 of the superficial veins. 
 
 Though the nerves are small, and uninfluenced by voli- 
 tion, exact order is preserved, or the same effects could 
 not be produced in two individuals, from the same causes. 
 
 Without nerves, there could be no sensation : — with- 
 out them, neither painful or pleasurable emotions would 
 be recognised ; without them, organized beings would 
 be completely motionless, without locomotion, and with- 
 out perception or consciousness. 
 
 It matters not how perfectly the muscles are developed, 
 or advantageously arranged, if there were no mode of sub- 
 jecting them to the influence of the brain, — they would 
 be of no kind of consequence. 
 
 Were the nerves in the wrist divided, the ability to 
 clench the fingers would be lost ; nor can it be recovered, 
 unless a re-union of the divided portions can be effected. 
 These are the voluntary nerves. 
 
 Those denominated involuntary , administering to the 
 involuntary muscles, are equally important to the hidden 
 regions in which they are found. W r hen the breathing 
 nerve of the diaphragm is separated, the midrif no longer 
 renders assistance in respiration. The muscles of the 
 
164 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 chest are compelled to carry on the process of breathing 
 entirely alone. By dividing minute twigs, as they creep 
 into the vocal box of a dog, the muscles are paralyzed, 
 and the animal can never afterwards bark. 
 
 Digestion in the stomach may be interrupted by cutting 
 the main trunks of the nerves. Even the functions of the 
 liver and kidneys might be checked in the same way, 
 were it possible to reach the nerves going to them, with- 
 out violence. 
 
 Notwithstanding the heart is kept in continual nuiotio 
 by the presence of the blood, if its nerves were separa- 
 ted, so that the communication were interrupted with the 
 brain and spinal marrow, it would cease to pulsate, though 
 its irritability, an original endowment of the muscle, 
 might remain a considerable time. And still further, a 
 wound or compression of the spinal marrow completely 
 paralyzes the whole body, — which, if not speedily re- 
 lieved, ends in death. 
 
 For the sake of method, anatomists have made a regu- 
 lar classification of the nerves: — 
 
 From the brain, there are nine pair — a majority of 
 which are the nerves of sense; — in other words, they 
 are expended on the organs of sense, as the ear, eye, nose, 
 and tongue. 
 
 Issuing from between the bones of the neck, there are 
 eight pair, — from between the joints of the spine, 
 twelve ; — from the loins, five pair more ; — and the 
 sacrum or last bone of the vertebral column, five more, — 
 making a total of thirty-nine sets of nerves, from the 
 brain and spinal cord. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 165 
 
 Fig. 67. 
 
166 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 67. 
 
 A A. Cerebrum, or brain. 
 
 B B. Cerebellum , or little brain. 
 
 C C. Crurd Cerebri, or union of the fibres of the brain. 
 
 D D. Crura Cerebelli, union of the two sides of the little brain. 
 
 E E E. Spinal marrow. 
 
 1 1. Branches of the 5th of nerves, so often noticed in this work. 
 
 2 2. Branches of the sub-occipital nerves. 
 
 3 3. Branches of (he four inferior cervical nerves, and the first 
 dorsal, forming the axillary plexus, from whence all the nerves of 
 the arm and fingers have their origin. 
 
 4 4 4 4. Branches of the dorsal nerves. 
 
 5 5. Lumbar nerves. 
 
 6 6. Sacral nerves. 
 
 THIRTY PAIR OF SPINAL NERVES. 
 
 These are first divided into Eight pair of Cervical, 
 coming out between the bones of t he neck, on either side, 
 from the spinal marrow, — to be distributed to the muscles. 
 
 Twelve, pair of Dorsal, — in like manner, coming out 
 between the dorsal vertebrae of the back. 
 
 Five pair of Lumbar, — from between the lumbar or 
 joints of the loins. 
 
 Five pair of Sacral, — being a branch or termination 
 of the spinal marrow in the os sacrum. Several cords, 
 coming through the several openings, unite to form the 
 great sciatic nerve of the leg. 
 
 Another circumstance should not be lost sight of in 
 this general survey of these organs — viz., the well estab- 
 lished fact, that two threads may arise from the same root, 
 and yet they sustain widely different offices in the econo- 
 my : one may contribute to the contraction of a muscle, 
 while the other carries the mandate for its relaxation. 
 
 We are warranted in believing, that even in a minute 
 nerve, which appears a single cord, that a number of dis- 
 tinct parallel filaments are lying side by side, enveloped 
 in the same tissue, whose functions are widely different 
 from each other. 
 
 Of the nine pair of nerves from the brain, let us pursue 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 167 
 
 them to their ultimate destination, not, however, with the 
 vain expectation of ascertaining how it is that they exert 
 an influence, but simply to contemplate the broad chart of 
 sympathies which is thus spread for distributing and con- 
 trolling that vitality which is so essential to order, to con- 
 sciousness and to physical perfectibility. 
 
 First — the olfactory nerves, taking their rise in the 
 brain, having gone but little way within the skull, arrive 
 at the top of the nose, where they suddenly divide into in- 
 numerable hair drawn threads, which are lost in the lining 
 membrane of the nose. 
 
 The second, are the optic — expanding, when they 
 have penetrated the globe of the eye, through the back 
 side, into a thin web — properly named the retina, which 
 is the seat of vision. 
 
 In this instance, arising from the same substance as 
 the olfactory to all human appearance, is a nerve which 
 can only be influenced by the presence of light. 
 
 When the nervous system is agitated by disease, even 
 in the darkest apartment, the participation which the 
 optic nerve has with the diseased action of the whole, pro- 
 duces the sensation of vision, and nothing else. If it can- 
 not be the bearer of this one item of intelligence, it can 
 do nothing at all. If anot her sensation is to be conducted 
 to the mind, — even if it relates to a moat on the face of 
 the eye, another set of nerves, entirely independent of the 
 optic, must be the bearers. There is no property in com- 
 mon ; no relationship allowing the one to perform the func- 
 tions of the other ; yet they both seem to possess the same 
 general structure, the same component parts, and have an 
 origin from the same fountain-head, and depend for their 
 vitality upon the same circulation. 
 
 The third nerve is generally distributed to the muscles 
 of the eye, to give guidance to several of them. 
 
 Further — the fourth nerve, arising from the brain, 
 
168 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 long, slender, and hair-like, is dispensed altogether upon 
 one muscle, the one which rolls the eye downward towards 
 the shoulder. 
 
 The fifth nerve is the most intricate to understand. 
 Lying almost in contact with the great artery of the brain, 
 in the base of the skull, the single cord spreads itself out 
 into the form of a reddish, fleshy pad, from which three 
 distinct cords, all distinguished for their size have an 
 origin. One of the three darts towards the eye, where it 
 commingles with those we have been describing. The 
 second branch, creeps through an orifice, and having 
 reached the back part of the upper jaw, sends on a lash 
 of fine lines, which find an entrance into the substance of 
 the bones, and there furnishes the root of each tooth with 
 one of them. 
 
 Fig. 68. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 6S. 
 
 This plato will give some general idea of the intricacy of the 
 nerves about the face ; the most difficult part of the neurology of the 
 head is concealed by the bones, though we have adverted to the in- 
 dividual nerves, which have their origin in the brain. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 169 
 
 2. The optic nerve, nerve of vision, second in the order. 
 
 3. Motor oculi, or third pair, arising from the brain. 
 
 4. Trochlearis, fourth pair. 
 
 5. Trigemini, with its three great branches, spoken of in the text. 
 
 A. First division of the 5th nerve, called the opthalmic branch, 
 
 which divides again into — 
 
 13. C The Frontal nerve. 
 
 C. < The Lachrymal nerve. 
 
 D. (Thd Nasal nerve. 
 
 E. Second division of the fifth nerve. 
 
 F. That branch of it going to the teeth and skin of the upper jaw. 
 
 G. A ganglion. 
 
 II. Branches going to the palate and throat. 
 
 I. Videan nerve. 
 
 6. Sixth nerve of the brain. 
 
 K. Origin of the Great Sympathetic Nerve, spoken of in the text. 
 
 L. Its additional organ, from the Videan nerve. 
 
 M. Superior or first ganglion of the Sympathetic nerve. 
 
 N. Th ird division of the fifth nerve. 
 
 O. First division of the third branch of the fifth nerve, going to the 
 tongue ; this nerve is the organ of taste. 
 
 P. A branch of the Gustatory , or tasting nerve, going to the ear 
 and crossing the drum. 
 
 Q. That division of the fifth nerve, which supplies the teeth of the 
 under jaw, and finally comes out on the chin, to supply the muscles 
 of expression. 
 
 7. Seventh pair of nerves from the brain, or. auditory, being the 
 nerve of hearing. 
 
 Perhaps, with all our care, the reader will scarcely understand 
 the scheme which has here been presented. It is not our object to 
 be so minute as to weary, and yet we desire to be sufficiently par- 
 ticular to be useful. 
 
 The third branch makes its way out of the head, and 
 directs its course to the inner side of the angle of the under 
 jaw, where it enters a smooth canal, and in like manner 
 furnishes each of the fangs of the under teeth with a mi- 
 nute nerve. 
 
 A recollection of the origin of the dental nerves, will 
 explain the reason why a sound tooth, in the opposite jaw, 
 sympathizes with the pain of a diseased one. 
 
 To the eye again the sixth nerve goes. Such a liberal 
 supply of nervous influence as is thus given to this one 
 organ, argues very clearly its importance. In no other 
 portion of the machine is there a parallel distribution of 
 nerves. 
 
 15 
 
170 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 The seventh is a double nerve : — two cords, quite in 
 contact, the one hard and tile other soft, strike the extremity 
 of that portion of the temporal bone, within the skull, con- 
 taining the beautiful apparatus of the ear. One of them 
 is expended upon the inside, and is the acoustic nerve : 
 the other pays no regard to the ear, but, working through 
 the solid bones, shows itself on the cheek, very near the 
 middle of the external ear. 
 
 What circumstance of organization prepares these 
 nerves, arising, if not at the same point, at least from the 
 same mass, for performing such opposite functions, as 
 hearing and feeling, must long remain an inexplicable 
 paradox. 
 
 Still further in the series, comes the eighth pair, or par 
 vagutn — sliding out at the base of the skull, in company 
 with the internal jugular vein. Coursing down the side 
 of the neck, it dips into the chest, running through its 
 whole extent, and finally shows itself in the cavity of the 
 abdomen. From its first exit from the brain, it drops off 
 twig after twig, nearly at right angles, for the superficial 
 muscles on the throat, and the vocal tube ; to the larynx; 
 to the wind-pipe; the lobes of the lungs on either side; 
 to the heart ; the great blood-vessel of the body ; to 
 the stomach, liver, spleen, kidneys; and to all appear- 
 ance, neglects no viscera in any of the great cavities. No 
 other nerve, but the sympathetic, seems to have such exten- 
 sive relations, nor is any one of more consequence to or- 
 ganic life. 
 
 Reflect, for a moment, on the extraordinary offices of this 
 one nerve. Both vessels and muscles on its first appear- 
 ance, mutually depend upon its influence. Next, a class 
 of involuntary muscles within the vocal box, cannot be 
 varied in their contractions without its presence. Even 
 the vibration of the vocal cords, the instruments of voice, 
 would be unserviceable without it : the lungs would faul- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 171 
 
 ter — the stomach become idle — the liver rebel — the 
 intestinal mechanism stop — and a universal failure of 
 all the vital apparatus would inevitably ensue. 
 
 One more — the ninth — the lingual nerve , closes the 
 series from the brain. Without it there would be no 
 ability for moving the tongue. 
 
 Let us re-examine the scheme of the nerves arising 
 from the spinal marrow. 
 
 That prolongation of the brain, which lies in the canal 
 of the spine, gives out two sets of nerves, as from the two 
 sides of the brain, but vastly larger in size. Besides be- 
 ing large, several of them unite together, so closely, that 
 it is really difficult to separate them, for the purpose, it is 
 supposed, of establishing a wide circle of sympathies, and 
 a combination of influence upon the muscles. Notwith- 
 standing the apparent confusion, the most exact order is 
 maintained. 
 
 No man has been competent to an explanation of this 
 complex mechanism. Though emanating from a condens- 
 ed part of the brain, in which the intellectual operations 
 are not admitted to be in force, a class of nerves have an 
 origin, which are under the most complete subjection to 
 another portion of the same substance. So it is in re- 
 spect to all the dorsal, lumbar and sacral nerves. 
 
172 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 69. 
 
 This plan shows the distribution of some ol the nerves of the arm. 
 
 a a. Tire cephalic vein, running between the pectoralis rpajor and 
 deltoid muscle. 
 
 6. The basilic vein. 
 
 c. The vena rnediana longa, sending off. 
 
 d. The median basilic vein. 
 
 e. The median cephalic vein. 
 
 /. The internal cutaneous nerve. 
 
 g. The external muscular cutaneous nerve. 
 
 h. A lymphatic gland. 
 
 i. The fasica covering the muscles of the upper arm. 
 
 k. The pectoralis major. 
 
 l. The deltoid muscle. 
 
 These considerations are curious in themselves, and in 
 the mechanic, the scholar, and the philosopher, excite an 
 ardent desire fo comprehend the reason for the one, and 
 the cause of the other. All the boasted and lofty preten- 
 sions of philosophy are inadequate to the solution of these 
 problems in the laws of the animal economy. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 173 
 
 GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 
 
 As a point of union between the nerves of the brain 
 and those of the spinal marrow, — to maintain a sympathy 
 of connexion between the voluntary and involuntary or- 
 gans, is interposed the sympathetic nerve, which traverses 
 the whole extent of the chest and abdomen, sending fibres 
 in all directions, to every viscus in the body. Thus, by 
 this one nerve, a mutual dependence is preserved among 
 all the various portions of the living system. 
 
 Nerves are certainly the organs of our senses. How, 
 by the application of bodies to the different parts, a sensa- 
 tion is produced, will never, we fear, be clearly explained, 
 nor can we account, for a corresponding change in the 
 brain, to produce an idea. Neither is it known how sen- 
 sation is conveyed by the nerves to the brain. 
 
 Sensation is a property peculiar to the nervous fibre, as 
 irritability is to the muscle. 
 
 15 * 
 
174 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Q U E STIONS. 
 
 Is the brain a solid mass, within the skull ? 
 
 How is it divided ? 
 
 What are the hemispheres of the brain ? 
 
 What do you understand by the lobes of the brain ? 
 
 How many coats, or coverings has the brain ? 
 
 Where is the little brain or cerebellum found ? 
 
 Where is the spinal marrow ? 
 
 What is the use of the spinal marrow ? 
 
 Where do the nerves of sense arise ? 
 
 How many nerves arise from the brain P 
 How are the nerves protected ? 
 
 How many nerves arise from the spinal marrow ? 
 
 How are they classified P 
 
 How are external sensations conveyed to the brain ? 
 
 Where is the optic nerve found? 
 
 Where are the olfactory nerves ? 
 
 Are there cavities in the substance of the brain ? 
 
 What are the cavities called ? 
 
 What is the supposed use of those cavities ? 
 
 What is the consequence of dividing a nerve ? 
 
 Which is the seat of intellect, the large or small brain? 
 Can the brain be wounded with impunity ? 
 
 How does the sympathetic dilfer from other nerves ? 
 
 What is neurology ? 
 
 Is there a correspondence in the structure of the brain and 
 nerve ? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 175 
 
 THE SENSES. 
 
 The senses are divided into internal and external. The 
 internal are ideas, which the mind forms — and may be 
 produced by the agency of the external senses, or other- 
 wise excited, as memory, imagination, conscience, and the 
 passions. 
 
 EXTERNAL SENSES. 
 
 Hearing, Seeing, Feeling, Smelling, and Tasting. 
 
 THE EAR. 
 
 The ear, that organ by which we are made sensible of 
 the impression of sound, is a very complicated instrument, 
 and a beautiful piece of mechanism. 
 
 It is a curious circumstance in the economy of organized 
 beings, that the central portion of the human ear, termed 
 the saculus vest ib n li, hereafter to be described, is the basis 
 of the apparatus of hearing in all animals, with the excep- 
 tion of insects, but becoming more and more complex as 
 inferior grades approximate the physical perfectability of 
 man. 
 
 Sound being a vibratory motion of the air, first put in 
 motion by a solid body, is collected by the ear, as the pul- 
 
176 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 sations travel onward, and transmitted directly to the au- 
 ditory nerve.* 
 
 Those beings only, which are denominated locomotive, 
 having the power of moving themselves from one place to 
 another, have an ear. Without this sense, of such vast 
 importance to man, inferior tribes would be constantly ex- 
 posed to dangers and even destruction. Nature has not 
 been neglectful in granting the necessary means of hap- 
 piness to every being, in proportion to its wants in the 
 sphere in which it is destined to live; nor partial to man, 
 in the development of all his senses, to the exclusion of 
 other animals, whose physical propensities, necessities and 
 circumstances are of as much importance to them, in the 
 scale of existence, as his own. 
 
 EXTERNAL EAR.* 
 
 That appendage termed auricula, 'pinna or external ear, 
 divested of the skin, is a thin, delicate piece of cartilage, 
 quite elastic, and bearing some resemblance, in this re- 
 spect, to parchment. On its outer surface, it is concave, 
 but thrown into deep semicircular grooves, which termi- 
 nate in one large dish, surrounding the canal that enters 
 the bones, called concha, because it resembles a shell. 
 The lines or eminences, lying between the furrows, have 
 definite names, as helix, antihelix, tragus and antitragus, 
 and lastly, the fat pendulous portion, on the under edge of 
 the ear, — in which trinkets are worn, in civilized society, 
 in humble imitation of genuine savage life, — the lubus. 
 
 * The antenna; of insects are considered the only organs that con- 
 vey a sensation analogous to hearing. By the vibrations communi- 
 cated to the body, through these, they are probably made suscepti- 
 ble of simple sonorous impressions. 
 
 So called from aura , ah. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 177 
 
 Fig. 70. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 70. 
 
 This is a well marked ear of 
 a man, drawn from life, 
 o to e — The helix, forming 
 the rim. 
 
 a - — The upper end or com- 
 mencement of the rim, slop- 
 ing into the concha. 
 b — Part of the edge lost in 
 the face. 
 
 c, d — Prominent from the 
 head. 
 
 e — The fold terminating in 
 the lobule of the ear. 
 f to m — The antihelix. 
 f,g — The upper end divid- 
 ed into two ridges, — h the 
 union of them, — f and g. 
 i, k - — lower end of the anti- 
 helix, continued at i into 
 the concha, and at k into 
 
 the antitragus. 
 
 I — The tragus covering the entrance to the ear — like a post at 
 the corner of a street, to prevent sudden injury. 
 m intitragus. 
 
 n — Lobe of the ear, usually bored. 
 
 o, o — Furrow between the helix and antihelix. 
 
 p — The boat like depression between the lines of the antihelix. 
 
 x — The concha. 
 
 r — The beginning of the meatus auditorious, or canal. 
 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 Although in the human species there are muscles which 
 seem at first sight to have been designed for moving the 
 ear in different directions, their office is expressly to keep 
 it tense, — equally on the stretch at all points, to increase 
 its vibratory property. Occasionally, individuals are seen 
 who have such development of the muscles, as to be able 
 to move their ears at pleasure. Wags and buffoons are 
 sometimes expert in the exercise. There are three of 
 these muscles. 
 
178 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 71. 
 
 In this plate is represented the muscles peculiar to the external 
 ear. a, d, e, the cartilage of the ear, as seen on that side looking 
 towards the head. 
 
 The attolens aurem, or lifter up of the ear, marked l, in, shows 
 where it becomes tendinous on the bones of the head, o, p, attach- 
 ed to prominences 
 
 g to t the anterior auris, placed between the face and ear. q, r. 
 the portion of it connected to the muscle of the forehead, growing 
 narrower at s, and inserted into (he helix at t. 
 
 u, z Two muscles, or rather, two portions of one, retrahentes au- 
 rum, to draw the ear hack from the face. 
 
 u, v, w,x, The upper or larger portion, consisting of fleshy 
 fibres, u, v , w. 
 
 y, z, The inferior portion of the same muscle. 
 
 All such animals as keep their ears habitually erect, as 
 the fox, lynx, cat, horse, ox, ass, and various species of 
 the dog, maintain them in that position by the strength of 
 the muscles, which are under the control of the will. 
 
 It is necessary for safety on the one hand, or success in 
 seizing prey, by surprise, on the other, for the animal to 
 have a distinct auricular perception, accompanied by a 
 nice sense of smell. By remaining perfectly quiet, the 
 ears are directed to and fro, as circumstances may require, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 179 
 
 to receive, most favorably and forcibly the sonorous rays, — 
 without being obliged to move the head.* Elephants, 
 hounds, besides an almost endless catalogue of mammalia, 
 have pendulous ears, as though the design was to defend 
 the orifice ; — in these examples, the muscles are small, as 
 they are in man. 
 
 Birds have but a slight rim, approaching in outline, the 
 pinna : lizards, of which there are about forty varieties, 
 serpents and other reptiles, have nothing externally re- 
 sembling an ear : in some, it is difficult, on close examin- 
 ation, to discover the precise spot where the ear is located. 
 Fishes are also destitute of an external organ ; and yet all 
 these families, including the amphibious, as frogs, turtles 
 and the like, have a beautifully constructed internal ear, as 
 remarkable, so far as a mechanical arrangement of parts is 
 concerned, in conveying the pulsation of sound, as that 
 of the most favored musician. 
 
 EAR TUBE.f 
 
 When the temporal or side bone of the head, contain- 
 ing, entirely, the internal ear, is carefully sawed in twain, 
 the canal, of which we are speaking, will be found about 
 three quarters of an inch in length, and somewhat con- 
 tracted towards its inner extremity — and, on an average, 
 a little less than a quarter of an inch in diameter. This 
 passage is a gentle curve, as the tube, from the external 
 opening, rises upward ; but at half its length, turns down- 
 ward again, and there bulges out in shape, something like 
 
 * It is a favorite opinion of the author, that an ear trumpet for deaf 
 people, instead of being like the funnel of a common bugle, should 
 have a broad plate, grooved, and indeed, wrought in exact imitation 
 of the external human ear, it being certain that this is the best mode 
 of directing sound into the head, or nature would have constructed 
 it differently, 
 
 t In books, termed the Meatus uuditorius externus , — simply 
 meaning the external passage to the inner cavities. 
 
180 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 the bowl of a spoon. A delicate rim, like a moulding-, 
 rises on the edge of this expanded mouth, for sustaining 
 the drum head, soon to be noticed, very much like the 
 method of nailing a hoop within the mouth of a barrel, 
 near the chime, to keep the head from falling in. To af- 
 ford greater surface, that the drum head may be consider- 
 ably larger than the extremity of the tube would allow, 
 were it stretched perpendicularly across, it is sloped, so 
 that it requires an oval cover, under such circumstances, 
 very much larger than if it were round, and fitted to the 
 square end of the pipe. AH this may be examined in the 
 temporal bone of a horse, sheep or dog’s skull, as they are 
 found bleaching in the fields. In these animals the re- 
 semblance to the human ear is particularly striking. The 
 common skin of the face is carried within the tube, for its 
 lining, but perforated in numerous places, by the ducts of 
 delicate little bags, lying between the bone and skin, which 
 are constantly secreting and pouring out a bitter, nause- 
 ous wax. The object of this excretion is twofold, viz. 
 first, to keep the lining moist and pliable," and secondly, 
 to kill insects that may intrude there.* Crossing this canal 
 from the sides, are strong short hairs, intersecting each 
 other in such a manner, that an insect must overcome the 
 resistance of those pikes, or chevaux de frise, in case the 
 wax t does not arrest its progress, before reaching the 
 
 *Ear wax is certain death to insects that feed upon it; though its 
 composition is such, that they cannot restrain their appetites when 
 pent up where it is. Naturalists have taken a hint from this, to 
 prevent ihe depredations of vermin on dried preparations in cabinets, 
 by washing them in decoctions of aloes orolher vegetable bitters. 
 
 t At birth the tube is filled with a thick mucus, which, in some 
 children, unless speedily removed, forms a cake of hard wax, com- 
 pletely closing it; and by the time the arliculative organs are devel- 
 oped, the child is actually, deaf and dumb. There seems to boa 
 peculiar predisposition to this in some families. In others, children 
 after having once talked, lose their hearing at four or five years o t 
 age, and become permanently deaf and dumb. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 181 
 
 drum head, where its peregrinations are impassably lim- 
 ited.* 
 
 Fig. 72. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 72. 
 This has been an exceedingly 
 difficult plan to execute, so as to 
 give the exact relation of parts ; 
 hence it is very much foreshort- 
 ened. 
 
 c tod, — cc, the meatus extcr- 
 nus, as it appears, taken from 
 the bone ; b, c, its two cur- 
 vatures ; — the first e; the 
 second c : — dd, the oblique slant, 
 like a spoon bowl, at the in- 
 ner end, covered by the drum 
 head, spoken of in the text. 
 
 e — The membrana tympani, 
 stretched on its bony hoop, bulg- 
 ing inward. 
 
 The remaining parts, beyond 
 the boundary of the membrane, 
 remain to be described, although represented here for the sake of 
 keeping up the connexion of parts in the mind. 
 
 f,g,h, — The malleus; f its handle; gits long handle; h the 
 head or bulb. 
 
 i, k, — inchus, or anvil ; i short, and k, long processes, m stapes. 
 V,H,A ,m,n,p, — The labyrinth ; n, p, the cochlea, n, the be- 
 ginning, p, termination, in, the vestibulum.f 
 
 * When the glands are diseased in consequence of a chronic in- 
 flammation, a thin, purulent discharge takes place, giving the indi- 
 vidual, in some instances, trouble, inconvenience, and pain through 
 life. I have seen a skull, in which the entire tube, on one side was 
 closed up by a deposition of bone. The opposite ear was partially 
 diseased in the same manner, but the peculiar circumstances of the 
 case, while the person was alive, could not be ascertained. 
 
 t I have found considerable difficulty in demonstrating this organ, 
 without very large models : — one now in my cabinet, made of wood, 
 magnifies the internal ear three feet, which can be seen and under- 
 stood at a distance in a large hall. Formerly, when I taught anato- 
 my in a Medical Institution, it was customary to suppose the col- 
 lege an ear, and thus illustrate its intricacies by constant reference 
 to the apartments and passage ways of that edifice. Instructors will 
 derive great advantage from a similar course — by considering the 
 school house, when explaining the organ to their pupils, — the in- 
 ternal ear, and the front door the drum. 
 
 16 
 
182 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 THE DRUM, OR MEMBRANA TYMPANI.* 
 
 From the foregoing description of the canal, the exact 
 locality of the drum head will be understood. Fitted to 
 the rim of bone, in a manner similar to the parchment 
 over the barrel of a snare drum, — it is kept perfectly tense, 
 but by an arrangement of the fibres peculiar to its organ- 
 ization. It is oval, and somewhat concave outwardly, and 
 so transparent, that objects can be seen through it, being 
 of the color of white oiled paper; any person of common 
 ingenuity, can dissect this beautiful membrane in the head 
 of a dead fowl, with the point of a knife. It then presents 
 a striking resemblance to a battledoor. This closes up 
 the extremity of the tube, in a healthy ear ; notwithstand- 
 ing, it is frequently ruptured by the firing of heavy guns, 
 inflammation, and other accidents, without producing deaf- 
 ness. Across this drum, a fine thread of a nerve is drawn, 
 called corda tympani, which gives it the requisite sensi- 
 bility and connexion with the system. When a pin-head 
 is introduced far enough to touch the drum head, an ex- 
 quisitely acute pain is the consequence, from pressing this 
 nerve. 
 
 We have seen men with the membranes ruptured on 
 both sides, which was inferred from the fact, that in smok- 
 ing, they puffed the fumes, for amusement, out at their 
 ears; — yet the sense of hearing, did not appear impaired. 
 The rationale of this will be subsequently explained. The 
 deafness of old people might in some instances be allevi- 
 ated by puncturing the membrane, which, by age, has 
 become thickened and inelastic. 
 
 * Lobsters, crabs, and, in fact, all that remarkable class of animals, 
 whose skeletons are outside of the body, in the form of a shell, have 
 their ears placed at the extremities of projecting points. The lob- 
 ster’s can be detected at the end of a short stump, near the root of 
 the long feelers ; — it consists of a perforated bony stump, having a 
 membrane stretched over it, — covering a drop of fluid, in which 
 floats the auditory nerve. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 1S3 
 
 No one can be in doubt as respects the office of this 
 membrane : it receives the sonorous rays — having a broad 
 surface, and being on the stretch, is put in vibratory mo- 
 tion by the slightest pulsations in the air, — which it 
 transmits to the still more important apparatus within. 
 
 We have remarked that reptiles and fishes have no dis- 
 cernible external orifice : — the external surface appears 
 smooth, as though they were destitute of this sense. Un- 
 der the skin, however, and in the bone answering to the 
 temporal one in man, there is a round hole, — growing 
 larger within. This cavity is the tympanum or drum bar- 
 rel — answering to the apartment beyond the drum head, 
 in men and quadrupeds. The common skin which is thus 
 drawn over the mouth of the tympanum, acts precisely as 
 the drum head does, — vibrating to the least noise, with 
 exceeding nicety. In the economy of reptiles — those 
 scavengers of the earth, created to wallow in filth — at 
 the threshold of organic life, an external opening would be 
 soon destroyed, by being filled with mud, gravel or insects. 
 The skin over the frog’s ear and the camelion is very 
 dense, shining and tremulous. Frogs, particularly, have 
 a splendid circular piece of skin over the tympanum, just 
 back of their large prominent eyes. There is a necessi- 
 ty for uncommon delicacy, in their case, as their ear is 
 constructed for hearing with equal precision in water as 
 well as air.* 
 
 * In that class of serpents which are covered with scales, the ex- 
 ternal contrivance of a tense skin over the internal ear, is far infe- 
 rior to the frog or lizard’s : — to the underside of a cluster of thin 
 scales, wedged in the loose skin, a slender bone, in figure like the 
 pestle of a mortar, runs into the tube, towards the brain, and plays 
 into the fenestra ovalis. 
 
 All the variety of serpents are distinguished for their delicacy 
 in the perception of sound. The boa family, particularly, are 
 those which exhibit the most satisfaction in music. The writer 
 has carefully examined a boa constrictor , which when fully grown, 
 is horrible to the sight, that was inattentive to sounds, except when 
 hungry. At such times, the scratch of a pin against the wall, 
 
184 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 INTERNAL EAR. 
 
 All parts beyond the drum-head, are collectively called 
 the labyrinth, in consequence, probably, of their intri- 
 cacy. 
 
 To understand the arrangement of the apartments to 
 which the reader is now to be introduced, requires pa- 
 tience, as well as close observation, or the mechanism 
 cannot be comprehended. First the 
 
 DRUM-BARREL, OR TYMPANUM. 
 
 Directly behind the membrane is a small room, of the ca- 
 pacity of a common white bean. Its name is derived from a 
 word, meaning a drum, as it is one in office, but having, 
 instead of one head like the kettle or two as in the snare 
 drum, it has three heads; — the largest of which is 
 towards the outer ear, — while at the other end of the 
 barrel, are two little ones. 
 
 Three distinct apartments, one beyond the other, which 
 in anatomical works, have further minute subdivisions, 
 collectively make up the labyrinth. First, the tympanum, 
 just adverted to ; secondly, the vestibule ; and thirdly, the 
 cochlea. In connexion with these are certain tubes, hav- 
 ing sundry barbarous, unintelligible names. 
 
 Behind the ear, a hard knob of bone may be felt, with 
 the finger, (mastoid process) on which that muscle is fast- 
 ened, which, with its fellow on the opposite side, brings 
 the head forward ; within, it is hollow — being full of con- 
 
 roused the monster to unceasing watchfulness. The ear of the land 
 tortoise, and the rattlesnake, do not differ as much as the physiolo- 
 gist might at first suppose — though in the water turtle, constituted 
 for hearing alternately in air and water, there is a perceptible differ- 
 ence. In the first a single bone is found; while in the latter, in 
 addition to the bone, there are fine chalky particles, which move 
 against each other, to propagate the motion or noise in the water, to 
 the ramifications of the nerve. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 185 
 
 ical cells resembling the spokes of a wheel, growing small- 
 er as they unite in one pipe, which opens into the drum 
 barrel. Physiologists agree that the use of these cells is 
 for reverberating sound, that it may gain strength by being 
 reflected from wall to wall, in order to excite a stronger 
 sensation when conveyed to the nerve : these are partic- 
 ularly large in some animals.* A similar piece of me- 
 chanism is discoverable in the cheek bones, and even the 
 centre bone of the skull, for reverberating and strengthen- 
 ing the voice. Lions have large cavities in the bones of 
 their heads and faces, on purpose to increase the intensity 
 of the vibrations ; — hence their characteristic roar. 
 
 In another direction, is the minute orifice of a cone- 
 shaped pipe, eustachian iube, that opens with a trumpet- 
 like extremity in the mouth, — it being necessary to the 
 free vibration of the drum head, that the same quality of 
 air that transmits the sonorous pulsations, should also exist 
 on the opposite side, within the barrel : the use of the 
 eustachian tube, (so called from Eustachias, the discover- 
 er) is to admit it. Nothing, therefore, is more completely 
 an imitation of the tympanum of the ear, than the martial 
 drum, which has a little hole in the side, equivalent to this 
 we are describing, descending to the mouth, the nearest 
 point from which atmospheric air could be taken, without 
 disarranging or disturbing the functions of other organs. 
 By closing the sounding hole of the drum, the music is 
 less audible — sounding, when the air inside becomes rare- 
 fied, like music in a well. The reason is, the equal bal- 
 ance of air is destroyed : — such is the object and office 
 
 * In a letter from the venerable Dr James Thatcher, of Ply- 
 mouth, the following curious fact is related: 
 
 ‘ Reflection of Sound. — A gentleman told me, to-day, (May 3d, 
 1331,) that a few days since, he was passing through one of our 
 streets where there were considerable intervals between the houses, 
 a gentleman totally blind, walking with him, assured him that he 
 knew exactly when he was passing a building, by a peculiar sensa- 
 tion in his ears, occasioned by a different concussion of the air.’ 
 
 16 * 
 
186 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 of the eustachian tube. Sometimes, in violent sneezing, 
 or sudden cough, the patulous mouths get stopped for an 
 instant with saliva ; and many readers are probably famil- 
 iar with the sensation of fulness that ensues, — giddiness 
 and ringing in the ears, to the annihilation of accurate 
 auricular perceptions, till the cause is removed.* 
 
 There are many existing cases of deafness, having their 
 origin in some such cause : the pipe finally inflames, and 
 becomes permanently sealed : a skilful aurist, under such 
 circumstances, will adroitly puncture the drum head, with 
 an instrument purposly constructed, and relieve the patient 
 without pain. 
 
 OVAL WINDOW, on FENESTRA OVALIS. 
 
 Fenestra ovalis means an oval window, covered by one 
 of the two little drum heads. Beyond this, supposing a 
 person could pass through, he would arrive in the vestibule, 
 or second room. Lower down, but a few lines from this, 
 is the second little parchment head, called 
 
 ROUND WINDOW, OR FENESTRA ROTUNDA. 
 
 This is a round window ; were it possible to tear it 
 away and creep through the frame, the traveller would 
 enter into one of the canals of the cochlea. 
 
 * Notwithstanding the fine arguments of writers to the contrary, I 
 believe that partially deaf persons hear better when the mouth is 
 open ; instinctively, it may be observed, such individuals listen with 
 an open mouth. The pulsations of sound thus enter the tympanum 
 and set the fenestra ovalis vibrating, — but very much less forcibly 
 than through the external opening, in its healthful condition. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 187 
 
 Fig 73. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 73. 
 
 In this diagram, the labyrinth and little bones of the ear, are mag- 
 nified exceedingly. This is to show the manner in which they are 
 connected, and the order in which they are placed. 
 
 a to e — Th & malleus, about to be described ; a, a long process ; 
 b, a shorter one ; c, the handle, attached to the drum head ; d, the 
 neck ; and e the head of the malleus, like a mallet. 
 
 f to i — The inchus ;f its body : g its short leg ; i the point united 
 to the stapes. 
 
 kton — The stapes; It its small head, i the anterior leg, n the 
 basis connected with the membrane which closes the fenestra ovalis. 
 
 o to m — The labyrinth ; o, r, the first turn ot the cochlea ; s, t, u, 
 v, the second ; w, x, the half or third turn ; y the foramen rotun- 
 dum or round window ; zz, the vestibulum ; ABCD, superior 
 semicircular canals; A, the ampulla-, B C, its curvature; D, its 
 union with the inferior or posterior canal ; E F G H, inferior canal; 
 E, its ampulla ; F G H, its curious curve and its junction with the 
 first; I K L M, the exterior canal; I, the ampulla; K L, the direc- 
 tion ol its curve ; M, its termination in the vestibule. 
 
188 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig. 74. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 74. 
 
 In this, the bony case of the labyrinth, has had one half cut away 
 to exhibit the interior. 
 
 a to l — The upper part of the cochlea; aa, the thickness of its 
 external shell in a foetus of eight months ; b c d, the lamina spiralis ; 
 be, scala vestibuli; e f gh i, the scala tympani. Here is seen 
 the bony lamina spiralis ; Sits origin; d its termination in a little 
 hook, termed hamulus; k the opening of the infundibulum, where 
 the scaloe communicate ; l the opening of the aqueduct, or drain of 
 the fluids from the cochlea. 
 
 m to g — The under half of the vestibulum; m the thickness of 
 its case in the foetus ; n the fovea or round pit ; o an oval pit ; p a 
 ridge between them ; q opening of the aquaeductus vestibuli. 
 
 r, g, k,l, — The canals divided; r the thickness of their case in 
 the infant ; g the posterior ; l exterior semicircular canal; 1 opening 
 of the big end of the posterior canal ; 2 opening of the large end of 
 the superior ; 3 the opening common (o their united tubes ; 4 the 
 larger end ; 5 the contracted opening of the external canal. 
 
 LITTLE BONES OF THE EAR, OR OSSICULA AUDITUS. 
 
 Perhaps there is no insulated portion of an animal, that 
 more clearly and satisfactorily evinces superhuman design, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 189 
 
 than the figure and articulation of the four ear bones, 
 which we shall now endeavor to describe. The technical 
 phrase ossicula auditus , in the Latin, implies little bones of 
 the ear. They are by far the smallest in the body. The 
 first, in the order of their distribution, is the malleus or 
 mallet, — having a faint resemblance to that instrument, 
 inasmuch as there is a long handle joined to a round knob. 
 Secondly, the inchus, from its resemblance to an anvil : — 
 os orbiculare or round bone, the least in size that has ever 
 been discovered, — being in man considerably smaller 
 than a mustard seed. And lastly, the stapes — or stirrup, 
 almost a miniature fac simile of a saddle stirrup. Birds 
 have but two of these, of which the malleus is most devel- 
 oped. Turtles have but one, the malleus ; and reptiles, 
 as far as personal dissection warrants, have but two. In 
 these classes, there is a departure in form, from those we 
 are contemplating in our own species. 
 
 having shorter arms, is in the same position as in Figure 73 ; the let- 
 ters have the same reference. The star points out the articulating 
 surface for the malleus. 
 
 Any person from the foregoing remarks, will recognise the stapes, 
 by its shape — ab its head; c the neck; d anterior crus; e the 
 second; /the basis. 
 
 The fourth drawing represents another view of the stapes, seen 
 from above — a its cartilage ; b anterior ; c posterior ; d the basis. 
 
 Fig. 75. 
 
 IT) Here is presented a 
 magnified view of the 
 ear bones. The os 'or- 
 biculare, or round bone, 
 is not represented, be- 
 ing considered by some 
 as/nly an appendage 
 of the malleus. 
 
 The malleus known 
 by its long arms ; a, b, 
 c, d, e, mark the same 
 points as in Figure 73. 
 The inchus, resem- 
 bling a molar tooth, 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 
 75. 
 
190 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK, 
 
 As these bones are placed in the drum barrel, one 
 joined to the extremity of the other, they make a compound 
 lever, — the object of which is, to have the freest and long- 
 est extent of motion, in a little space; — unlike the muster 
 drum, which is continually referred to on account of fa- 
 miliar illustration, the sticks of this are fixed on the inside, 
 and though no hands are there to beat them on the head, 
 they are connected to little cords, which jerk them down 
 with a sort of conscious independence, whenever there is 
 the least noise abroad, to give the brain intelligence, as it 
 were, of what is going on without.* 
 
 Fig. 76. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 76. 
 
 In this drawing; the little hones are represented 
 of their natural size, with the exception of the last 
 one, — which is magnified. 
 
 <m a 
 
 There is some resemblance in the motion to be effected 
 by this chain of bones, to the up and down motion of the 
 hand at the extremity of the arm, viz. — carrying one end 
 
 * There are some diseases familiar to medical gentlemen, besid e 
 local affections of the ear, wliich fix upon the bones about the face. 
 Under such circumstances, a sanious discharge washes these little 
 bones entirely away : — nothing is more certain, than the fact, that 
 the three first bones may be corroded and floated from their connex- 
 ions: — indeed, extracted with forceps, and the patient hear, to all 
 intents and purposes, nearly if not quite as well as he did before. 
 Thus the membrane, (drum head) and three out of four bones are 
 unnecessary, it seems, in the auditory apparatus of man. Stripped 
 thus, it falls below the frog’s — being deficient in an external cover- 
 ing ot vibrating membrane. The vibrations, in this case, act directly 
 on the foot piece of the stapes. — which is broad enough to offer re- 
 sistance to the vibrating air. Being connected with the membrane 
 of the fenestra ovalis, it produces a motion in it, which is propagated 
 to the fluid beyond, and thus the nerve becomes agitated. If the 
 stapes could be detached without rupturing the membrane of the 
 fenestra ovalis, then hearing could be effected independent of the lit- 
 tle bones. Their use is merely to strengthen the vibrations within, 
 just in the proportion that they have a tendency to become faint, as 
 the distance increases from whence they had their origin. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 191 
 
 of the lever through considerable space, while the other, 
 to which the power is applied, has no perceptible motion, 
 
 Small as the osicula auditus are, the first and last of the 
 series have muscles, called tensors, laxators, &c, which 
 are susceptible of demonstration. Rough points and pro- 
 jections on the inside of the tympanum, give attachment 
 both to -the muscles and the bones themselves. Even 
 these minute points, the old anatomists have belabored with 
 what they supposed significant names. One end of the 
 malleus, the handle, is connected with the inside of the 
 membrana tympani ; the other is fitted into a socket of the 
 inchus — and that articulated with the orbiculare or round 
 bone, — which stands as a medium of connexion between 
 the two. 
 
 Such is the mechanical adaptation of one of these bones 
 to the other, that if the extreme point of the handle of the 
 malleus be moved the millionth or ten millionth part of 
 an inch, by the vibrations of the drum head, it will so ope- 
 rate on the inchus and that on the stapes, through the in- 
 tervention of the orbiculare, that the last bone will move 
 through treble the space, by a single sonorous pulsation of 
 the malleus, in the same period of time. In fact, the 
 stirrup, in plain language, is exactly fitted into the oval 
 window, like the box of a pump, so that a motion given to 
 the handle of the malleus, operates on the chain, to effect 
 the stapes, that it may work backward and forward, with 
 the same motion and on the same principle of the work- 
 ing of the piston of a syringe. To hear, it is necessary 
 that the stapes, attached to the parchment window, should 
 move to and fro. 
 
 ENTRY, OR VESTIBULE. 
 
 This word implies an entry, — being an intermediate 
 apartment between the tympanum and cochlea ; in the 
 
192 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 sense in which it is now received, it is a hall of the edi- 
 fice beyond, — from which doors are opening into various 
 winding passages. Its length and diameter are not far 
 from those of a grain of wheat ; — as in a preceding para- 
 graph, if we suppose an individual has torn away the stapes, 
 stretched across the oval window, and then cut away the 
 latter, to wend his way into the vestibule, he will find it a 
 long but narrow room.* 
 
 On one side he will discover three holes, and on the 
 opposite, only two, which are the openings or communi- 
 cation of the semicircular canals, with the vestibule. With- 
 in this vestibule, are two sacs, water tight,, containing a 
 clear fluid. Though there is no communication between 
 them, the quality of the fluids distending them, is alike 
 -—one is considerably larger than the other, and both 
 together, would not equal in bulk, two good sized pin- 
 heads. The one of the greatest magnitude, is called the 
 alveus communis or the union of rivers — from the circum- 
 stance that the canals were thought to resemble streams 
 of water, having a free communication with the water in 
 the reservoir. Saculus Cochlea, the lesser one, though 
 separated from the other by the thickness of its own and 
 the other’s wall, is eked out into a long gyrating tube, that 
 traverses the cochlea. 
 
 This large sac, alveus communis, is the elementary one 
 found in polypi — and it is this that is built uponjfrom one 
 
 * If, by any circumstance, the membrane of the oval window or 
 fenestra ovalis, is ruptured, the fluid of the labyrinth will certainly 
 escape. This constitutes incurable deafness. No operation, no pre- 
 scription can avail, as, in the constitution of things, the acoustic nerve 
 cannot be acted upon in any other way, than through the agitation 
 of the fluid which surrounds it. Dr Darwin was of opinion that 
 if a deaf person dreamed of hearing, the internal parts, essential to 
 the function, were unimpaired. The same remark is applicable to 
 the blind. I have invariably found that the incurably deaf as well a3 
 incurably blind, never dream of hearing or seeing. This clearly 
 shows a destruction of the sense, inasmuch as the imagination cannot 
 rouse a single vestige of their former activity. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 193 
 
 species to another, till perfected in the complicated machi- 
 nery of the human ear. 
 
 Besides the sacs themselves, the porch is lined with a 
 membrane of exquisite texture, in which is conducted 
 the vessels that administer the blood to the contained 
 reservoirs, and also secrete their contained fluid, aqua 
 labyrintha or water of the labyrinth, further to be com- 
 mented upon. 
 
 SEMICIRCULAR CANALS. 
 
 These are properly a prolongation of the vestibule — 
 the design evidently being to furnish surface for expand- 
 ing the auditory nerve, without carrying it onward towards 
 organs that would be affected by their presence. No 
 way could be devised, more strictly economical, than to 
 have a circular or semicircular canal, — curving in a little 
 space, as in a very small solid bit of bone. Precisely on 
 this plan, are these canals — they are three in number. 
 Let it be remembered in this place, that the tympanum 
 including the vestibule, little bones and semicircular 
 canals, exclusively make up the ear of Ashes, and rep- 
 tiles — neither of these tribes having an external ear, nor 
 the cochlea, which still remains to be elucidated. 
 
 So much is necessary to the perception of simple 
 sounds : the cartilaginous fishes, (sharks, eels, &c,) have 
 the canals, and are therefore capable of judging of the 
 direction and condition of different sounds. The Chinese 
 drive fish from the crevices of rocks to the angling ground, 
 by beating a gong. Pike and carp, reared in artificially 
 stocked ponds, both in Poland and France, have been 
 taught to come to a particular spot to feed, at the ringing 
 of a bell. Serpents, abundant evidence substantiates, are 
 exceedingly excited by the lively strains of music — coil- 
 ing themselves into a variety of folds, and giving a tremu- 
 17 
 
194 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 lous vibration to the tail, which long experience proves to 
 be the result of a pleasurable sensation, and not one of 
 displeasure, rage or pain. 
 
 Two of these canals, as they wind towards the side of 
 the vestibule, coalesce — and when they perforate the 
 wall, have only one orifice in common. The third enters 
 alone, and this explains the two holes seen on one side of 
 the vestibule; on the opposite side are three, being the 
 orifices of the same three canals, opening singly. When 
 the semi-circular canals are closely examined, they are 
 observed to be larger at one extremity, near the walls of 
 the vestibule, than at the other; the bulbs or bulges are 
 termed ampullulai or bottle shaped. A crook-neck squash 
 is an exact, though greatly magnified representation of 
 any one of the semicircular canals. The diameter of the 
 circle, of which they are a little more than two thirds of a 
 segment, varies but little from one quarter of an inch in 
 man : but the calibre of the canals themselves will scarce- 
 ly admit the introduction of a fine bristle. A probable 
 reason for the swelling out of the ampullulae will be given 
 when discoursing particularly of the nerve. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 195 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 77. 
 
 In this enlarged diagram of the labyrinth which is laid open, the 
 soft parts are seen. Young gentlemen pursuing medical studies, 
 will derive the most profit from this plan 
 
 a to e — The lamina spiralis viewed from above. The distribu- 
 tion of the nerve will not be easily distinguished I fear — a a a, the 
 first turn ; b b, second turn ; c d e, the third turn of the lamina ; d e, 
 where the scalse communicate. 
 
 Comparetti has described the lamina to consist of four different 
 substances, or zones: 1, the bony zone ; 2, coriaceous ; 3, vesicula; 
 4, the membraneous zone. 
 
 /, sacculus sphericus ; g, space btween that and the alveus com- 
 munis ; h, alveus communis ;1 k i 3, posterior canal ; 1 i, its am- 
 pulla j k, the nerve expanded over it ; 2 1 m, the superior canal ; l, 
 the ampullulae ; 4 n 5, the exterior canal, communicating at both 
 ends with the alveus communis. 
 
 Within these bony tubes, are membraneous ones, — 
 prolongations of the sacs found in the vestibule ; but they 
 are not in contact with the walls : on the contrary, they 
 are kept from them by the interposition of a fluid, whose 
 equal pressure keeps them exactly in the centre. Further 
 to show the exceedingly minute structure of this accurate- 
 
196 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 ly operating instrument, it is necessary to remember that 
 the membraneous tube is also distended with a transpa- 
 rent watery liquor. Still smaller canals, running through 
 the temporal bone in which the internal ear is located, 
 pour in and discharge the old fluid, as an unceasing 
 process. 
 
 SNAIL-SHELL, OR COCHLEA. 
 
 The third and last anatomical division of the internal 
 ear, is the cochlea, or snail shell. Recollecting how the 
 canal of a snail-shell winds about a central pillar, will 
 enable the reader to understand the text. In the snail 
 shell of the ear, however, there are two canals, side by 
 side, which wind twice and a half round a central pillar, 
 which is hollow, and termed mocliolus. At the apex, the 
 two canals open in one common cavity, but a thin slip of 
 bone caps over both openings as well as over the top of the 
 hollow end of the pillar, like a parasol. This is the cupola, 
 in technical language. The upper end of the hollow 
 pillar is broad, but becoming narrower, the lower is de- 
 nominated the infundibulum or tunnel-shaped extremity. 
 
 After leaving the inner extremity of the vestibule, com- 
 mences one canal of the cochlea, which becomes smaller 
 and smaller, till it terminates under the cupola. Now, 
 supposing the reader were travelling in this canal, he 
 could step from the termination of the one we are describ- 
 ing, over the broad opening of the modiolus , shaded above 
 by the cupola, into the mouth of the second canal. By 
 following its turns, increasing in diameter, as he proceeds, 
 till he has gone twice and a half round the modiolus, he 
 would arrive at the fenestra rotunda or round window. 
 This being like parchment, semi-transparent, he could 
 look into the tympanum where the little bones are lodged. 
 
 Thus it is, that one canal is in reality a prolongation of 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 197 
 
 the vestibule, and the other opens into the tympanum. A 
 fluid fills the canals, which is prevented from escaping by 
 the oval window, in the vestibule, in one direction, and 
 by the round one at the other. In the centre of this li- 
 quor, floating, are the finely organized threads of the 
 acoustic nerve. 
 
 Those animals having the power of combining sounds 
 to produce song, have a cochlea, and generally, a corres- 
 ponding vocal apparatus. Birds, have a cochlea, but it 
 consists only of two tapering tubes, united at one ex- 
 tremity, but diverging at the other, as in man. A musical 
 ear was once thought to depend exclusively on a cochlea ; 
 but common sense teaches us, and the fact is notorious, 
 that singers as well as those who cannot sing, have ears 
 constructed precisely alike ; and therefore, the whole 
 mystery depends on the peculiar development of the brain. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 78. 
 
 Let it be remembered by the reader, that part of 
 the last as well as the following diagram, which has 
 a sort of shell-like turn, is denominated the cochlea. 
 
 The object of this drawing, is to show the soft con- 
 tents of the labyrinth, of their natural size and in their 
 natural situation. All the eminences of the temporal 
 bone have been broken away. 
 
 a a, the spiral plate of the cochlea ; b, the round sac, or sac of the 
 cochlea ; c, alveus communis; g, the posterior ; k, the superior, and 
 l the exterior semicircular canal. 
 
 THE HEARING, OR AUDITORY NERVE. 
 
 There is no part of the intricate organ we have been 
 explaining, more absolutely difficult to display and to fully 
 understand, in all its relations, than the nerve of hearing, 
 and we shall therefore avoid all laborious descriptions, and 
 merely generalize. 
 
 The auditory nerve is the seventh, — a pair precisely 
 alike on the two sides of the brain ; not much larger than 
 
 17 # 
 
198 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 cotton sewing threads ; it enters the cochlea first through 
 a sieve-like orifice, on one side of a bone that projects 
 from the inside of the skull towards the brain. This de- 
 pression where the nerve enters, towards the external ear, 
 is the meatus auditor ins interims. It assumes a variety of 
 shapes in distributing itself in the various tabes, sacs, canals 
 and pits we have been exhibiting. At some points, many 
 delicate threads are discoverable, side by side : at others, 
 fibres are seen floating in the surrounding fluid, from the 
 main trunk : at others, the nerve assumes the form of a 
 flocculent paste, and at others, a woolly texture. The 
 whole, distributed thus elaborately, constitutes the nerve 
 of hearing. 
 
 The sense of hearing is not confined, in a healthful con- 
 dition of the organ, to anyone particular part or point : 
 the sensation is perceived in the whole at the same instant 
 of time. It has been recently demonstrated that the hu- 
 man ear is so extremely sensible, as to be capable of ap- 
 preciating sounds which arise from about 24,000 vibrations 
 in a second ; and, consequently, that it can hear a sound 
 which lasts only the 24,000th part of a second. The ques- 
 tion now may arise, why was it necessary to construct 
 such an intricate machine, if one part of it has not a high- 
 er office to sustain than another ? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 199 
 
 Fig. 79. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 79. 
 
 An enlarged view of the labyrinth laid open. 
 
 a, b, c, — the cochlea. To exhibit the zona mollis, the outside or 
 bony case is removed. 
 
 d, e,f, — the vestibulum. 
 
 g, to q, — the semicircular canals. 
 
 g, h, i, — the posterior; k, l, m, the superior; o,p, q, the exterior 
 canal. 
 
 1, 2, 3 — the lamina spiralis, seen on its under surface ; 3, the two 
 sacs so often mentioned in this work, in the vestibule, which, view- 
 ed in this plan, look like one. 
 
 t, u, — the membranous posterior canal. 
 
 v,w, x, — the superior membranous canal, uniting with the last, 
 at x, y, z, the exterior membranous canal. 
 
 This diagram exhibits the distribution of the acoustic nerve in the 
 labyrinth ; the large branch goes to the cochlea, and the three oth- 
 ers, smaller, to the vestibule, and three semicircular canals. 
 
 Economy was the object : — to pack as much as possible 
 in the smallest space, is observable in all animal mechan- 
 ism. No other kind of arrangement of cells in the small 
 block of bone in which these are found, would or could 
 have afforded so much surface to spread out such an ex- 
 tent of nerve. This then is the probable reason for semi- 
 circular canals, the cochlea and their appendages. 
 
200 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 MUSICAL EAR. 
 
 No question oftener arises, on surveying the auditory 
 apparatus, than this, viz. — why has one person an ear for 
 music, when another, whose internal organ is as beauti- 
 fully and nicely constructed, is totally unable to appreciate 
 harmonious sounds ? The difficulty, probably is in the 
 peculiar development of some portion of the brain, and 
 therefore does not arise in consequence of a defect in the 
 original conformation of the ear. It obviously requires 
 as delicate auricular perception to appreciate, and imitate 
 articulate sounds, as it does to sing in concert. It is by 
 no means uncommon for an individual to cultivate the 
 highest departments of instrumental music, and at the 
 same time be wholly unable to sing. This is entirely 
 owing to some defect of the vocal organs. A perfect or- 
 ganization of both, in the same individual, united to that 
 inscrutable condition of the brain which gives the taste 
 for music, constitutes the most gifted performer, and such 
 as Handel, Mozart, Beethoven, Mad. Catalina, Garcia, the 
 wonderful Paganini, and a few others, have exhibited to 
 the highest degree of human perfection. 
 
 Another circumstance in relation to the musical ear, is 
 the following: some persons have the ear as well as the 
 taste for music, and yet find it impossible to accompany 
 others in a performance. This arises, probably, in most 
 cases, in consequence of a non-agreement in the tension 
 of the drum-heads of the two ears, or a want of corres- 
 pondence in the calibre of the internal tubes ; hence one 
 ear perceives sounds (o be half a tone above or below the 
 other : — the same occurs in respect to the focal distance, 
 oftentimes, of the eyes. Time rarely corrects the former, 
 though in the latter it finally modifies the aberration.* 
 
 *Philosophers of antiquity were more conversant with the rloctrine 
 of sounds, than the moderns : the remarkable cavern, hewn in a solid 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 201 
 
 DISEASES OF THE EARS. 
 
 A ringing in the ear is an indication of a diseased state 
 of the nerve ; generally, it arises from some slight in- 
 flammation. The beating of adjacent arteries, in conse- 
 quence of inflammation in the throat, may excite the nerve, 
 which being incapable of transmitting any sensation but 
 that of sound, the ringing is an imperfect sensation. The 
 eye, when the optic nerve is encroached upon by inflam- 
 mation of surrounding parts, or the pressure of a growing 
 tumor, transmits the sensation of light, though the indi- 
 vidual be in total darkness; affections of the brain itself 
 may remotely excite a morbid action in many or all the 
 nerves of sense. Hence, persons dying of acute inflam- 
 matory diseases, complain of hearing loud and strange 
 noises, although the apartment is perfectly still. 
 
 EAR-ACHE. 
 
 Very many individuals are subject to excruciating pain 
 of the internal ear, on taking the slightest cold, or from 
 exposing themselves to a humid atmosphere; and others 
 seem to inherit the disease, which no application can re- 
 move. A peculiar irritability of the nerve that crosses 
 the drum-head, (corda tympani) may be one cause, — the 
 vascular covering of which, suffering from a chronic in- 
 flammation, compresses the nerve and thus produces al- 
 most intolerable agony. Defending the external opening 
 with cotton wool, or lint, is a common and rational de- 
 fence ; but the introduction of oils, spirits and the like, is 
 often attended with pernicious consequences. Generally 
 
 rock by a celebrated tyrant, and called Dionysius' ear , is said to have 
 been an exact model of the windings of the human ear. Vitruvius 
 gives an interesting account of the manner in which the Greeks con- 
 trived to augment the compass of the voice in theatres, by placing 
 large metal vases in different parts of those edifices. 
 
202 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 such cases end in deafness. Nature, to save the rest of 
 the machine from becoming disordered, by its sympathy 
 with the diseased member, finally destroys it, as firemen 
 demolish contiguous buidings, to save a town, when they 
 can no longer master a threatening conflagration.* 
 
 PARTIAL DEAFNESS, FROM A COLD. 
 
 Probably, in a majority of cases, partial deafness arises 
 from a slight inflammation of the tube opening behind the 
 palate. In consequence of this, the balance between the 
 air in the tympanum and mouth, is destroyed, and the reg- 
 ular vibratory function of the membrane is altered. A 
 deafness in one ear generally depends on this cause. 
 Deafness in fevers is an excellent symptom, and offers en- 
 couragement in the worst cases, because it is an evidence 
 of a diminution of the morbid condition of the brain. 
 
 PERMANENT DEAFNESS. 
 
 A total deafness implies a destruction of the organ : 
 but we apprehend there are only a very few persons in this 
 condition. Even in those unfortunate fellow-beings who 
 are deaf and dumb , the faculty of hearing, to a certain ex- 
 tent, still exists. They hear the report of a cannon, or 
 heavy thunder, which act so powerfully on the body as to 
 
 * Painful affections of the ear may be induced from habitually pick- 
 ing the ears, — a very pernicious practice. In India, where a class of 
 men follow the profession of cleansing ears, cutting the nails, &e — 
 Ihough in that climate the secretions may be fluid, in greater abund- 
 ance, and discharge freely, the plucking of the hairs and frequent 
 introduction of scraping instruments render the organ irritable, and 
 less accurate in the perception of sounds. 
 
 Tumors, ulcerations and other troubleome complaints are brought 
 on by picking them. A sudden pressure on the corda tympani, 
 a nerve belonging to the face, which crosses the drum head, by the 
 head of a pin, may forever after render it liable to inflame on the 
 slightest exposure. 
 
 Fluids ought not to be poured into the external ear to drown in- 
 sects, as the worst consequences may ensue. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 203 
 
 rouse the sleeping energies of the nerve. In fact, the tre- 
 mor is communicated through the bones of the head. 
 Fishes, of the bony kind, have the organ of hearing acted 
 upon in the same manner, as the nerve is completely cased 
 up in solid bone, without either drum-head or external 
 openings. 
 
 CONCLUSION. 
 
 None of the organs of sense are more complicated or 
 splendidly constructed than the one under consideration. 
 The will has it but slightly under its control, and being 
 unable ‘ to withdraw itself from impressions,’ it has the 
 curious apparatus of little bones to increase or diminish 
 the intensity of impressions, like a regulator between the 
 external agent and the nervous cords. Judgment, by the 
 combined assistance of the other senses, perfects the 
 function of the organ — and ideas, without number, are 
 constantly ushered into being by the sense of hearing. 
 
 By this sense, music is a never failing source of plea- 
 sure, heightened and infinitely modified, according to the 
 physical development of the ear, and the discipline and 
 education to which it has in modern times been subjected. 
 The causes of the pleasure resulting from harmony and 
 melody, are very far from being satisfactorily explained, 
 notwithstanding the sagacious conjectures and repeated 
 attempts of the most able metaphysicians, as well as phy- 
 siologists : we know no more of them than we do of the 
 causes of the pleasures and pains of all the other senses. 
 
204 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 Of what use is the external ear ? 
 
 What is the tympanum ? 
 
 How many bones are found in the internal ear ? 
 
 What is the use of the drum? 
 
 Is there any communication between the mouth and inter- 
 nal ear ? 
 
 What is the vestibule ? 
 
 What do you understand by the cochlea ? 
 
 Is there a fluid in the vestibule ? 
 
 What is the fenestra ovalis ? 
 
 Where is the acoustic nerve placed ? 
 
 What is the use of the little bones ? 
 
 Can sound be heard without the stapes ? 
 
 What are the semicircular canals for? 
 
 Does a rupture of the drum destroy the sense of hearing ? 
 Of what use is air in the tympanum? 
 
 What constitutes a musical ear ? 
 
 What produces permanent deafness? 
 
 Of what use are cells in the bone, near the tympanum ? 
 Why do deaf persons hear better with the mouth open ? 
 How does the internal ear of birds differ from man’s ? 
 
 Can a person hear without the external ear ? 
 
 Why is pain produced by touching the drum ? 
 
 What is the use of ear wax ? 
 
 Of what use is the round window of the tympanum ? 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 205 
 
 THE EYE. 
 
 No one has been able to explain how or ivhy we see. 
 The visual organs are constructed with such exact refer- 
 ence to the laws of light, that telescopes and microscopes, 
 are but imitations and modifications of the apparatus of 
 the human eye. There is a difference, however, between 
 the animate and inanimate, the most wonderful and as- 
 tonishing. The first is a perceiving instrument; the 
 second, a receiving. 
 
 All animals living on land, have their eyes very similar 
 in structure. 
 
 In carnivorous animals, the original principle of vision 
 is preserved, but most curiously modified, according to 
 their habits and characters. 
 
 Those that live by violence, have the power of seeing 
 in the dark. 
 
 Fishes, by a further modification of the original appa- 
 ratus, probably see distinctly in the darkest night. 
 
 With another alteration, not unlike changing the dis- 
 tances between the lenses of a spy-glass, another family, 
 as seals, &c, see alternately in two elements. Still fur- 
 ther, on the descending scale of creation, insects are pro- 
 vided with motionless eyes, — giving them the faculty 
 of seeing in every possible direction. And, lastly, in 
 snails and some kinds of worms, the eyes are fixed at the 
 extremity of a moveable feeler, adapting them to different 
 focal distances, — or they can be drawn entirely within 
 18 
 
206 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 the head, for safe keeping, when not in use, precisely 
 on the principle of care that we draw out the slides of 
 an opera glass, and close them up again, when no longer 
 needed. 
 
 THE SOCKET IN WHICH THE EYE ROLLS. 
 
 Several thin pieces of bone assist in the formation of the 
 orbit, which, in a dry skull, is 1 shaped much like a pear, 
 with its large end turned outward. The upper plate of 
 bone is arched, having the brain resting on it above, and 
 the eye-ball moving under it below. Externally, the eyes 
 are at considerable distance, but the inner termination of 
 the orbits, answering to the small end of the fruit, are 
 quite near together. At their points is a ragged hole, 
 in each, through which the nerve of vision enters the 
 brain. A large quantity of fat is deposited in these 
 sockets, between the bones and eye-ball, that the latter 
 may always move with perfect freedom, and without fric- 
 tion, in all directions. After a long sickness, the cushion 
 of fat is absorbed with that deposited in the bones, to sus- 
 tain the system, which accounts for the sinking in of the 
 eye : as the person recovers, the stomach resumes the task 
 of taking care of the body, the fat is deposited again, and 
 the eye becomes prominent as before. 
 
 GLOBE OF THE EYE. 
 
 When detached from the surrounding parts, the eye- 
 ball does not appear exactly round : it is, in outline, more 
 than two thirds of a large sphere, with a portion of a lesser 
 globe laid upon it. 
 
 The use of this arrangement is obvious. If the ball 
 had been actually round, the compass of vision would 
 have been very limited : as it is, the smaller portion, by 
 its short curve, protrudes so far beyond the socket, where 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 207 
 
 the globe is lodged for safety, that the sphere of vision is 
 very much enlarged. 
 
 MUSCLES OF TIIE EVE. 
 
 To move the ball, muscles -were necessary ; otherwise, 
 animals would be obliged to turn their bodies as often as 
 an object was to be seen. Of these, four are straight, 
 going from the sides of the ball, to be fastened near the 
 hole, at the termination of the bony cavity : their office 
 is to hold the eye firmly, in a fixed position, as in steadily 
 contemplating a painting. Two others are given, making 
 six in the whole, to express, principally, the passions of 
 the mind : they are denominated the oblique, in conse- 
 quence of their oblique movement of the eye. One rolls 
 it upward and inward, as in viewing a button, midway on 
 the forehead ; the other, going through a loop, is so purely 
 mechanical, that it has been the theme of admiration with 
 philosophers in all ages, carries the eye downward and out- 
 ward. The last action may be shown by looking at a but- 
 ton, laid on the shoulder. Although these oblique muscles 
 exist in monkeys and nearly all tribes of quadrupeds, they are 
 imperfectly developed ; showing most conclusively that 
 they were designed for expressing the feelings and passions 
 of man — an ineffable language, which all the brute 
 creation have the sagacity to understand. When one of 
 the four straight muscles is shorter than its fellow on the 
 opposite side, it produces the cross-eye or squinting. 
 
208 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanation of Figure 80. 
 
 This plan exhibits the muscles, viewed obliquely from the upper 
 and outer side of the right eye. 
 
 a. The eye-ball. 
 
 b. Part of the upper eye-lid. 
 
 c. Tunica Conjunctiva, or continuation of the common skin of the 
 forehead, which turns over the edges of’ the lids, and is finally car- 
 ried over the front of the globe, but perfectly transparent at this 
 point. 
 
 d. The integuments of the right side of the nose. 
 
 e e. The optic nerve. 
 
 f. The four straight muscles, with the levator or raising muscle 
 of the upper eye-lid, together with the superior oblique muscle em- 
 bracing the optic nerve where it enters the orbit. 
 
 g. The levator of the lid drawn aside. 
 
 h. Levator occuli, or superior straight muscle, — to roll the ball 
 upward 
 
 i. Abductor occuli, rolls the ball outward. 
 
 k. Adductor occuli, rolls it towards the nose. 
 
 l. Depressor occuli, rolls the ball downward, towards the cheek. 
 
 m. The superior oblique muscle, passing through the loop at n. 
 
 n. Called the trochlea , or pulley, but, in fact, a simple loop. 
 
 <>. Insertion of the superior oblique muscle in the eye-ball. 
 
 p. The inferior oblique muscle, taking its rise from a bone. 
 
 q. The insertion of the tendon of the inferior oblique muscle in 
 the first coat of the ball. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 209 
 
 COATS OF THE EYE. 
 
 Such is the mechanical arrangement of the different 
 coats or coverings of the eye, answering in use, to the 
 brass tubes of a spy-glass, that one is fitted within the 
 other, like a nest of boxes : they are three in number. 
 
 Fig. 81. 
 
 Explanation of Figure 81. 
 
 This is a plan of the coats, or as 
 they are sometimes termed, tunics. 
 
 Reference should be made to this 
 after reading the text. The natural 
 figure of the eye, in outline, is pre- 
 served. 
 
 a. The Sclerotic, or first, hard 
 tunic . 
 
 ? q b. The Choroid, or fleecy tunic, 
 
 c. The Retina, or third and in- 
 most tunic, which is an expansion of 
 the optic nerve g — the certain seat 
 
 of vision. 
 
 d. The Cornea, or prominent, transparent circle, over which the 
 lids close, in winking. 
 
 e. The Crystaline lens, or little magnifying glass of the eye, 
 about a quarter of an inch in diameter. 
 
 f. Is the space filled by one of the fluids of the eye, and called 
 the anterior chamber. 
 
 g. The stump of the optic nerve, which is prolonged into the 
 substance of the brain. 
 
 1st. The first is the Sclerotic* coat, thick, firm, and 
 possessing but little sensibility. Its hardness gives secu- 
 rity to the delicate membranes beyond ; affords attach- 
 ment for the muscles ; and by its elasticity, equally distends 
 the ball, that none of the humors may suffer from pres- 
 sure. Happily the hard coat is very rarely diseased. 
 Fishes have a sclerotic coat strictly hard, being either 
 cartilaginous or firm bone, graduated in this respect ac- 
 cording to the depth to which they descend in search 
 of food. Through this coat, in what is called the white 
 
 * Sclerotic, from a Greek word meaning hard. 
 
 18 * 
 
210 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 of the eye, the occulist plunges a needle to cure some 
 kinds of blindness. 
 
 2d. Choroid* is the name of the second coat, having 
 a dark red color, and apparently slightly connected with 
 the first. By carefully cutting oft’ the sclerotic from a 
 bullock’s eye, with scissors, the choroid will be beautifully 
 exhibited, sustaining the humors. Minute dissection, 
 under a microscope, shows that this tunic is a complete 
 web of arteries and veins; — hence its reddish hue. Be- 
 tween this and the sclerotic, fine silvery threads are seen, 
 which hold a control over the Iris, yet to be described, — 
 determining by their influence how much- or how little 
 light may safely be admitted into the eye. The inside of 
 this membrane resembles closely woven wailed cloth, hav- 
 ing a fleecy nap, similar to velvet, called Tapetum! 
 This tapetum is particularly interesting in a philosophical 
 point of view, as on its shade of color, in a great measure, 
 as will be more fully explained in the sequel, depends the 
 power of seeing in the dark. 
 
 3d. Retina, \ so called from its resemblance to a net, 
 completes the number, being the innermost and last. Its 
 color is that of gum arabic, or ground glass : nothing can 
 be more delicate, being too tender to bear its own weight. 
 In fact, it is the expansion of the optic nerve, the imme- 
 diate seat of vision. To see it well, an eye should be 
 taken to pieces in a tumbler of water, 
 
 * Choroides, — like a lamb-skin, fleecy. 
 
 ) Tapetum — resembling cloth, called tapestry, 
 tfietina, — a net. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK 
 
 211 
 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 Explanation of Figure 82. 
 from dissection of a human eye, the 
 organ being represented of the pro- 
 per size. 
 
 a. The optic nerve, 
 h b. The Sclerotic coat cut and 
 turned outward. 
 
 c. A circular portion of the Scle- 
 rotica, being a rim of the white of 
 the eye, cut, and turned upward, 
 having in its embrace the cornea. 
 
 d. The cornea. 
 
 ee. One half the Iris, in its place, 
 the other half being removed. 
 f. The Pupil, soon to be descri- 
 bed, with the crystalline lens in its place. 
 
 g. The Ciliary circle, or second vertical partition, within the 
 eye, behind the iris. 
 
 h h. Choroid coat. 
 
 i. The Ciliary processes, or ruffle-like plaits of the ciliary circle, 
 yet to be explained. A small portion of the iris is cut away to show 
 them. 
 
 k. A portion of the iris cut and turned back. 
 
 l. The floating points of the ciliary processes, also turned back. 
 
 m. The middle smooth part of the retina, seen by cutting a hole 
 through the choroid coat. 
 
 n. The roots of the ciliary processes, to which the black paint, 
 secreted by the tapetum or inner surface of the choroides, adheres. 
 
 o. The ciliary processes inserted into the sac which contains the 
 cry st aline lens. 
 
 THE CORNEA. 
 
 Anteriorly, that clear, shining wall, resembling a watch 
 crystal, which famishes the membraneous box, is called 
 the cornea. Simple as this thin crystal appears, it is 
 infinitely curious in structure. It is made of thin pellu- 
 cid plates, one over another, held together by a spongy 
 elastic substance. By maceration in water a few hours, 
 the sponge will absorb it to such a degree, that the plates 
 may be distinctly felt to slide upon each other, between 
 the thumb and finger. 
 
 Little glands, like bags of oil, only to be seen by the 
 most powerful microscope, are lodged under the first 
 plate, which are continually oozing out their contents 
 
212 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 upon the surface, which gives the sparkling brilliancy to 
 this part of the eye. As death approaches, this fluid 
 forms a pellicle, like a dark cloud, over the lower portion 
 of the cornea. This formation is taken to be a sure indi- 
 cation of approaching dissolution. See fig. 81, letter d, 
 and fig. 82, letters c and d, for representation of the cornea. 
 
 mts. 
 
 By looking into a person’s eye, there seems to be a ver- 
 tical partition, either black, blue, or hazle, as the case 
 may be, which prevents us from looking into the regions 
 beyond, — having a round hole in its centre. This is the 
 iris, while its central orifice is denominated the pupil. 
 How the diameter of this hole is enlarged or diminished, 
 has never been explained satisfactorily. One fact, how- 
 ever, is certain, that the pupil is large or small, according 
 to the quantity of light that may be necessary to the for- 
 mation of a distinct picture of the object seen. — and this 
 change is effected without our being conscious of the 
 action. 
 
 From the reflection of such rays as are not admitted 
 through the pupil, or central hole, we account for much 
 of the lively brilliancy of the iris. On its back side it is 
 rather fleecy. Over this is spread a black, blue, hazle, or 
 tea-colored paint, which gives a permanent color to the 
 eye. It has been remarked, that the eyes and hair ordi- 
 narily correspond in color. Whenever the iris acts, as, for 
 instance, it does in going from a dark into a light room, 
 the pupil is made smaller, — acting uniformly in its fibres, 
 to keep it circular. On returning to the dark apartment, 
 the pupil enlarges again. A knowledge of this fact, will 
 explain the reason of a painful sensation in the eye, caus- 
 ed by a strong and sudden light. As soon as the iris has 
 had time to diminish the size of its pupil, we can endure 
 
ANATOMICAL. CLASS BOOK. 
 
 213 
 
 the same luminous object with perfect comfort. When 
 we leave a well-lighted room, on first going into a dark 
 street, everything appears lurid and indistinct. The iris 
 soon begins to enlarge the pupil, to admit more light, and 
 when that has been accomplished, although in compaia- 
 tive darkness, we recognise objects without an effort. 
 Acting independently of the will, its duties are like those 
 of a faithful sentinel, always consulting the safety of the 
 splendid optical instrument confided to its care, with re- 
 ference to its subserviency to the being for whose use it 
 was exclusively constructed. Were it otherwise, — were 
 it left to our own care, how often it would be neglected, 
 and indeed, totally ruined, solely for the want of undivided 
 attention. 
 
 Parrots have a voluntary control over the pupil, opening 
 and closing it at pleasure. How this is done, or why, in 
 the constitution of that bird, it is necessary, we cannot 
 determine. Cats, also, appear to have a similar power of 
 graduating the quantity of light, admitted into their eyes, 
 as it suits their own convenience. 
 
 In carnivorous quadrupeds, the pupil is commonly oval 
 and oblique, permitting them to look from the bottom to 
 the top of a tree without much elevation of the head. 
 Gramnivorous quadrupeds have an oblong pupil, placed 
 horizontally, with respect to the natural position of the 
 body. This form gives them the faculty of surveying the 
 expanse of a field, at once. See fig. 82, letters e e , and k. 
 Fig. 83, letters c c. 
 
 CILIARY PROCESSES. 
 
 Directly behind the iris, is a second curtain, having a 
 central hole through it, corresponding with that through 
 the first curtain, but nearly as large as the whole diameter 
 of the lens. All the luminous rays which are converged 
 by the convexity of the cornea, which is, in effect, a piano 
 
214 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 convex lease, cannot enter through the pupil ; many of 
 them strike the plane of the iris, and are reflected back, 
 as on a looking-glass, without penetrating its substance. 
 If any rays were to get through, by such an irregular pro- 
 cess, it would produce great confusion, by destroying the 
 outline and vividness of the image previously made on the 
 retina, through the natural opening. To prevent such 
 mishaps, the paint on the back of the iris is to absorb such 
 rays as are not reflected, and have a tendency therefore to 
 pass onward. Nature, as though fearful that circumstan- 
 ces might so alter the condition of the pigment,* as that 
 some light, notwithstanding this precaution', might pene- 
 trate, has interposed this second yeil, — solely it is sup- 
 posed to stop all wandering rays. 
 
 This ciliary curtain presents three thicknesses, and 
 lastly, has a thick coat of black paint on its back. In or- 
 der to give it treble security, as it regards thickness, it is 
 plaited like the folds of a ruffle. There are seventy folds 
 in the human eye, of equal width, nicely laid, one over 
 the other. A part so highly important, cannot be over 
 looked in studying the philosophy of vision. 
 
 * Pigment, — paint, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 215 
 
 Fig. 83. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. S3. 
 
 This plan presents a longitudinal section of the left eye and orbit. 
 
 a. The upper eye-lid, shut. 
 
 b. The cornea. 
 
 cc. The cut edges of the iris. 
 
 d. The pupil or round hole through the centre of the iris. 
 which, in the living eye, resembles a black, highly polished dot. 
 
 ee. The cut edges of the sclerotic and choroid tunics, with the 
 retina, before exhibited in the preceding drawings 
 
 f. The crystaline lens, as it is lodged, with reference to other 
 parts. 
 
 gg. The Ciliary processes continued from the choroid coat. The 
 plaits are here distinctly seen. 
 
 h. The optic nerve running from the brain, through the bones, 
 to the globe of the eye, apparently closely embraced by the straight 
 muscles. 
 
 i. The levator muscle that raises the upper eye-lid. 
 
 k. The upper straight muscle of the eye. 
 
 l. Inferior straight muscle, its antagonist, on the under side of 
 the ball, called depressor occuli. 
 
 m. A section of the inferior oblique muscle, used in rolling the 
 eye upward and inward, as in looking at a button laid above the root 
 of the nose. The superior oblique, passing through a loop, carries 
 the eye downward and outward, as in looking at the top of the 
 shoulder. These two muscles, by old writers, were termed rotato- 
 res and amatores, in allusion to their office of rolling the ball in ex- 
 pressing passions. 
 
 nn. A section of the blood vessels and nerves, with a large 
 quantity of fat, surrounding the optic nerve. 
 
216 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 HUMORS OF THE EYE. 
 
 By humors, writers mean the fluids which distend the 
 eye-ball. They are three in number, — possessing differ- 
 ent densities, and varying much in quality, quantity and 
 use. Besides fulfilling the first intention, — viz, disten- 
 sion, — they are so purely transparent, as to offer no ob- 
 struction to the free passage of light. Those only inter- 
 ested in this description, as general scholars, by close ex- 
 amination will have a perfect idea of them, and will con- 
 sequently understand the real nature of some of the many 
 causes that weaken the power of vision, or ultimately pro- 
 duce a total blindness. The gratification afforded by the 
 examination of a bullock’s eye,' — tracing the several parts 
 by this paper, will be an ample compensation for the labor, 
 because it will forever fix on the mind interesting facts, 
 and lead the reader, insensibly, to a course of reflections, 
 productive of much intellectual enjoyment. 
 
 AQUEOUS HUMOR.* 
 
 The aqueous humor is the first in the order of demon- 
 stration, lying directly back of the cornea, — so clear, 
 that one unacquainted with the existence of it, would not 
 suspect a fluid there. In volume, it is far less than the 
 others : it keeps the cornea prominent, always at the same 
 distance from the iris, in the early periods of'life. The 
 space occupied by the aqueous humor, is called the ante- 
 rior chamber of the eye. (See fig. 8!, letter/ - .) Passing 
 freely through the pupil, it also fills an exceedingly thin 
 apartment, the circumference of the iris, called the 'pos- 
 terior chamber. Thus it will be comprehended that the 
 iris, or in familiar language, first curtain, is actually sus- 
 pended and floating in a liquor. 
 
 Aqueous like water. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 217 
 
 Were it not for such a contrivance, the iris would soon 
 become dry and shrivelled, by the intensity of the sun, 
 and therefore rendered totally unfit to perform its appro- 
 priate office of opening and closing the pupil. The aque- 
 ous humor is never suffered to remain long at a time, but, 
 on the contrary, is constantly poured in and again drawn 
 off by an infinite number of invisible ducts. By being 
 stationary, it would become speedily turbid, and finally 
 lose its transparency. A knowledge of the rapidity of the 
 secretion has been the means of encouraging occulists to 
 undertake novel methods of extracting cataracts, a kind 
 of dark mote, through the cornea, as the most certain mode 
 of restoring sight. Twenty-four hours after drawing off 
 the aqueous humor, by a puncture, the anterior chamber 
 will be full again. 
 
 Old age, characterized by a gradual decay in the vigor 
 of all the individual organs, shows also its insidious ap- 
 proach in the eye. Vessels that have toiled with untiring 
 diligence to the meridian of life, begin to show a loss 
 of energy. Those which have carried the new, pure 
 liquid, forward a less quantity in a given time than for- 
 merly, — while those whose task it was to convey away 
 the old stock, are dilatory in the performance of their 
 work. Hence, from being kept too long in the reservoir, 
 in consequence of a tendency to become more turbid, it 
 does not allow the light to pass with its former facility to the 
 nerve ; elderly persons, therefore, have indistinct vision 
 from this cause, similar to looking through a smoky at- 
 mosphere. Fishes have no aqueous humor at all, as it 
 could be of no service in the element in which they swim 
 
 Kept, as the humor is, in its own capsule, it gives other 
 advantages to the apparatus of vision : it is a concavo-con- 
 vex glass, absolutely and indispensably requisite in an in- 
 strument that will produce an image by the same laws 
 that govern the eye. A sensible diminution in the quantity 
 19 
 
218 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 of this fluid, is very apparent in people advanced in years : 
 the cornea becomes flatter; thm segment of it is so 
 altered, that rays of light are no longer converged as in 
 younger days. This, together with corresponding de- 
 rangements within the globe, constitutes the long-sighted- 
 ness of old age, — mechanically overcome by wearing 
 convex spectacles. So gradually are the changes wrought 
 by age, that glasses of different focal distances are sought 
 from time to time, to keep pace with the progress of 
 decay. 
 
 The ingenuity of man is nowhere more curiously dis- 
 played, than in thus availing himself of his discovery of 
 the laws of refraction, in producing artificial lenses to 
 gratify his eye, a never failing source of enjoyment, long 
 after nature has begun to draw the blind that will ulti- 
 mately close between him and the world forever. 
 
 CRYST A LINE LENS.* 
 
 As magnifying glasses of different refractive powers 
 give perfection to optical apparatus, so it is with respect 
 to the lenses within the ball. By crystaline lens , is simply 
 meant a body like a button, resembling pure flint glass, 
 somewhat of the shape of a common sun glass, convex, on 
 both sides. Its posterior convexity is greater than its 
 anterior, — thereby bringing the rays to a point a little dis- 
 tance behind it. Careful investigation shows that this 
 lens is made of a series of plates, applied to each other 
 like the coats of an onion : the centre is firmer tfyan the 
 edges. 
 
 As. a whole, it possesses a highly refractive property, but 
 in different degrees, according to the thickness of the 
 lens, — receding from the centre to the circumference. 
 Over the whole, to keep it from sliding in any direction, 
 
 * Crystaline lens, — resembling crystal or glass. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 219 
 
 that the centre may not get without the axis of vision, 
 is an envelope, having connexion with all the coats, where 
 they are united on the borders of the cornea, and where 
 it joins the white part of the eye. Being equally trans- 
 parent with the lens itself, it cannot be conveniently ex- 
 hibited. 
 
 Cataracts, the most frequent cause of blindness, origi- 
 nate in the lens; sometimes half way between the centre 
 and margin, hut ordinarily in the centre. They are either 
 a peculiar deposition of opaque or milky matter, entirely 
 preventing the ingress of light, or there is an opacity of 
 some of the internal layers of plates, equally destructive to 
 vision. Many children are born with this affection ; and 
 at all ages, they are liable to form. To remove cataracts 
 by extraction, the operator slides a sharp, thin knife, re- 
 sembling a lancet, through the cornea, from one side to 
 the other, cutting one half from its natural attachment — - 
 leaving it in the form of a flap, thus: 
 
 Fig, 84. - 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 84. 
 
 This plan represents an eye., surrounded by- its natural appen- 
 dages, with a Unite passing through the anterior chamber. A dotted 
 line indicates the lower edge of the flap, made by cutting off just one 
 half the cornea f on, its attachment with the sclerotica, in order to al- 
 low the crystalina lens to escape, whenever the knife is withdrawn. 
 
 As a matter of course, the aqueous humor escapes in a 
 twinkling, at the same moment, the capsule of the lens, 
 previously ruptured, designedly, by the point of the knife, 
 
220 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 as it slides along, acts upon the lens by spontaneous con- 
 traction, and protrudes it through the wound. Undoubt- 
 edly the grasp which the straight muscles have on the ball, 
 accelerates its escape 
 
 Thus, in taking away the obstruction to sight, the whole 
 lens is extracted. 
 
 To couch, an operation often mentioned, and often per- 
 formed, is to thrust a delicate needle through the white 
 of the eye, just on its border, till the point reaches the 
 lens, which is then depressed into the lower part of the 
 eye, below the optic axis, so that light may, by entering 
 the pupil, arrive at the nerve. In this last operation, fears 
 are always entertained, that the lens may rise again to its 
 former position, rendering a repetition of the operation 
 indispensable. Secondary cataracts sometimes form, after 
 couching or extraction, and arise in consequence of a thick- 
 ening and opacity of the capsule, which is left behind. 
 Such cases are more alarming in their progress than a 
 disease of the lens, as no surgeon is warranted in promis- 
 ing even a partial relief. If he attempted to tear away 
 the membrane, he might alto rend every other within the 
 globe. 
 
 A few facts of this kind which have a practical bearing, 
 more or less interesting to every person, may lead to cor- 
 rect views in relation to some of the diseases which are 
 common to this curious organ. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 221 
 
 Fig. 85. 
 
 E. The anterior chamber of 
 
 Explanation of Figure 85. 
 
 This is a scheme showing how 
 a bad operator, by introducing the 
 couching needle too near the cor- 
 nea, may rupture the ciliary pro- 
 cesses, and actually divide the 
 lens in two pieces without moving 
 it from the optic axis. 
 
 A. The vitreous humor. 
 
 B. The lens. 
 
 CC Ciliary processes, torn by 
 the lower part of the needle, 
 thereby doing great violence and 
 a permanent injury to the organ. 
 
 DD. The iris. 
 e aqueous humor. 
 
 Fig. 86. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 86. 
 
 This figure represents 
 the mode, and, in fact, 
 the place into which the 
 couching needle is intro- 
 duced, in the operation 
 of couching. 
 
 A. The pupil is seen 
 through the transparent 
 cornea. 
 
 B. The iris. 
 
 C. The needle, with the handle elevated so as to depress the 
 point. 
 
 D. The lens and point of the needle in outline ; this precisely 
 represents the position of the lens after couching. 
 
 VITREOUS HUMOR. 
 
 Beyond the two humors we have been describing, is 
 the third, differing essentially from either of them. In 
 volume it far exceeds the others, — occupying more than 
 two thirds of the whole interior of the ball. Its consist- 
 ence is that of the white of an egg, but kept in place by 
 its own capsule. When the sac is punctured with a pin, 
 it flows out slowly in consequence of its adhesiveness. 
 Like the preceding humors, it is transparent, allowing the 
 free passage of light through its substance, and also pos- 
 19 * 
 
222 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 messes the additional quality of allowing the rays to sepa- 
 rate again, as they leave the point at which they were 
 converged just back of the lens. Observation proves 
 that the vitreous humor is kept in place by being lodged 
 in cells. Perhaps a piece of sponge might give a tolerable 
 idea of the cellular structure, admitting it to be as trans- 
 parent as the water which it absorbs. On its fore part it 
 has a depression, in which the posterior convexity of the 
 lens is lodged, — as represented in this diagram. Concave, 
 therefore, in front, and convex behind, gives another kind 
 of optical glass, known as the meniscus, — the crescent, 
 faintly resembling the first quarter of the new moon. 
 
 Any person possessing an ordinary share of curiosity, 
 can examine the optic nerve , at leisure, in slaughter 
 houses, fish markets, and in fowls. In the human eye, — 
 or rather extending from the globe to the brain, — the 
 optic nerve is very much like a cotton cord, somewhat 
 larger titan a wheat straw, of a mealy whiteness, and not 
 far from three quarters of an inch in length. Arising from 
 the substance of the brain, it traverses the bony canal till 
 it reaches the back of the eye-ball ; as soon as it arrives 
 in contact, as it were, it is suddenly divided into innumer- 
 able filaments, which wend their way into the globe, 
 
 Fig. 87. 
 
 One dotted line indicates, in this 
 diagram, the aqueous humor; an- 
 other the iiis, and a third the lens, 
 and the fourth the vitreous humor. 
 Let it be remembered that all the 
 space between the bad; side of the 
 lens and optic nerve, is filled com- 
 pletely, with the glairy, vitreous 
 humor, the third fluid, and inmost 
 .of the eye. 
 
 Explanation of Figure 87. 
 
 OPTIC NERVE. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 223 
 
 through very minute holes. From a fanciful resemblance 
 to a sieve, this spot on the sclerotica, is called the cribriform 
 plate. When the threads have emerged within, they as- 
 sume another form, by expanding into a web, constituting 
 the third or inmost box. Some believe the nerve is spread 
 on a thin, unseen membrane, in the form of a highly or- 
 ganized nervous paste. Here, on this pulp, having con- 
 siderable range of surface, is the sole seat of vision. A 
 vulgar opinion presupposes some exceedingly acute nervous 
 point, — the exquisite place of vision. Nothing, however, 
 is more absurd; vision includes considerable surface. In 
 the centre of the substance of the nerve, an artery pene- 
 trates the eye, accompanying the filaments, to nourish the 
 humors. When the cornea has been cut away, and the 
 iris detached, this vessel may be distinguished, of a bright 
 scarlet, spreading its hair-like branches about, like the 
 limbs of a tree. The nerves which give sensation to the 
 eye, connecting it with the system, may be noticed, as 
 previously remarked, lying between the two first coats. 
 The optic nerve conveys to the mind the sensation of the 
 existence of things, as perceived by the eye, while the 
 commands of the same mind are conveyed to the organ 
 by these little threads of nerves, so insignificant, as to be 
 often overlooked in a dissection made purposely for them. 
 
224 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Pig.. 83. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 88. 
 
 In this figure, the cornea is cut away, and the sclerotic dissected 
 back. This is a beautiful and easily accomplished dissection. In a 
 bullock’s eye all these delicate nerves can be readily displayed. A 
 pair of sharp pointed scissors and a few pins, to hold parts to a board, 
 are the proper instruments. In schools, ladies could display the 
 whole of this beautiful optical apparatus. 
 
 a. The optic nerve. 
 
 b. The sclerotic coat turned back, so as to show the vessels of 
 the choroid coat. 
 
 cc. The ciliary nerves, seen piercing the sclerotic coat, and pass- 
 ing forward to be distributed to the iris. The iris, so highly- 
 organized, is not supplied by any nervous influence from the optic, 
 but by the hair-like nerves, here displayed, creeping to its margin 
 between the two exterior coats. 
 
 d. A small nerve passing from the- same source to the same ter- 
 mination, but giving off no visible branches. 
 
 ee. Two vena, vorticosa, or whirling veins, so denominated, be- 
 cause they seem to fall into shapes, resembling falling jets of water; 
 these return the blood from the eye, sent in by its central and other 
 arteries. 
 
 f. A point of the sclerotic, through which the trunk of one of the 
 vein3 has passed. 
 
 g. A lesser vein. 
 
 It. The circular point of union, where all the coats of the eye, 
 together with the cornea and iris, seem to be glued firmly together. 
 
 i. The iris. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 225 
 
 k. The str aight fibres of the iris. 
 
 l. A circle of fibres or vessels, which divide the iris into the 
 larger circle k — and the lesser one m. 
 
 m. This letter points to the lesser circle of the iris. 
 
 n. The fibres of the lesser circle. 
 
 o. The pupil. 
 
 P1GMENTUM NIGRUM.* 
 
 Lastly, to complete the internal structure, and fit it for 
 the performance of its destined office, the inside surface 
 of the second coat, choroides, is thoroughly painted black. 
 In the order of explanation, this paint is just behind the 
 retina. When the humors have been taken out, the pig- 
 ment is readily examined. The use of it is very obvious; 
 viz., to absorb any aberrating or unnecessary rays of light, 
 which would confuse the vision, or destroy the intensity 
 of the impression on the expanded retina, or to suffocate 
 them entirely. 
 
 SKIN OF THE EYE, OR TUNTCA CONJUNCTIVA. 
 
 Behind, the eye, by its long cord of optic nerve, seems 
 to rest on one extremity of an axle : — in front, the skin, 
 passing over the eye, as it comes down from the forehead, 
 to join the cheek, is the other. 
 
 To comprehend, clearly, the manner in which the eye 
 is fastened, before, — observe how the skin turns over the 
 edge of the lid, going about three quarters of an inch back, 
 striking the ball to which it is made fast, then folded back 
 upon itself, adhering to the whole anterior surface of the 
 cornea, — dipping down and finally mounting over the 
 margin of the lower lid, and ultimately loosing itself on 
 the face. As we cannot recognise this on a living eye, 
 it will at once lead one to suppose it is as clear as glass, 
 which is the case. Streaks of blood, when the eye is in- 
 
 Pigmentum Nigrum — black paint . 
 
226 
 
 ANAT0A1I0AL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 flamed, lie covered over by the tunica conjunctiva. Now 
 if particles of sand, or other irritating substances get under 
 either eye-lid, they cannot possibly enter but little way, 
 before reaching the duplication of this transparent skin ; 
 there is no danger, therefore ; the offending matter cannot 
 get so far between the socket and ball, backward, as to 
 abridge the free motion of the organ, or do a permanent 
 injury to the parts. This partition, or doubling over of 
 the conjunctiva, is a curious provision, as we are thereby 
 enabled to reach the source of irritation. 
 
 The principle of introducing eye-stones, to extract 
 foreign matter, is this, and not owing as Vulgarly sup. 
 posed, to the crawling about of a smooth piece of sulphate 
 of lime, on some forty or fifty feet. The stone is so much 
 larger than the extraneous body, already there, that it ex- 
 cites a proportionably larger quantity of tears, to wash it 
 away : in effect, therefore, we submit to a greater tempo- 
 rary evil, to get rid of a lesser one. 
 
 Serpents annually shed their skins, which, unaccount- 
 able as it at first appears, are whole over the eyes. That 
 thin sheet, so very clear and fine in texture, is the con- 
 junctiva, showing its origin, — •hence a similar origin 
 may safely be inferred over other eyes. Every species of 
 animal with which naturalists are conversant, possess this 
 defensive transparent membrane. 
 
 THIRD EYE-LID, OR MEMBRANA NICTITANS. 
 
 A third eye-lid is given such animals as are destitute 
 of hands, or are incapacitated, by the arrangement of their 
 limbs, from reaching their eyes. This is called mem- 
 brana nictitans, — and a more striking piece of mechan- 
 ism there is not in existence. It slides from one angle 
 of the eye to the opposite one, under the first pair of lids, 
 — and that, too, whether the others are open or shut, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 227 
 
 being totally independent of them in muscular action. 
 Its use cannot be mistaken : it is on purpose for clearing 
 away matter that may be irritating to the eye. Any ex- 
 traneous substance is brushed from the cornea in an 
 instant, by the broad sweep of the night lid. Birds that 
 seek their food in the night, as owls, defend their irrita- 
 ble organs, through the glare of daylight, by drawing over 
 this singular curtain. Dogs, cats, foxes, wolves, bears, 
 lions, tigers, &c, can each of them, by this brush, re- 
 move the minutest mote from the cornea, more expedi- 
 tiously than any occulist on the globe. 
 
 TEARS. 
 
 Perfection is everywhere observed in animal mechan- 
 ics. The eye would soon become a useless instrument 
 notwithstanding the nice adjustment of its several parts, 
 were it not for the external apparatus of eye-lids, glands 
 and tears, whose combined action keeps it always in a 
 condition to be useful. Were not the cornea frequently 
 moistened, it would become dry and shrivelled. To ob- 
 viate this, a sack of fluid is fixed just under the edge of 
 the orbit, above the eye-ball, which is continually pouring 
 out its contents by the pressure and rolling of the eye. 
 Flowing through numberless apertures, it washes the 
 crystal and finally passing into grooves, on the inner 
 margin of both eye-lids, runs to their terminations in a 
 small pin-like orifice, at the inner angle. To keep them 
 open, a hoop is set in the mouth of this tear tube. This, 
 too, can be shown by turning, the lid outward by the 
 finger. Finally, the tears are conveyed into the nose 
 through a bony tube, answering the double purpose of 
 keeping moist the lining membrane, on which the sense 
 of smell depends. On both eye-lids, at the roots of the 
 eye-lashes, are in each, a row of glands, equivalent to 
 
228 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 bags, smaller than pin heads, which ooze out an oily 
 secretion, to prevent the adhesion of them together, as is 
 sometimes the case when the eyes are much inflamed. 
 Surely such manifest provision for contingencies, is another 
 beautiful illustration of super-human contrivance. 
 
 Fig. 89. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 89. 
 This plan exhibits the natural 
 size of the passages of the tears. 
 
 a Is the lachrymal gland, or 
 organ that secretes the tears; 
 showing its natural situation, 
 with respect to the eye- litis. 
 bb. The eyelids widely opened. 
 c. The situation of the punc- 
 ta lachrymalia, or the holes at 
 the inner angles of the lids, 
 through which the tears flow, 
 to get into the tube which 
 finally conveys the fluid to the 
 nose. 
 
 dd. The ducts continued from 
 th e pun ctet lachrymalia. 
 
 ee. The angles which the 
 ducts form after leaving the 
 puncta. 
 
 f. The termination of the lachrymal ducts in gg. 
 gg. The lachrymal sac. 
 
 h. The nasal duct, continued from the lachrymal sac. 
 
 WHY DO AGED PERSONS ’REQUIRE CONVEX GLASSES? 
 
 Age gradually relaxes the tension of the whole system ; 
 the eye, therefore, suffers in a corresponding ratio. The 
 cornea becomes less prominent: — the convexity of the 
 lens is also diminished, and the rays of light are conse- 
 quently less convergent than formerly. The picture of 
 the object is faint, because the rays have a tendency, by 
 their divergency, to impinge at a supposable plane, be- 
 yond the retina. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 229 
 
 Fig. 90. 
 
 In this figure is represented the effect of old age on the humors; 
 without the intervention of the glass A, the rays have a direction 
 which would form the image at some distance beyond the retina , as 
 at B. But, by the convex glass A, which, for example, is the spec- 
 tacle worn by aged people, (he direction of the rays of light is so 
 corrected, that the image falls accurately on the bottom of the eve, 
 or retina. 
 
 When the convex lens is interposed between the eye 
 and object, as represented in the above diagram, the rays 
 are made more converging, — so that the picture strikes 
 exactly and distinctly on the nerve. People slide their 
 spectacles on the nose unconsciously till the true focus is 
 procured. 
 
 WHY DO NEAR-SIGHTED PERSONS SEE INDISTINCTLY? 
 
 Either the crystaline lens, but more generally the cor- 
 nea, is too prominent — converging the light too sudden- 
 ly ; — that is, converging the luminous rays at an unnatural 
 place within the vitreous humor. An indistinct outline of 
 the object is the effect of their great divergency, after 
 decussating — before they arrive at the retina. The fol- 
 lowing diagrams will illustrate the subject far better than 
 a whole volume of written explanations. 
 
 Fig. 91. 
 
 20 
 
230 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 91. 
 
 In this figure, the convexity of the cornea, or the focal powers 
 of the lens, being too great for the length of the axis of the eye, the 
 image is formed at A, before the rays reach the surface of the retina, 
 or inner box, illustrated in Fig. 81, letter c ; and after coming accu- 
 rately to the point, they again begin to diverge ; which diverging 
 rays, striking the surface of the retina, give the indistinct vision of 
 the near-sighted individual. But as this indistinctness of vision 
 proceeds from no opacity, but only the disproportion of the convexity 
 of the eye to the diameter, the defect is corrected by a concave glass, 
 represented in the next figure. 
 
 Concave glasses are the restoratives of the near-sighted 
 eye, by separating the rays, and carrying the image so 
 far back as to place it on the retina. Old age, the de- 
 struction of the first eye, eventually restores the near- 
 sighted, by the gradual flattening of the cornea, till at 
 threescore and ten such persons can see clearly and 
 distinctly without artificial aid. Many near-sighted people 
 totally ruin the organ by prematurely wearing glasses, as 
 a focus is established which neither glasses can keep 
 pace with in age, nor age thoroughly overcome. 
 
 Explanations of Fig. 92. 
 
 The effect of this glass being exactly the reverse of the convex, 
 it causes the rays to fall upon the surface of the eye, so far diverg- 
 ing from the perpendicular line, as to correct the too great converg- 
 ence, caused by the convexity of the humors. When a near-sighted 
 person has brought the object near enough (o the eye to see it dis- 
 tinctly, he sees more minutely and consequently more clearly, 
 because he sees the object larger, and as a person with a common 
 eye does, when assisted with a magnifying glass. A near-sighted 
 person sees distant objects indistinctly, and, as the eye, in conse- 
 quence, rests with less accuracy upon surrounding objects, the 
 piercing look of the eye is very much diminished; and it has, more- 
 over, a dulness and heaviness of aspect. Again, the near-sighted 
 person knits his eye-brows, and half closes the eye-lids y this he 
 does unconsciously, to change the direction of the rays, and to cor- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 231 
 
 rect the inaccuracy of the image. Near-sighted people have but 
 little expression ; the countenance loses all its dignity, by habitually 
 wearing glasses. 
 
 THE IMAGE OF AN OBJECT IN THE EYE, IS INVERTED. 
 
 Rays of light going from the upper and lower points of 
 an object, are refracted towards the perpendicular : that is, 
 bent out of the course which they have a tendency to 
 run, by the crystaline lens behind, where they unite in 
 a point, — and, then crossing, diverge again. Here then, 
 the image is bottom upward, as will be noticed in the 
 preceding diagrams by the arrow', and its image on the 
 retina. Decussation is indispensable to the vision of 
 things. An object could not be represented on a point ; 
 there must be surface to create an image on, and by the 
 laws of optics, the representation of the object, without an 
 additional glass within the eye, must necessarily be as it 
 is — bottom upward. 
 
 THE OBJECT APPEARS IN ITS TRUE POSITION. 
 
 Habit is supposed to be the cause of seeing objects as 
 they really exist in relation to surrounding bodies. An 
 attempt has been made to prove that the cornea is the true 
 seat of vision, and that we see by means of erect and re- 
 flected, and not by refracted and inverted images. A few 
 philosophers conceive that the mind contemplates the ob- 
 ject only, without reference to its representative on the 
 retina, which is made there as a natural result. Certain 
 it is, that without the image, there is no vision. 
 
 How the brain is operated upon by the light that de- 
 fines the object, will probably never be known. The 
 minuteness of the picture traced on the retina, precisely 
 like the object in every minute particular, is truly aston- 
 ishing. By cutting off the coats of a bullock’s eye and 
 
232 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 holding a clean white paper near, this beautiful exhibition 
 can be leisurely observed. If a sheet of white cotton cloth, 
 six feet square, is elevated 24,000 feet in the air, the eye 
 being supposed one inch in diameter, the miniature of the 
 cloth on the retina will be only one eight thousandth part 
 of an inch square ; which is equivalent to the 666th part 
 of a line, — being only the 66th part of the width of a 
 common hair ! 
 
 WITH BOTH EYES ON Ll r ONE OBJECT IS SEEN. 
 
 At one side of the centre of each eye, there is a surface 
 more susceptible of visual impressions than any other. 
 These points correspond in both eyes — being precisely 
 on the two retinas alike. An impression therefore on one, 
 provided the light strikes them equally, produces precisely 
 the same effect on both. This, instead of making vexa- 
 tion, gives strength and greater vividness, as the images 
 are on surfaces of the same structure, transmitting, through 
 the two optic nerves, the same idea, or that indescribable 
 something that creates an idea. The optic axes, by this 
 explanation, will be understood. If one eye is distorted, 
 — pressed by the finger one side, when we are in the act 
 of contemplating an object, it will appear double, but less 
 distinct in the one so distorted. The rationale is this ; 
 viz. the visual surface on which the image is made, so 
 exactly alike in both eyes, as to call up but one idea, being 
 forced out of the optic axis, the rays still make the pic- 
 ture, but on a surface, less highly organized, — that does 
 not correspond with the surface on that retina which has 
 not been disturbed. The two images have now different 
 localities. No course of experiments are more within the 
 reach of the scholar. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 233 
 
 Fig. 93. 
 
 the same relation to the retinas 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 93. 
 
 In this figure, B, B. the eyes; 
 having their axes directed to A, 
 will see the object C, double, some- 
 where near the outline D, D. Be- 
 cause the line of the direction of 
 the rays from C, do not strike the 
 retina in the same relation to the 
 axis A, B, in both eyes. If a can- 
 dle is placed at the distance of ten 
 feet, and I hold my finger at arm’s 
 length, between the eye and the 
 candle, when I look at the candle, 
 my finger appears double, and 
 when I look at the finger, the can- 
 dle is double. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 94. 
 
 A is exactly in the centre of the 
 axes of both eyes ; consequently it 
 is distinctly seen, and it also ap- 
 pears single, because the form of it 
 strikes upon the points of the retina, 
 opposite to the pupils in both eyes. 
 Those points have a correspond- 
 ence, and the object is strengthened 
 in the liveliness of the image. 
 Again, the object B will be seen 
 fainter, but single and correct. It 
 will appear so because there is only 
 one spot in each eye, which pos- 
 sesses the degree of sensibility ne- 
 cessary to perfect vi-ion; thus, it 
 will be understood, the object will 
 appear single, as the rays of light 
 proceeding from it have exactly 
 in both eyes. 
 
 CROSS-EyED PERSONS SEE ONLY WITH ONE EYE. 
 
 With such as have a permanent squint, (cross-eye,) only 
 one eye is attended to, though they may not be apprehen- 
 sive of the fact. From continued neglect, the distorted 
 organ wanders farther and farther from the axis of vision, 
 20 * 
 
234 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 till it finally becomes totally useless: hence one is doubt- 
 ful, at times, which way the cross-eyed person is looking, 
 from a want of parallelism in the motions of the eyes. 
 When the wandering eye is exclusively attended to, the 
 vision appears unimpaired. The image is well painted in 
 the natural one, but weak in the other, solely because the 
 place of the image does not correspond with the place of 
 the image in the first. The mind, instinctively, therefore, 
 is devoted to the eye that gives the liveliest impression, to 
 the entire neglect of its aberrating fellow. 
 
 THE PUPILS OF AN ALBINO’S EYES ARE RED. 
 
 If a person is born without the pigmentum nigrum , — 
 which is the paint to suffocate all unnecessary light, after 
 the image is formed, — the blood vessels of which the 
 tunica choroides or second coat is made, are not hidden ; 
 consequently, they show through the transparent humors, 
 like a sparkling red gem, the size of the diameter of the 
 pupil. Such persons can see better in a weak light than 
 in broad day, because the brightness of the sun’s light 
 dazzles, and produces a tremulous motion in the whole or- 
 gan. As an evidence that this redness is caused by the 
 blood in the vessels, after death, when it coagulates, the 
 redness in a great measure disappears. White rabbits, 
 white mice, besides a vast variety of birds, have no pig- 
 ment on the choroides, and are therefore distinguished for 
 red pupils. The existence of the pigmentum nigrum, is 
 an evidence of a day-seeing eye. In man the want of it, 
 constituting the albino, is an anomaly. 
 
 A morbid action of the absorbents sorhetimes removes 
 the paint, and the pupil, to the surprise of observers, be- 
 comes scarlet. A partial absorption of it is often the 
 cause of a diminution of the original powers of vision . 
 under such circumstances, the pupil assumes a bronze 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 235 
 
 hue, accompanied by a debility and tremor of the globe 
 under the influence of a moderate degree of light. 
 
 MANY ANIMALS SEE IN THE DARK. 
 
 Owls, fishes, cats, bats, &c, instead of the pigmentum 
 nigrum, have a silvery paint of a metallic lustre, where 
 others have the black paint, which operates like a concave 
 mirror, in reflecting the light from point to point, within 
 the eye, illuminating it, till its concentration excites the 
 retina to perceive. When viewing a cat’s eyes in the re- 
 mote part of a dark room, there are certain positions, in 
 which they are seen by the observer, by the reflected light 
 within themselves, as though they were phosphorescent : 
 their brilliancy is very peculiar. Upon the principle of a 
 looking-glass behind the retina, all the night prowling an- 
 imals are qualified for seeing with those few rays of light, 
 which the constitution of their eyes is formed for collect- 
 ing in the dark. By daylight, they perceive objects, as 
 man does in the dark, indistinctly. 
 
 Nature is remarkably economical in the use of matter 
 which enters into the composition of animal bodies. Jf a 
 man be kept a long time in a perfectly dark room, the 
 black pigment is taken away; but a compensation is giv- 
 en him, for he can then see as perfectly in the dark, as he 
 could before in the light. On the other hand, the paint 
 is deposited again when he is restored to the light of day. 
 This point has been decided in the persons of state pris- 
 oners kept in the dungeons of European despots. 
 
 FISHES CANNOT SEE IN AIR AS WELL AS IN WATER. 
 
 When the rays of light pass from a rarer to a denser 
 medium, as from air into the aqueous humor of the eye, 
 they are refracted towards the perpendicular. Now the 
 fish has but a drop as it were, of aqueous humor, and, 
 
236 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 moreover, the light arrives at its eyes through the whole 
 body of water above. The light is refracted only in a 
 small degree in entering its eye, because the humor is of 
 the same density of the fluid through which the light is 
 transmitted. The cornea is quite flat ; if it were promi- 
 nent, like the human eye, the sphere of vision would be 
 too circumscribed; — but by giving a prominence to the 
 whole, and placing the crystal ine lens in the fore part 
 of the eye, they have a long diameter, — and with the 
 provision of a large pupil, are completely fitted for seeing 
 in the element in which they were destined to live. With 
 an eye of this description they must necessarily see in air, 
 as other animals see in water. 
 
 Those animals whose eyes are organized for seeing in 
 water, see but indifferently in air. Hence, in those cases 
 where the habits of the animal require it to see in both 
 elements it is provided with two sets of eyes, or with eyes 
 accommodated for seeing in both. 
 
 It cannot be denied, that, in general, land animals can 
 see under water, and aquatic animals in air; even man 
 sees under water, although the contrary has been main- 
 tained. It is not, however, possible that the same eye is 
 ever so organized as to see equally well in both elements. 
 Land animals always see indifferently in water, and 
 aquatic animals imperfectly in air. The one is long- 
 sighted in water, and the other short-sighted in air. An 
 animal in which the eye is adapted for seeing equally well 
 in air and water, can have but imperfect vision in either. 
 These conclusions are in conformity with what is known 
 of the power of vision in those animals which live partly 
 on the land and partly in the water. The seal lives in 
 both elements; but it has but imperfect vision in the air. 
 
 We have the most satisfactory evidence of the short- 
 sightedness of seals, from a series of experiments and ob- 
 servations, made in Boston harbor. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 237 
 
 As a light looses more of its power in passing through 
 water, than in passing through air, and is still more weak- 
 ened in its progress through the membranes, it follows, 
 that owing to this cause, vision must be less distinct un- 
 der water than in the air. 
 
 MAN CANNOT SEE DISTINCTLY UNDER WATER. 
 
 A man under water, sees objects as a very aged per- 
 son sees through a concave glass, placed close to the eye. 
 The fish is long-sighted under water, and man is short- 
 sighted. If he uses spectacles, whose convexity is just 
 equal on both sides to the cornea of his own eye, he will 
 see under water distinctly. The necessity of this is ob- 
 vious ; the aqueous humor is of the same density with the 
 water, and there cannot, therefore, be any refraction of 
 the rays in passing from the water into the land-seeing 
 eye. 
 
 Euclid supposed that vision was occasioned by the 
 emission of rays from the eye to the object. He thought 
 it more natural to suppose that an animate substance gave 
 an emanation, than that an inanimate one did. In 1560, 
 the opinion that the rays entered the eye, was established. 
 Kepler, in 1600, showed, geometrically, how the rays 
 were refracted through all the humors, so as to form a dis- 
 stinct picture on the retina ; and he also demonstrated 
 the effect of glasses on the eyes. 
 
 HOW DOES THE EYE ADAPT ITSELF TO THE DISTANCE OF 
 OBJECTS. 
 
 No one has satisfactorily answered this question. One 
 philosopher supposes the eye at rest, when we" examine a 
 distant object, as a mountain, the spire of a church, or a 
 landscape, but, that in the act of seeing near objects, 
 there is an effort. It has been supposed that this effort 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 238 
 
 is the action of the straight muscles, exhibited in the first 
 plan of the cordage of the eye, compressing the globe, so 
 equally, as to elongate the eye, and lengthen the axis, so 
 much, as to favor the union of the pencils of rays on the 
 retina. This could not take place in many aquatic ani- 
 mals, in whose eyes the sclerotica is perfect bone. 
 
 Another opinion is, that the eye is at rest in looking at 
 near objects, and laboring, when viewing things at a dis- 
 tance. Another is of the opinion that the iris contracts, 
 and so draws the circular margin of the cornea towards 
 the pupil, as to make it more or less convex, according 
 to circumstances. A great variety of experiments have 
 been instituted, to determine, accurately, whether there 
 really is any change made in the length of the axis of the 
 eye-ball or not, but none of them can be certainly relied 
 upon. A favorite theory has had its advocates, that the 
 crystaline lens has an inherent power of altering its de- 
 gree of convexity ; and thus accommodates the eye to all 
 distances. The truth is, an action takes place in the eye, 
 in adapting itself to near and distant objects, which de- 
 pends on that vital property of a living system, which no 
 theory can reach, and which the deductions of human 
 philosophy can never with certainty explain. 
 
 / 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 239 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 How many coats has the eye ? 
 
 What is the cornea ? 
 
 How many humors has the eye ? 
 
 What is the office of the lens ? 
 
 What is the retina ? 
 
 What do you understand by the pupil ? 
 
 Where is the iris located ? 
 
 What is the use of the ciliary process ? 
 
 Where is the pigment found ? 
 
 Why is the pupil red in the albino ? 
 
 What is the function of the iris ? 
 
 Why is but one object seen with both eyes ? 
 
 What is the cause of squinting ? 
 
 How are some animals able to see in the dark ? 
 
 Why cannot a man see under water? 
 
 Why are convex spectacles necessary for the aged ? 
 What causes near-sightedness ? 
 
 On what does the color of the eye depend? 
 
 What is the position of the image on the retina ? 
 How does the eye alter its focus ? 
 
 What is the use of the aqueous humor ? 
 
 On what does the brilliancy of the organ depend ? 
 Where are the tears secreted ? 
 
 What is the effect of distorting one eye ? 
 
 How many muscles are attached to the globe ? 
 
240 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 FEELING, OR TOUCH. 
 
 Touch is a sensation excited by the contact of bod- 
 ies, by which we are enabled to appreciate their various 
 qualities, as hard, soft, — heat, cold, wet and dry. The 
 immediate seat of this sense, is at the point where the 
 nerves terminate in little papillae, and therefore most per- 
 fect at the points of the fingers. This sense is undergoing 
 incessant changes, from infancy to age. 
 
 That general sense of feeling over all the surface of the 
 body, by which we can designate the forms and other 
 characters of substances brought in contact with the skin, 
 we define to be perception. 
 
 SMELLING. 
 
 Perhaps the sense of smelling is of the least conse- 
 quence to man, of all his senses : nature designed it and 
 placed it as a safeguard over the stomach, — to detect the 
 hurtful from the wholesome food, — and in savages it an- 
 swers this purpose, being always in requisition. In civil- 
 ized life, however, it is of very little consequence. Its 
 importance to brutes is manifested continually. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 241 
 
 T A S T I NG. 
 
 This sense resides in the tongue, on which the gustatory 
 nerve terminates, in the form of very small tubercles, be- 
 ginning at the point and reaching quite into the throat. By 
 it we distinguish certain qualities, as sioeet , sour, bitter, 
 acrid, &c. Before the sensation is complete, the sub- 
 stance is necessarily dissolved in the saliva of the mouth, 
 by which means it is uniformly presented to the nervous 
 papillae. 
 
 21 
 
242 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 THE GLANDS, 
 
 OR ADENOLOGY. 
 
 Glands are generally round, fatty bodies, placed at short 
 distances both internally and externally, — whose function 
 is either to secrete a fluid, or change the quality of that 
 which has been collected by another gland in the neigh- 
 borhood. Thus, the salivary glands about the inside of 
 the cheek, and below the tongue, secrete the saliva of the 
 mouth. The lachrymal glands secrete the tears, and the 
 mucus glands secrete mucus. Their importance in the 
 animal economy is very great. Tumefactions, or sudden 
 swellings of glands by severe colds, indicate, by the de- 
 rangement they cause to other organs, their high con- 
 sequence. 
 
 INTERNAL ORGANS, OR SPLANCHNOLOGY. 
 
 Under this division, is embraced the viscera or con- 
 tents of the three great cavities, viz, in the head, chest 
 and abdomen. Of the contents of the skull, we have al- 
 ready treated. 
 
 VISCERA OF TIIE THORAX. 
 
 Within the thorax or chest which is bounded by the 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 243 
 
 neck above and the diaphragm or midrif below, are con- 
 tained the following organs, viz ; the pleura , lungs, heart , 
 thymus gland, (Esophagus, thoracic duct, arch of the aorta, 
 branches of the cava, vena azygos, eight pair of nerves and 
 part of the sympathetic nerve. 
 
 PLEURA. 
 
 Two membranous sacks are lodged in the chest, one 
 on either side, attached closely to the ribs, but their sides 
 meeting in the middle, under the breast bone, unite and 
 form a partition, called mediastinum. Thus the chest is 
 lined, so that each lung has an independent apartment. 
 
 The heart, enclosed in its case, lies in a triangular 
 space between the two lungs. 
 
 DIAPHRAGM. 
 
 This is nearly a horizontal partition between the chest 
 and abdomen, and is perfectly muscular. Its border ad- 
 heres to the ribs, breast bone and spine. Through it, 
 near the spine, are openings for the passage of the swal- 
 low, blood-vessels and nerves. 
 
 The diaphragm is a muscle of respiratiom, — rising up- 
 ward, as the lungs collapse, and falling down again, as the 
 lungs become inflated. 
 
 LUNGS. 
 
 There are two membranous organs, by which breath 
 ing is effected. The physiology of the function of the 
 lungs has been considered, in detail with the circulation 
 of the blood. They are divided into right and left : the 
 right lung has three lobes, but the left, only two. They 
 seem to be made up of a spongy substance, air tubes and 
 blood-vessels. Their use cannot be misapprehended. 
 
244 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 By respiration is meant the ingress of air into the lungs, 
 and by expiration its egress from them. 
 
 Voluntary respiration depends upon the will, when we 
 are awake, but spontaneous, is the respiration of sleep. 
 It is thought that the exciting cause of the process, is the 
 irritation of the nerves in the air cells, which by a consent 
 of parts, gains the assistance of the diaphragm and inter- 
 costal muscles and vibs, to expel it. The object of respi- 
 ration, is the oxygenation of the blood. Though the vital 
 temperature of the body cannot be readily accounted for, 
 it is generally admitted that heat is developed by the action 
 of the atmospheric air on the volume of blood exposed to 
 its influence with the air cells. 
 
 As an introduction to a description of the vocal apparatus 
 of man, and other animals, it seems necessary, first, to 
 explain both the process of breathing, and its necessity, 
 in the animal economy : because, in the sequel it will be 
 apparent, that without lungs, there could be no voice. 
 
 Such is the constitution of every living creature, that a 
 free use of atmospheric air is absolutely necessary for sus- 
 taining life. The mere circumstance of being surrounded 
 by air is not sufficient ; if it were, there would be various 
 ingenious devices for maintaining life, after the lungs 
 were rendered useless by disease or accident. 
 
 It is absolutely necessary that air should be taken into 
 the system, and brougJat in contact with the moving blood. 
 The various modes by which nature has accomplished 
 this, in the mechanism of some animals, will now be con- 
 sidered. 
 
 If Spallanzani and some others are to be credited, in 
 their accounts of what they discovered by the microscope, 
 we have the first plan of a breathing structure. Spallan- 
 zani, pretended he saw the respiration of animalcules in 
 vinegar. They were shaped like stars, and in the centre 
 of each were two dark globular spots, one of which he con- 
 ceived to be the heart pulsating, and the other the lungs. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 245 
 
 Every two or three seconds, to use his own words, they 
 were slowly blown up, three or four times their natural 
 size, and then slowly compressed again. A modern phy- 
 siologist remarks, that the Abbe must have forgotten him- 
 self in assigning them lungs, for they were evidently 
 aquatic animals, and therefore did not require them. 
 
 Passing by the microscope let us examine something 
 more tangible, — the families of insects. They are so 
 organised that in proportion to their bulk, they require a 
 prodigious supply of air. The heart is the only percepti- 
 ble organ in flies and worms : how their breathing organs 
 are constructed, we are totally ignorant. 
 
 But pertaining to that apparatus, the existence of which 
 cannot be questioned, are an immense number of air tubes, 
 coursing over and through every part of them, distinguish- 
 able with the naked eye, resembling white lines. It is 
 necessary that these be always distended. They open, 
 generally, with free mouths, on the sides of the body, and 
 wherever there is a ring or line, it marks the place of one 
 of them. 
 
 In worms, it also appears necessary that the air holes or 
 spirucula, be perfectly free and open. The moment a little 
 varnish is applied, ever so delicately, to the last holes, that 
 portion towards the tail is paralyzed. By closing the next 
 two, another ring is palsied ; if all but the two last, to- 
 wards the head are closed, it still lives, though it cannot 
 move : but when the last of the series are closed, it dies 
 immediately. 
 
 Some vermin require more air, judging from analogy, 
 than others much superior in size. So variously are the 
 tubes ramified, that the viscera appears to occupy only 
 about one fifth of the whole internal cavity. 
 
 Before insects arrive to their perfect state of existence, 
 they are destined to undergo several interesting changes. 
 First they are worms, ordinarily of a loathsome and dis- 
 21 * 
 
246 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLjfSS BOOK. 
 
 gusting appearance ; and lastly, a beautiful winged insect, 
 the object of peculiar admiration. In this change, there 
 is nothing discoverable to the philosopher like the death 
 and resurrection of the insect, so often the theme of 
 writers. It does not die, while undergoing the change, 
 if it did, the process would never be perfected : close the 
 spiracula and there is forever an end to its existence. 
 
 While the caterpillar crawls on its numerous feet, un- 
 der its coarse, hairy skin, it has six legs, inimitably folded 
 next the body ; — two pair of wings, that only require the 
 sun’s rays to astonish us with the beauty of their coloring ; 
 and a proboscis, nicely packed away, to sip the honey 
 which will be its future food. The period finally arrives, 
 when a development of these embryo organs is about to 
 take place. Some inscrutable sensation, of which the 
 worm appears to have an instinctive knowledge, as it 
 seeks a quiet, safe and warm retreat, gives it a timely 
 warning. The old covering becomes dry and dark ; the 
 fluids cease to circulate in it, and gradually, as the legs 
 and wings gain freedom within, they push it entirely off ; 
 — thus disentangled, it flits away on its untried wings, 
 from flower to flower. 
 
 While the skin was drying, the worm breathed as it 
 did before, through the air holes of the old covering. 
 
 Insects, it is supposed, never breathe by the mouth. 
 The nymphae of gnats can raise themselves to the sutface 
 of a pool, and breathe by an orifice in their backs. The 
 hydrocanthiri breathe by thrusting their tails out of water. 
 Bugs, flies and worms which live in filth, ditches, and 
 deep under ground, breathe the pure air which is in their 
 air tubes, and when it is exhausted, they travel near 
 enough to the surface to replenish their stock. But the 
 maggot of the eruca labra has the most extraordinary ap- 
 paratus imaginable. It shoots from its tail, a tube, resem- 
 bling the slides of a spyglass, — one beyond another. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 247 
 
 The last has a star-like tuft on the end, which unfolding 
 on the water, enables it, thus buoyed up^to breathe freely, 
 while it floats about at pleasure, — in search of food. 
 
 Fishes are without lungs, and yet they require a constant 
 supply of air, though in a lesser quantity than animals with 
 a double heart. Such is their peculiarity of structure, 
 that they breathe a mixture of air and water together. 
 The gills enable them to perform this process. Deprive 
 water of its air, and the fish dies as soon as it would out 
 of water. The free exposure of the gills to water is not 
 sufficient : it is necessary to propel the water through them 
 forcibly. If the feathery gills of a small perch could be 
 unfolded and spread, it is not improbable that they would 
 cover a square yard. This will not appear so extraordinary, 
 when it is recollected that the nerve in a dog’s nose, is 
 spread into so thin a web, that it is computed to be four 
 yards square. Observe the wonderful economy of nature ; 
 this web is so rolled up, like a scroll of parchment, that it 
 could be packed away in a lady’s thimble. 
 
 Nearly one third of all the blood is exposed to the ac- 
 tion of the air, in the gills, at the same time. The fish 
 draws in a mouthful of water, and with a quick motion, by 
 closing the jaws, drives it through the gills, and this im- 
 parts vitality, and restores the red color to the dark blood 
 of the veins. 
 
 Various tribes of fishes which seek their food in the 
 mud, and foetid, turbid water, have a striking provision for 
 defending their gills; otherwise they would become clog- 
 ged, and breathing would be interrupted by the very filth 
 in which they were actually created to live. Their gills 
 are small, and covered by the common skin of the body. 
 The water is taken at the mouth, and driven with the 
 same force, as in the other case, but emptied through 
 holes on each side of the neck, just back of the jaws. 
 The force is always sufficient, by dividing the water into 
 
248 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 distinct portions, to keep the openings completely clear. 
 In fact, the action is like that of an apothecary’s syringe. 
 A familiar example of this sort of animal mechanism may 
 be seen in the lamprey eel. 
 
 A similar breathing apparatus is provided for shell fishes, 
 having, however, an additional contrivance, by which they 
 can live a considerable time out of water. Here let the 
 mechanism be particularly noticed, and admired too, as 
 the first step towards a terrestrial animal. As those in- 
 habiting salt water are necessarily exposed, by the reced- 
 ing of tides, without a limb to assist them in regaining 
 their home, and so organized with extensive gills, encir- 
 cling two thirds the circumference of the shell, that they 
 cannot breathe air, their apparently helpless condition has 
 been provided for in this interesting manner ; viz. they 
 are furnished with a long elastic pipe, which is a reservoir 
 for water. At necessary intervals, the fish ejects a drop 
 with surprising force, through the fringes of the gills, and 
 then remains quiet, till some instinctive sensation warns it 
 of the necessity of again working its forcing pump. Being 
 cold blooded, that is, having the single heart, one throw 
 of the brake suffices for a long time. 
 
 In travelling over a clam bed, at low tide, the tremor 
 communicated to the fish, apprises it of approaching dan- 
 ger, — and the nearer the observer advances, the more 
 distinctly can he witness the amazing projectile force with 
 which the clam drives a little column of water up through 
 the sand. 
 
 This is only part of the contents of the tube. Nothing 
 but continued irritation will induce the clam to part with 
 the remainder, — - which is noticed, in digging, just as the 
 shell is exposed to the light. 
 
 By this reserved fund, it can live many days, in open 
 air. It is by this tube of water, that the oyster is kept 
 alive in the shops. As the exposure in the open air, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 249 
 
 weakens its system, it recruits itself, by jetting a drop of 
 water through its gills. This drop may be seen morning 
 after morning, on a dry board : — but when the reservoir 
 is wholly exhausted, it opens its shell, fearless of conse- 
 quences, and seeks in despair, wherever it can reach, a 
 fountain, to replenish its engine : — thus it languishes, 
 and at last dies, a protracted death, in search of its ac- 
 customed element. 
 
 No class of animals are more wonderful on the other 
 hand, than the amphibious. They live alternately in two 
 elements, — hearing and seeing tolerably well in both. 
 The structure of some of their organs of sense, have 
 already been considered. But it is not true, as too gene- 
 rally believed, that they alternately respire air and water, 
 or a mixture of both. They are cold blooded animals, it 
 is true, with a single heart — as, for example, the frog 
 and aquatic lizards. The water seems to be their peculiar 
 element, but after all, they breathe the air exclusively. 
 They constitutionally require only a small quantity of 
 oxygen, or vital air, to sustain life, and keep the machinery 
 in operation. They have lungs, but they have but a faint re- 
 semblance to those having warm blood, with a double heart. 
 
 Their lungs are merely membranous bags or cylinders, 
 which in their dry, prepared state, appear like bubbles of 
 froth. The next extraordinary circumstance is this — 
 that breathing is an act depending on the will ; that is, 
 they can breathe regularly, at short intervals, for days 
 together, or they can stop the respiratory process for hours, 
 or perhaps days, and continue equally vigorous. 
 
 Fishes, we have seen, force the water through their 
 gills: the same process of forcing air into these membra- 
 nous tubes, is accomplished in amphibious animals, by a 
 very little additional mechanism — the mouth acts precisely 
 like a bellows. The jaws are grooved above and below, 
 that they may be air tight, and a slit, acting like a valve, 
 is placed at the root of the tongue, over the wind-pipe 
 
250 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 leading to the lungs. Let it be recollected that the mouth 
 is never opened, except for food: the air is drawn in 
 
 through very small nostrils, which in the frog and neut, 
 are not larger than cambric needles. The animal slowly 
 draws its mouth full of air, and when sufficiently distend- 
 ed, forces it through the valve, hy the skin, which looks 
 like a pouch under the lower jaw. 
 
 The lungs being full, give additional size to the body. 
 The abdominal muscles re-act and slowly press it out 
 again, and thus we have an example of the mode by which 
 this class of animals breathe. 
 
 If the frog’s mouth be kept open with a prop, it will 
 inevitably die, as there is no power by which it can inhale 
 air, short of the bellows of its jaws. It requires no phi- 
 losophy, after becoming acquainted with these interesting 
 facts, to account for their large mouths and broad jaws. 
 No other shape or structure would so completely consti- 
 tute the bellows. 
 
 Neuts, lizards and the camelion’s lungs, are cylinders, 
 running down the sides of their bodies, the whole length, 
 and as they force in the air precisely by the same process, 
 it will explain the reason of their appearing fat at one 
 time, or thin and lank at another. When irritated, or in 
 fear, they blow up their bodies to frightful dimensions, to 
 appear more formidable, upon the same instinctive princi- 
 ple that cats, dogs, hedgehogs and fowls, bristle up their 
 covering at the approach of an enemy, superior to them in 
 strength. 
 
 The different colors with which the cantelion so readily 
 dresses itself, depend on this peculiarity of its lungs. The 
 skin is covered with an exquisitely fine covering, like vel- 
 vet. If the lungs be filled to a certain extent the swelling 
 of the body erects the fleece, so that the manner in which 
 the light strikes it, makes the animal appear green, white, 
 or of other colors: another blast into the lungs, gives 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 251 
 
 another inclination to the fleece, and it has another tint. 
 When, by irritation, its body is blown up to its greatest 
 dimensions, various modifications of these colors are 
 exhibited. 
 
 From this tribe of reptiles, the first advance is made 
 towards endowing animals with the power of producing 
 vocal sounds. The water is only capable of propagating 
 a vibration, but that with great certainty and strength, and 
 nature has constructed an ear, suited to the element and 
 the habits of all aquatic beings. To have bestowed an 
 ear, susceptible of receiving the modification of sound, 
 would have been superfluous, inasmuch as the modifica- 
 tions are alone effected in the vocal box of those breath- 
 ing air. 
 
 The atmosphere is the medium of modified sound : it 
 is an elastic medium which can be put in motion by the 
 vibration of solid bodies. It is a medium, which, when 
 set in motion by a mechanical contrivance of the greatest 
 apparent simplicity, transmits the wants of animals, in 
 what is denominated its natural cry, and in man, expresses 
 not only his wants, his pleasures, and his pains, but all his 
 thoughts, — because his voice represents ideas. Lan- 
 guage, therefore, is the symbol of thought. 
 
 The voice of all animals remains the same through 
 endless generations, unless the vocal apparatus is artificial- 
 ly altered. Indeed the vocal organs are so constituted, 
 that they admit of little variety in their movements: — 
 every succeeding class, however, exhibits an additional 
 muscle, a bone, or some difference in the shape of the 
 tongue, giving it the power of either making one more 
 sound than the race below, or some modulation of the 
 original tone. Were it not for this progression in the con- 
 trivance, the voice of all animals would be precisely the 
 same, like sounding one note continually on a musical 
 instrument. 
 
252 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Let us examine another curious mode of respiration, 
 peculiar to birds. Although there is an external resem- 
 blance, in the shape of their bones, to quadrupeds, and 
 the muscles Avhich move them are similarly arranged, to 
 effect a circle of motions, their structure has reference to 
 their wafting themselves through the air. 
 
 In the first place, the long bones are without marrow — 
 being hollow tubes, filled with air, these actually have 
 openings communicating with the lungs. At their further 
 extremities they permit the air to circulate into the ends 
 of each feather; — and lastly, the body has large apart- 
 ments exclusively appropriated for the reception of the 
 same air. Their lungs, unlike the light frothy tube of 
 reptiles, is spongy and gorged with blood, and totally un- 
 like those belonging to any other animal. In the bird, 
 the lungs are open at each end,' and are so closely tied 
 down to the back bone and ribs, that they admit of little 
 or no distention or contraction. 
 
 Their breathing is effected in the following manner; 
 viz, the air is drawn into the vacuum caused by the 
 pressure of the strong muscles of the abdomen. In other 
 words, the weight of the atmosphere forces it in, so 
 that the current rushes through the whole length of the 
 lungs, where the blood is waiting for its appearance, and 
 passes to the extremities of all the bones and feathers. 
 The proper change being wrought in the venous blood, it is 
 circulated again to the heart, while the muscles again 
 empty the lungs and air cells, contiguous, by a general 
 compression of the whole. Here is discoverable the me- 
 chanism for producing voice, seen in its elements in the 
 frog, improved upon, by additional cords and vibrating 
 cartilages, susceptible of receiving a current of air, in a 
 manner a little different, to produce one, two or three 
 different tones. 
 
 Lastly, nature has effected respiration by a more com- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 253 
 
 plex piece of mechanism, in those animals whose bodies 
 are divided into two apartments by the diaphragm. 
 
 A difference of structure does not appear in the air cells 
 of the lungs of about forty varieties of animals, including 
 man. The only circumstances observable relates to their 
 shape and subdivisions, depending on the configuration of 
 the cavity in which they are lodged. The human lungs 
 are suspended in the chest, much as they are in brutes, 
 by the wind-pipe, and so tied down at the upper part of 
 the neck, and so carefully fitted to the dimensions of the 
 box, in which they are lodged, that no position of the body 
 can throw them out of place. There is a right and a left 
 lung, perfectly independent of each other, and separated 
 by a middle partition. 
 
 Exactly in the centre of this partition, in quadrupeds, 
 the heart lies, but in man, it is on the left side, and there- 
 fore projects into the cavity of the left lung. They are 
 made up of millions of air cells, which are filled at every 
 inspiration. The blood, directly from the heart, is thrown 
 into them in prodigious quantities, and circulates so mi- 
 nutely, that each air cell is completely surrounded by a 
 sheet of dark blood. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 We shall now inspect the contrivance by which sounds 
 are produced by animals. 
 
 By voice animals have the power of making themselves 
 understood to their own species — and these sounds are 
 either articulate or inarticulate. 
 
 Language is an acquired power, having its origin in the 
 wants of more than one individual. Man, without socie- 
 ty, would only utter a natural cry, which sound would 
 express nothing but pain. 
 
 Supposing a human being to have been entirely forsaken 
 
 22 
 
254 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 by those of his species, in that stage of infancy, when he 
 could have no recollection of anything pertaining to his 
 race, his voice would, in essence, remain the cry of an 
 infant, only strengthened in tone, at a particular age, by 
 the development of the vocal organs, to their destined 
 size. 
 
 But let two individuals bs placed together, but without 
 communication or knowledge of the existence of beings 
 similar to themselves, the natural cry of each would un- 
 dergo modifications : the one would make a sound, to 
 express a particular sensation, which in time would be un- 
 derstood by the other : a repetition of the same note 
 would be the sign of that sensation in future. 
 
 An additional sensation, having an intimate connexion 
 with the first, would require a variation of tone, — and 
 this would also become a symbol of two sensations. Here 
 then would be the origin of language. Multiply the spe- 
 cies, and each new member of the society would express 
 some other sensation or want, by another modification of 
 the original cry. Here we discover the certain commence- 
 ment of a spoken language ; these different sounds becom- 
 ing classified, constitute a dictionary, in which each word 
 is the mark or sign of particular sounds; — thus, if an in- 
 dividual can imitate the sound-, or a series of sounds, he 
 masters a language. Let it be remembered that man 
 could never arrive to this perfection in sound or language, 
 if his vocal organs were not differently constructed from 
 brutes. Such is the mechanism of theirs, that so many 
 sounds, and no more, can be made ; but in man’s organs, 
 there is no limitation — no sound appreciable that he can- 
 not imitate. 
 
 THE VOCAL BOX OR LARYNX. 
 
 Directly under the integuments on the front side of the 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 255 
 
 neck, is a cartilaginous tube, the trachea or wind-pipe, 
 built up of a series of narrow strips, which are portions of 
 a ring ; therefore, it is always kept free and open. At its 
 lower end it divides into two branches, going to the lungs 
 on either side, but its upper portion is enlarged, just under 
 the chin, and finally opens in common with the tube of 
 the stomach and mouth. This enlarged part, quite promi- 
 nent in man, is the larynx or vocal organ. 
 
 Several cartilages assist in its formation, viz, the thyroid , 
 cricoid, th e arytoenoicl and the epiglottis. The cricoid is 
 the foundation ; the thyroid is the wall around it ; the ary- 
 taenoid are appendages to the back of the cricoid, and the 
 epiglottis is a valve, opening and closing the entrance into 
 the wind-pipe, like the valve of a bellows. 
 
 Explanation of Figs. 
 95. 96. 
 
 The five cartilages are. 
 
 1. The epiglottis. 
 
 2. The thyroid cartilage. 
 
 3. the cricoid auxiliary 
 and 
 
 4. The two arytsenoid 
 cartilages. 
 
 5. The two superior 
 horns of the thyroid cartil- 
 age. 
 
 6. The two inferior 
 horns. 
 
 7. The suspensory liga- 
 ment of the os hyoides. 
 
 8. The os hyoides. 
 
 9. The azj'gos ligament, 
 connecting the os hyoides 
 to the thyroid cartilage. 
 
 10. The two lateral liga- 
 ments connecting the horns of the os hyoides to the superior horns 
 of the thyroid cartilage. 
 
 One of these diagrams presents a front and the other a back view 
 of the larynx or vocal box. The hone of the tongue is seen, like 
 half of a hoop marked S, in both plans. 2 is the front of the thyroid 
 cartilage, felt under the skin — protruding in the form of an irregu- 
 lar tumor. The wind-pipe is the tube at the bottom of each larynx. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS HOOK. 
 
 256 
 
 1 he vocal cords — the membranes which vibrate to produce sound, 
 as the current of air rushes by, are concealed, being placed inside, 
 b roni the remarks in the text, together with the references, a very 
 correct idea will be formed of the structure of this curious organ. 
 By blowing through the wind-pipe of almost any animal, soon after 
 it is slain, provided the larynx has not been injured, the vocal cords 
 may be put in motion, and the sound which is produced will bear 
 considerable analogy to (he natural voice of the animal. 
 
 Within the larynx, and consequently below the valve, 
 are four delicate membranes, two on each side, put upon 
 the stretch — being in fact, like shelves, — their thin 
 edges nearly meeting from the opposite sides, so that there 
 is scarcely any space between them. These are the vocal 
 cords. 
 
 When the air rushes out from the lungs through the 
 wind-pipe, it must obviously pass through the larynx, — in 
 doing which it strikes the tense edges of the cords, and 
 produces a vibration. This vibratory motion given to the 
 current of air, produces sound. In the cavities of the 
 bones of the face, forehead and nose, its power is increased, 
 and in the mouth it undergoes further modifications, and 
 ultimately becomes articulate language. The teeth, 
 tongue, lips, nose and fauces have each an influence in 
 the production of articulate sounds. Hence grammarians 
 have arranged the human voice under the appropriate 
 divisions of guttural, nasal , dental and labial sounds, — 
 expressive of the agency which each of these organs exert 
 on the original tone. 
 
 Shrillness or roughnessof voice depends on the diameter 
 of the larynx, — its elasticity, lubricity, and the force with 
 which the expired air is propelled through the rima glot- 
 t-idis, or slit like chink, between the vocal cords. 
 
 Because the larynx is smaller in women, and more elas- 
 tic, their voice is of a different character. The breaking 
 of the voice, vox rauca, noticeable in boys, at a particu- 
 lar age, depends partly on the enlargement of the apart- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 257 
 
 ments within the bones, which generally take place at that 
 important crisis of their lives, when the whole constitution 
 undergoes a sudden change. 
 
 But the mechanism of voice would have been incom- 
 plete, were there not a number of exceedingly delicate 
 muscles, \vhich graduate the diameter of the narrow slit 
 through which the sound escapes into the mouth. Uncon- 
 sciously, they effect the requisite contractions, forever 
 varying, according to the rapidity, intensity, or strength of 
 the voice, in singing, conversation or declamation. 
 
 Finally, the larynx is a musical wind instrument, of the 
 reeded kind, on the principle of the hautboy. The near- 
 ness of the vocal cords to each other resembles the reed 
 precisely. All the tones of reeded instruments are effect- 
 ed by finger holes, — but the tones of the human voice 
 are varied by the extrinsic and intrinsic muscles, which 
 shorten or elongate the vocal tube. Thus the same re- 
 sult is produced by this process, — increasing or diminish- 
 ing the diameter of the larynx, that is accomplished in the 
 clarionet, bassoon, flute and hautboy, by a graduated 
 scale of finger holes. 
 
 Is not this another beautiful mechanical evidence of the 
 existence of a Being superior to ourselves ? 
 
 22 * 
 
258 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 THE VISCERA, 
 
 OR SPLANCHNOLOGY. 
 
 THE FOOD-PIPE, OR .ESOPHAGUS. 
 
 This is a fleshy tube, going from the back of the mouth 
 to the stomach, through the chest, lying in the neck be- 
 hind the wind-pipe. Its upper portion is called the pha- 
 rynx, or fauces, and its lower, the cardiac extremity, termi- 
 nating in the stomach. 
 
 THYMUS GLAND. 
 
 Infants and young children possess a singular gland, 
 located just behind the top of the breast bone, which has 
 the appellation of thymus gland. In adults, it is obliterated ; 
 hence it is supposed to be serviceable only in the early 
 stages of our existence. 
 
 THORACIC DUCT. 
 
 Quite low in the abdomen is found a white, ex- 
 quisitely delicate tube, which runs upward by the side 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 259 
 
 of the spine, and finally terminates by communica- 
 ting with a large vein in the angle between the neck 
 and shoulder, on the left side. All the nutritious sub- 
 stance which has been collected from the food in the in- 
 testinal tube, — now called chyle, which is white like 
 milk, is conducted to this thoracic duct, and thence car- 
 ried on to be poured directly into the circulation, to be- 
 come blood. 
 
 ABDOMEN. 
 
 Bounded by the diaphragm above, the pelvic bones be- 
 low and the muscles at the sides, the abdomen is the most 
 capacious of all the cavities. Its lining membrane is the 
 ■peritonaeum. Various organs, principally subservient to 
 digestion, are contained within it. They are the following. 
 
 OMENTUM. 
 
 Vulgarly, the omentum is the cawl, — a sort of apron 
 lying in front of the intestines, suspended mainly from the 
 stomach. 
 
 liver. 
 
 Being the largest and heaviest viscus in the body, the 
 liver has also a vast influence on the condition of the 
 whole. It is divided into right and left lobes — the right 
 is the largest, and occupies the right side, under the ribs. 
 The left lobe lies partly over the stomach, in the other 
 region. Its use is to secrete bile. 
 
260 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 Fig 97. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 261 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 97. 
 
 In this view of the abdomen, d, is the gall-bladder, lying on the 
 under side of the liver, the dark mass to which it is attached : h is 
 the coronary artery which supplies the stomach, a, b, c, with blood. 
 The curve ot the stomach is well shown: e, e, the arteries which 
 supply the cawl, marked i, i, which falls down from the front of 
 the stomach, over the intestines, like an apron : g, a vessel of the 
 liver. The pancreas is behind the stomach. 
 
 GALL BLADDER. 
 
 This is attached to the under side of the liver, shaped 
 like a shot-pouch, and contains between one and two 
 ounces of gall, which is carried to it, as a place of deposit, 
 from the liver. A long slender pipe extends from it to 
 the duodenum, the first portion of the intestines, into which 
 it pours the bile. The use of the bile is to stimulate the 
 intestines, in order to keep them at work. 
 
 SPLEEN. 
 
 Anatomists have not discovered the function of this 
 organ. Generally, however, it is admitted to be essentially 
 serviceable to the stomach. The color is red, somewhat 
 like the liver, broad as the palm of the hand, and one or 
 two inches thick. It is in contact with the stomach, in 
 the left side. 
 
 PANCREAS. 
 
 Behind the stomach, lying directly across the spine, is 
 the 'pancreas, a narrow gland, from eight to ten inches 
 long, — which secretes a fluid analogous to the saliva. 
 Through a duct, it is carried onward to be mixed with 
 the bile in the intestine. It is regarded as an auxiliary 
 to digestion. 
 
262 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 KIDNEYS. 
 
 One of these glands is placed on each side, in the loins, 
 near the spine, a little above the hips. From the trunk 
 of the aorta, the great artery of the body, two large 
 blanches are given off, nearly at right angles, to the kid- 
 neys. A quantity of blood is therefore sent directly into 
 them, from which the urine is separated, and afterwards 
 forced through the ureters, two tubes the size of a writing 
 quill, ten inches or more in length, into the under and 
 back part of the bladder. 
 
 The urine is separated from the blood by the extreme- 
 ties of the arteries within the substance of the kidney. 
 Having remained a while in the bladder, it excites a desire 
 to void it, — an action effected chiefly by the muscular 
 fibres of the bladder itself, assisted by the abdominal 
 muscles. It is prevented from returning from the bladder 
 to the-kidneys, by a valvular structure within, continually 
 closed by the presence of the fluid against the valve. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 263 
 
 Fig. 98. 
 
 ■ </rj£ 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 98. 
 
 In this, a anil b show the tendinous part of the diaphragm or par- 
 tition between the chest and abdomen : d, the kidney, with its fellow 
 
264 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 opposite ; /, the descending aorta ; h, an artery given off for the in- 
 testinal tube ; i where the great artery divides, to send a branch to 
 each leg, g, the ascending great vein, conveying blood to the right 
 side of the heart; c, the capsule, so called, belonging to the kidney, 
 the use of which is unknown; n, the ureter, a tube which conveys 
 the urine from the kidney to the under side of the bladder, where it 
 terminates : the right ureter is seen on that side, also terminating 
 in the bladder, k\ in, l, are arteries; o, is a small artery which runs 
 down on the bone, into the pelvis. 
 
 STOMACH. 
 
 Just below the diaphragm, lying nearly horizontally 
 across the top of the abdomen, is the stomach, having the 
 shape of a shot-pouch, — being large at the extremity on 
 the left side, and small where it reaches the right, under 
 the margin of the liver. It presents a curve in front and 
 shorter one on the back side, where it embraces the spine. 
 
 At the entrance of the (esophagus, the food tube from 
 the mouth at the large end of the orifice is called the car- 
 diac orifice, — because it was supposed by the early anato- 
 mists to be near the heart. Through this the food en- 
 ters the stomach ; and where it makes its exit, into the be- 
 ginning of the intestine, at the other extremity, the opening 
 is the pyloric orifice. A muscle surrounds the neck of 
 the stomach, on the inside, which holds a control over the 
 contents, allowing it to pass onward, or confining it within, 
 according to its state of preparation for digestion. 
 
 INTESTINES. 
 
 With a little variation, the whole extent of the intesti- 
 nal tube is six times the length of the body, except in in- 
 fancy, when it averages eight times the height of the 
 child. 
 
 It is divided into small and large intestines. The small 
 one is further divided into, first, the duodenum, only about 
 a foot long, commencing at the stomach : — - into this por- 
 tion the bile and pancreatic juice is delivered. Secondly, 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOIC 
 
 265 
 
 the jejunum, coiled up nearly round the navel : and third- 
 ly, the ileon, the last part of this intestine, joining the 
 ccBcum, or beginning of the large tract. Usually the diam- 
 eter of this tube is not far from one inch. 
 
 Secondly, the large intestine is divided in the caecum, a 
 large, irregular membranous sac, with a valve, that ob- 
 structs the return of whatever may have once passed it : 
 the colon, about two inches in diameter, lying near the 
 hip, at the bottom of the abdomen, on the left side, but as- 
 cending in a broad curve towards the stomach, crosses 
 the spine, and dips down into the right side, — describing 
 an arch, — hence this particular part is called the arch of 
 the colon. Finally, the rectum is the last division, a foot 
 long, terminating externally. 
 
 The inside is beset with the sharp folds of the inner 
 membrane, in the form of shelves, exceedingly numerous, 
 which are termed valvules conniventes. Their express of- 
 fice is to prevent a too rapid exit of the food, in its descent, 
 before all its nutritious substance has been taken by the 
 lacteals. 
 
 Fig. 99. 
 
 Explanation of Fig. 99. 
 
 1. The oesophagus, or swallow 
 perforating 
 
 2. The left opening of the dia- 
 phragm. 
 
 3. The cardiac orifice of the 
 stomach. 
 
 4. The small curvature of the 
 stomach. 
 
 5. The great curvature of the 
 stomach. 
 
 6. The fundus of the stomach. 
 
 7. The pyloric orifice. 
 
 8. The duodenum, divided into 
 three portions. 
 
 9. The ascending. 
 
 10. The transverse, and 
 
 11. The descending portion. 
 
 12. Thejejunum, forming three 
 
 97 17 4 
 
 23 
 
266 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 fifths of the small intestines, distinguished from the ilium in being 
 thicker, more vascular, larger, and having more valves. 
 
 13. The ilium, forming less than two fifths of the small intestines, 
 and terminating in the caecum, having two valves at the entrance. 
 
 14. The caecum, the first of the large intestines ; situated in the 
 right, having attached to it 
 
 15. The appendix vermiformis. The caecum terminating in 
 
 16. The ascending portion of the colon, which directs its course 
 from the caecum towards the stomach, connected to the right kidney 
 by a fold of the peritonaeum. 
 
 17. The arch of the colon, traversing the abdomen beneath the 
 stomach. 
 
 18. The descending portion of the colon, directing its course 
 towards the left region, connected to the left kidney by a fold of the 
 peritonaeum. 
 
 19. The sigmoid flexure of the colon, situated in the left iliac re- 
 gion, and terminating in 
 
 20. The rectum. 
 
 MESENTERY. 
 
 A duplication or fold of the peritonaeum, drawn out 
 as it were from the spine, like a ruffle, 0 , is the mesentery, 
 on the border of which the intestines adhere. By this 
 they are supported and kept in place. 
 
 Nearly in the centre, between where the mesentery 
 attaches itself to the spine and the intestine, are the me- 
 senteric glands, through which the chyle passes in its way 
 to the thoracic duct. 
 
 DIGESTION. 
 
 Perhaps no animal process has more deeply engaged 
 the attention of physiologists, than digestion. The fol- 
 lowing remarks embrace, in a few words, all that is known 
 upon the subject. 
 
 Soon after the food has been admitted into the stomach, 
 considerably softened by the saliva of the mouth and 
 throat, the extremely small arteries spread in the lining 
 membrane of the stomach, throw out a fluid which is 
 called the gastric juice, which, in addition to the muscular 
 action of the stomach, converts the whole mass into a 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 267 
 
 greyish paste. It is rolled forward to the pylorus — the 
 place of passage into the intestine, where there is mixed 
 with it the bile from the gall-bladder, and the juice from 
 the pancreas, both of which dilute it still more. The 
 muscular fibres of the first portion being strong, it agitates 
 and rolls it about, till it assumes the appearance of a thick 
 milky fluid, of the consistence of cream. 
 
 This part of the digestive process, in the first portion of 
 the intestine, is termed chy unification, and the substance 
 itself chyme. 
 
 By the peristaltic and vermicular action of the intestine, 
 it is carried onward, inch by inch, interrupted by the 
 valves, which throw it from side to side, till every particle 
 is brought into direct contact with the mouths of the lac- 
 teals, everywhere presented. Thus a prodigious extent 
 of absorbent surface is presented to it, through the entire 
 course of nearly thirty feet. 
 
 Thus, the further the chyme advances, the more closely 
 and certainly is its valuable part taken up by the countless 
 millions of lacteal vessels. They terminate in the me- 
 senteric glands, where it remains a little time, but for 
 what purpose is not precisely understood, and then, by 
 another set of ducts, the fluid is conveyed into the thoracic 
 duct, to be afterwards carried into the vein, in the neck, 
 to be mixed with the blood, and to become blood. 
 
 The final cause, therefore, of digestion, is to elaborate 
 a material for making blood, from which the whole system 
 is renewed and sustained. Whatever is useless finally 
 passes onward into the large intestine, which, in effect, is 
 a store-house, — in which its stay is temporary, depending 
 on the health, habit and condition of the individual. 
 
 Three hours after the food is masticated, as a general 
 rule, it passes through the various changes which have 
 been described. 
 
 Three coats are easily shown, in the walls of the 
 
263 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 stomach and intestines, viz. the peritoneal, the muscular 
 and the mucous. The muscular is a series of fleshy fibres, 
 fine as sewing thread, winding round the cylinder; — lon- 
 gitudinal fibres are also discoverable ; hence there are two 
 particular motions in the intestine. By the contraction of 
 the straight fibres, the intestine is gathered up in wrinkles 
 at different points, through its whole extent, and then 
 elongated again, much like the movement of a worm. By 
 the contraction of the others, it is diminished in diameter 
 at different sections : — thus they are never at rest, but 
 continually moving the chyme from place to place. The 
 first motion is the vermicular, and the second, the peris- 
 taltic. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 269 
 
 THE FLUIDS, 
 
 OR HYGROLOGY. 
 
 A variety of fluids are separated from the blood by 
 numerous organs, for various purposes, which are divided 
 into crude , sanguineous , lymphatic , secreted and excremen- 
 titious. 
 
 An example of a crude fluid is found in the chyle; the 
 sanguineous in the blood ; the lymphatic in the lymphatic 
 vessels; and the excrernentitious , are all such as are expelled 
 from the system as useless. 
 
 Again, the secreted fluids are further subdivided into 
 the lacteal, as that in the tubes between the intestines and 
 mesenteric glands ; aqueous, in the eye ; mucous, in the 
 nose ; albuminous, as the serum of the blood ; oleous, as 
 the fat , and bilious, as exemplified in the bile. 
 
 LYMPHATICS AND THEIR SECRETIONS. 
 
 Whenever a moisture exists, either externally or in the 
 obscure cavities of the body, under the skin, among the 
 muscles, in the brain, and indeed where any motion is ef- 
 fected, the lymphatics exist also, though they are invisible. 
 They take up the vapor or fluid and carry it to the tho- 
 racic cluct, to be mixed with the blood. If any nutritious 
 
 23 * 
 
270 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 matter is unnecessarily expended in any of these places, it 
 is sure to be collected again and returned to the circulation. 
 
 Without these vessels always on the alert, fluids would 
 accumulate beyond the necessities of the organs they 
 were designed to assist, which would inevitably abridge 
 the freedom of action and produce disease. 
 
 Thus, whatever is superfluous is sent back to the blood, 
 from whence, perhaps, in a majority of cases, it was taken, 
 and if of no further value, it is thrown into the kidneys, and 
 a large portion of it, therefore, is thus conveyed from the 
 body, through the agency of the urinary apparatus. 
 
 FLUIDS OF THE CRANIUM. 
 
 A vapor exhales in the ventricles of the brain, secreted 
 by the delicate arteries, to prevent an adhesion of the sides, 
 and to keep the contents of the head moist. 
 
 OF THE NOSTRILS. 
 
 Part of the mucous in these canals, are the tears passing 
 down the lachrymal duct, from the eyes, adverted to in the 
 anatomy of the eye. Beside this, a congeries of mucipa- 
 rous glands under the lining membrane, also mix their 
 secretions with them to preserve the olfactory nerves from 
 becoming dry, which would destroy their sensibility. 
 
 No fluid whatever distils from the brain into the nose, 
 as sometimes vulgarly supposed. These are the only 
 sources, even when in excessive quantity, as when labor- 
 ing under a severe cold, whence it arises. 
 
 OF THE MOUTH. 
 
 Under the tip of the tongue, the angle of each jaw, and 
 lastly, under the ear, between the jaw and neck, are large 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 271 
 
 glands, — each secreting a fluid of the same character, — 
 the saliva, in quantity sufficient to soften the food for 
 mastication, and to keep the tongue, fauces, sides of 
 the mouth and lips moist and flexible. Such is their ac- 
 tivity, that several ounces are ordinarily collected in the 
 course of one meal. Each gland has a duct leading into 
 the mouth : — the motion of the jaws in chewing and 
 swallowing contributes to the flowing of the fluid. 
 
272 
 
 anatomical class book. 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 Above the muscles, and directly under the skin, is a 
 spongy layer called cellular substance, the cells of which 
 are filled with fat. This cellular covering is enormously 
 thick in whales, and denominated the blubber, which 
 keeps the animal warm. Above this is the true skin, — 
 smooth and delicate on its external surface, but of a looser 
 texture on the under side, where it forms a union with the 
 cellular substance. This true skin is teclmxcalhj called 
 cutis vera. It is profusely supplied with blood vessels, 
 and so numerous are its nerves, that the point of a needle 
 can no where be inserted without wounding one of them. 
 
 As all the nerves finally run towards the surface of 
 the body, it has led some to the opinion that the true skin 
 was a tissue of nerves and vessels, so intimately inter- 
 woven as to constitute a highly sensitive envelope for the 
 body. The color of the true skin is nearly the same in 
 all races of men, — being as white in the negro as in the 
 European. 
 
 BETA MUCOSUM. 
 
 There is spread over the true skin an extremely thin 
 layer of paint, of the consistence of thin size, — which 
 has received the name of reta mucosum, and on this wholly 
 and entirely depends the color or complexion of the indi- 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 273 
 
 vidual. In the negro, this mucous paste is jet black ; in 
 the Indian copper colored ; in the Spaniard yellowish, 
 but white in the white variety of our species. This pig- 
 ment is constantly flowing out upon the skin, to defend its 
 irritable surface against the combined influence of the air, 
 light and heat. These agents, however, exert an action 
 upon the mucous coloring, which dries, becomes hard and 
 insensible, and is continually wearing off, and as con- 
 stantly renewed. 
 
 SCARF-SKIN. 
 
 A familiar example of the scarf-skin, the exterior coat 
 of all, is observable in blisters. It is totally insensible, 
 rough and by no means of a uniform thickness. In the 
 palms of the hands and soles of the feet, it becomes prodi- 
 giously thickened, to defend the tender parts below. This 
 scarf-skin is constantly wearing off, and as constantly re- 
 newed, and hence it is inferred that it is really nothing 
 more than the rete mucosum, thrown off by the action of 
 the excretory vessels. 
 
 The query may arise, why, if this is the case, are not 
 the palms of the negro’s hands perfectly black? They would 
 be so, if the scarf-skin in them had not lost its vitality. 
 When the negro has suffered from a severe burn, the 
 mouths of the ducts, which poured out the coloring matter, 
 are sealed up by the subsequent inflammation, so that no 
 more paint is thrown out, — • and the scar remains white. 
 The reason is plain, — the true skin, which is white, is 
 no longer obscured by the black pigment. 
 
 Rouge, pearl powder, cream of almonds, milk of roses, 
 cologne, spirit of wine, and, indeed, the endless catalogue 
 of cosmetics, which are sold in the shops with the ostensi- 
 ble object of beautifying the skin, are abominable impo- 
 sitions, which ought to be interdicted by a strict police 
 regulation, till the happy period arrives when common 
 
274 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 sense is more frequently exercised on the subject of per- 
 sonal appearance. The skin cannot be made permanently 
 whiter, — nor can the hair be stained without injuring it; 
 — a roseate tint cannot be given to the cheek by any pre- 
 paration, that will be abiding. All this class of pretended 
 beautifying articles positively injure the skin, leaving it 
 rougher ; and in old age, in consequence of their habitual 
 application, the face is more thickly wrinkled, and the 
 complexion assumes the hard dead color of bronze. Still 
 worse, the pores are deranged in their functions, and dis- 
 ease may be induced by the absorption of some of the 
 ingredients of those noxious importations, which were 
 never good for any thing but to fill the manufacturer’s 
 purse at the expense of those who are willing to be the 
 dupes of their own folly. Cold water is truly a cosmetic — 
 and should be used exclusively. 
 
 The physiology of the nails, which are supposed to be a 
 production of the scarf-skin, — is not well understood. — 
 Writers have not given a satisfactory explanation of their 
 origin or growth. 
 
 With respect to the hair, its growth bears a striking 
 analogy to vegetables, — inasmuch as it rises from a bul- 
 bous root, imbedded in the skin, into which a gelatinous 
 fluid is secreted. It would be entirely unnecessary to de- 
 tail the opinions of authors on the subject, or to be very 
 particular in relating our own. Hereafter, the physiology 
 of the skin, nails and hair will become the topic of a dis- 
 tinct essay, — with reference to the abuses of the toilet. 
 
ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 275 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is Adenology ? 
 
 What is the use of glands ? 
 
 Where is the diaphragm ? 
 
 What organs are contained within the chest? 
 
 What is the object of respiration ? 
 
 How do insects breathe ? 
 
 Is breathing involuntary in reptiles ? 
 
 Where is the organ of voice located ? 
 
 How is the larynx formed? 
 
 Where are the vocal cords found ? 
 
 What musical instrument does the larynx resemble ? 
 What is the object of the thoracic duct? 
 
 How is the abdomen bounded ? 
 
 What is the omentum? 
 
 Where is the liver placed ? 
 
 Where is the gall bladder found ? 
 
 Is the use of the spleen known ? 
 
 What is the function of the pancreas ? 
 
 Where are the kidneys lodged? 
 
 What is the shape of the stomach ? 
 
 How is digestion performed ? 
 
 What is chymification ? 
 
 What is the use of the saliva? 
 
 How many coats has the stomach ? 
 
 What is hygrology ? 
 
276 
 
 ANATOMICAL CLASS BOOK. 
 
 What are the lymphatics ? 
 
 Is any fluid found in the brain ? 
 
 What organs supply fluid to the mouth ? 
 
 On what does the color of the body depend ? 
 
 What do you understand by the true skin ? 
 
 Where is the rete mucosum secreted ? 
 
 Why is a negro black ? 
 
 What is the scarf-skin ? 
 
 How is the hair produced P 
 
 Are the nails a production of the skin ? 
 
 Where is the sense of touch most perfect P 
 Why are there valves in the intestinal tube? 
 
 Where is the gastric juice formed? 
 
 Where are the lacteal vessels ? 
 
 What becomes of the nutritious part of the food ? 
 
 Are there openings to the stomach ? 
 
 What is the use of bile or gall ? 
 
 Of what service is the liver ? 
 
 How are the intestines kept in place ? 
 
 Where is the cellular membrane ? 
 
 Are the lungs separated in the chest ? 
 
 How are the tones of the voic'e varied ? 
 
 What is the glottis ? 
 
 What prevents food from falling into the wind-pipe ? 
 What is the epiglottis ? 
 
 By what organs is the voice modulated? 
 
Anatomy, . . . 
 
 Anatomy, comparative, 
 Angiology, . 
 Adenology, 
 
 Arm bones, 
 
 Antagonists, of muscles. 
 Absorbents, 
 
 Auricles, 
 
 Artery, coronary, 
 Alveus communis, 
 Arteries of the brain, 
 Arteries of the face, 
 Arteries of the thigh, 
 Artery of the arm, 
 
 Air tubes, 
 
 Auditory nerve. 
 
 Aorta, . 
 
 Aqueous humor, 
 Abdomen, '. 
 Bursology, 
 
 Bones in the Skeleton, 
 Bones in the skull, 
 Bones in the face, 
 
 Bone of the tongue, 
 Bones of the trunk, 
 Bones of the hand. 
 Bones of the leg, . 
 Bones of the foot, 
 
 Bones of the nose, 
 Breast bone, 
 
 Bones of the loins, 
 Busks, 
 
 Blood in muscles, 
 
 24 
 
 Page . 
 
 Blood, eirculation of, . 115 
 
 Brain, insensible, . 158 
 
 Brain of worms, . . 160 
 
 Brain, structure of, . 156 
 
 Breathing of fishes, . 247 
 
 Breathing of shell fish, 248 
 
 Both eyes see but one object, 232 
 Cylindrical bones, . 2 
 
 Clavicle, ... 5 
 
 Connexion of bones, . 9 
 
 Cheek bones, ... 16 
 
 Carpus, ... 28 
 
 Corsets, .... 40 
 
 Cutting teeth, . . 41 
 
 Chewing tobacco, . . 42 
 
 Catalogue of muscles, . 59 
 
 Cavities of the heart, . 122 
 
 Compound lever, . 191 
 
 Carotid artery, . . 134 
 
 Capillaries. . . . 140 
 
 Contraction of arteries, . 142 
 
 Circulation of the blood, 145 
 
 Crassamentum, . . 149 
 
 Color of the blood, . 149 
 
 Cerebrum, . . . 153 
 
 Coverings of the brain, 155 
 
 Caterpillar, . . . 246 
 
 Clam, .... 248 
 
 Cause of voice, . . 257 
 
 Cosmetics, . . . 273 
 
 Cochlea, . . . 196 
 
 Coats of the eye, . . 209 
 
 Ciliary processes, . . 213 
 
 Page. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 26 
 
 57 
 
 97 
 
 126 
 
 131 
 
 192 
 
 137 
 
 136 
 
 139 
 
 141 
 
 245 
 
 197 
 
 130 
 
 216 
 
 258 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 16 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 40 
 
 58 
 
278 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Choroides, 
 
 Page. 
 
 210 
 
 Cornea, . 
 
 . 211 
 
 Cataract, 
 
 219 
 
 Convex spectacles, 
 
 . 228 
 
 Concave glasses, . 
 
 230 
 
 Cross-eye, 
 
 Distortion of the bones, 
 
 . 233 
 
 37 
 
 Double heart, 
 
 Double heart, plan of . 
 
 121 
 
 125 
 
 Diastole of the heart, 
 
 . 130 
 
 Dorsal nerves, 
 
 166 
 
 Drum of the ear, 
 
 . 182 
 
 Dr Darwin’s opinion of 
 
 deaf- 
 
 ness, 
 
 192 
 
 Diagram of the heart, 
 
 . 147 
 
 Dura mater, 
 
 155 
 
 Diaphragm, 
 
 . 243 
 
 Deafness, partial, . 
 
 202 
 
 Deafness, permanent, 
 
 . 202 
 
 Epiphises, 
 
 3 
 
 Enamel of the teeth, 
 
 41 
 
 Extensors of the toes, . 
 
 106 
 
 Ear, 
 
 . 175 
 
 External ear, 
 
 176 
 
 Ear wax, 
 Eustachian tube, 
 
 180 
 
 185 
 
 Error loci, 
 
 . 150 
 
 Ear, diseases of, 
 
 201 
 
 Ear ach, 
 
 . 201 
 
 Eye, . . 
 
 205 
 
 Flat bones, 
 
 2 
 
 Finger bones, 
 
 29 
 
 Female skeleton, 
 
 36 
 
 Friction, prevention of, 
 
 57 
 
 Face, muscles of, 
 
 60 
 
 Fascia of the arm, 
 
 91 
 
 Fluids, 
 
 115 
 
 Frog’s heart, 
 
 . 126 
 
 Force of the auricle, 
 
 129 
 
 Food-pipe, 
 
 Growth of the bones, 
 
 . 257 
 
 . 35 
 
 Greater circulation. 
 
 124 
 
 Glands of the ear tube. 
 
 . 181 
 
 Gall-bladder, 
 
 260 
 
 Globe of the eye, 
 
 . 206 
 
 Hygrology, . 
 
 2 
 
 Hip bones, 
 
 24 
 
 Hand, bones of, 
 
 28 
 
 Heart of vermin, 
 
 . 119 
 
 Heart of fishes, 
 
 119 
 
 Heart, shape of, 
 
 Page. 
 
 122 
 
 Heart-case, 
 
 132 
 
 Heart-case, use of, . 
 Hearing of insects, 
 
 132 
 
 176 
 
 Hydrocanthiri, 
 Humors of the eye, . 
 
 246 
 
 216 
 
 Hair, .... 
 
 272 
 
 Instep, .... 
 
 32 
 
 Involuntary muscles, 
 
 53 
 
 Irritability of muscles, 
 
 56 
 
 Influence of the nerves, 
 
 59 
 
 Imposition in bone setting, 
 
 107 
 
 Internal cords of the heart, 
 
 126 
 
 Intercostal nerves, 
 
 157 
 
 Involuntary nerves, 
 
 163 
 
 Intestines, 
 
 263 
 
 Image inverted in the eye, 
 
 231 
 
 Iris, .... 
 
 212 
 
 Joints, 
 
 114 
 
 Jugular vein, . 
 
 139 
 
 Knee, security of, 
 
 103 
 
 Kidneys, 
 
 261 
 
 Lower jaw, 
 Ligaments, 
 
 17 
 
 45 
 
 Ligaments of the knee, 
 
 46 
 
 Ligaments of the hand. 
 
 47 
 
 Ligaments of the foot, . 
 
 48 
 
 Lumbar abscess, 
 
 75 
 
 Lacing, 
 
 77 
 
 Latissimus muscle, . 
 
 82 
 
 Lesser circulation, 
 
 124 
 
 Left heart filled at death, 
 
 124 
 
 Little bones of the ear, 
 
 188 
 
 Little brain, 
 
 Lobes of the brain, . 
 
 153 
 
 154 
 
 Lungs, 
 
 243 
 
 Lizards, aquatic, 
 
 249 
 
 Lungs of reptiles, 
 
 249 
 
 Lungs of frogs, 
 
 250 
 
 Language, 
 
 253 
 
 Larynx, 
 
 254 
 
 Liver, .... 
 
 258 
 
 Lens, crystaline, . 
 
 218 
 
 Myology, 
 
 2 
 
 Metacarpus, 
 
 28 
 
 Muscles, physiology of, 
 
 50 
 
 Muscles, number of, 
 
 51 
 
 Muscles, shape of, 
 
 52 
 
 Muscles, two orders of, 
 
 55 
 
 Muscles never weary, 
 
 55 
 
INDEX. 
 
 279 
 
 Page. 
 
 Muscles of the ear, . 64 
 
 Pleura, 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 148 
 
 Muscles of the neck, 
 
 66 
 
 Pancreas, 
 
 
 260 
 
 Muscles of the jaws. 
 
 66 
 
 Pupils of albinos red, 
 
 
 234 
 
 Muscles of the throat, 
 
 70 
 
 Ribs, 
 
 
 21 
 
 Muscles of the abdomen, 
 
 72 
 
 Roots of teeth. 
 
 
 41 
 
 Muscles of the pelvis, 
 
 74 
 
 Round window, 
 
 
 186 
 
 Muscles of the chest, 
 
 76 
 
 Rete mucosum, 
 
 
 270 
 
 Muscles of the back, 
 
 80 
 
 Syndesmology, 
 
 
 2 
 
 Muscles of the arm, 
 Muscles of the thigh, 
 
 86 
 
 Splanchnology, 
 
 
 2 
 
 96 
 
 Skeleton, 
 
 
 3 
 
 Muscles of the foot, 
 
 104 
 
 Sesamoid bones, 
 
 
 3 
 
 Motion of the heart. 
 
 123 
 
 Structure of bones, . 
 
 
 9 
 
 Mechanism of the nerves. 
 
 158 
 
 Seivebone, 
 
 
 13 
 
 Musical ear, 
 
 200 
 
 Sutures of the head, 
 
 
 13 
 
 Membrana Nictitans, 
 
 226 
 
 Spine, 
 
 
 18 
 
 Names of muscles, 
 
 101 
 
 Shoulder, 
 
 
 25 
 
 Nerves of the thigh, 
 
 102 
 
 Small waist, 
 
 
 38 
 
 Notions of the ancients, 
 
 117 
 
 Sugar, effects of on teeth 
 
 42 
 
 Nerves of the heart, 
 
 131 
 
 Suspended animation. 
 
 
 58 
 
 Nerves, 
 
 Nerves of the foot. 
 
 153 
 
 Strength of the right 
 
 arm, 
 
 87 
 
 158 
 
 Supinator muscles, . 
 
 
 92 
 
 Nerves of the arm, 
 
 168 
 
 Sole of the foot, 
 
 
 109 
 
 Nerves accompany arteries, 
 
 163 
 
 Single heart. 
 
 
 120 
 
 Nine pair of nerves, 
 
 164 
 
 Spinal marrow, 
 
 
 157 
 
 Nerves of the face, 
 
 168 
 
 Sympathetic nerve, 
 
 
 173 
 
 Nerves of the eye, 
 
 169 
 
 Senses, 
 
 
 175 
 
 Nerve of the tongue, 
 
 171 
 
 Semicircular canal, 
 
 
 187 
 
 Nymphs of gnats, 
 
 246 
 
 Stapes, 
 
 
 189 
 
 Nerves of a perch. 
 
 247 
 
 Spiracula, 
 
 
 245 
 
 Nearsightedness, 
 
 229 
 
 Spallanzani, 
 
 
 244 
 
 Neuts, 
 
 250 
 
 Spleen, 
 
 
 260 
 
 Osteology, 
 
 2 
 
 Stomach, 
 
 
 263 
 
 Os frontis. 
 
 10 
 
 Seeing in the dark. 
 
 
 235 
 
 Occipital bone, 
 
 12 
 
 Seeing in water, 
 
 
 235 
 
 Os hyoides, . . . 
 
 18 
 
 Smelling, 
 
 
 240 
 
 Olfactory nerves, 
 
 167 
 
 Socket of the eye, 
 
 
 206 
 
 Optic nerves. 
 
 167 
 
 Sclerotica, 
 
 
 209 
 
 Oval window, 
 
 186 
 
 Scarf skin, . 
 
 
 271 
 
 Oyster, how it lives on land, 
 
 248 
 
 Teeth, number of, 
 
 
 4 
 
 Omentum, 
 
 258 
 
 Temporal bone, 
 
 
 12 
 
 Optic nerve, 
 
 222 
 
 Tear bones, 
 
 
 17 
 
 Processes, 
 
 3 
 
 Tibiae, 
 
 
 31 
 
 Palate bones, 
 
 17 
 
 Thigh bone, 
 
 
 31 
 
 Periosteum, 
 
 34 
 
 Teeth, 
 
 
 41 
 
 Practice of muscles, 
 
 54 
 
 Tendons, 
 
 
 57 
 
 Pronator muscles, 
 
 92 
 
 Two sets of blood vessels. 
 
 123 
 
 Power of the left heart, 
 
 124 
 
 Tube of the ear, . 
 
 
 179 
 
 Position of the heart. 
 
 133 
 
 Tympanum, 
 
 
 184 
 
 Primative artery. 
 
 135 
 
 Tasting, 
 
 
 141 
 
 Pia mater. 
 
 156 
 
 Thyroid Cartilage, 
 
 
 255 
 
280 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Thymus gland. 
 
 Page. 
 
 257 
 
 Thoracic duct, 
 
 . 258 
 
 The eye adapts itself to distan- 
 
 ces, 
 
 . 237 
 
 Tears, 
 
 227 
 
 True skin, 
 
 . 270 
 
 Upper jaw bones, 
 
 16 
 
 Vertebrae, 
 
 19 
 
 Voluntary muscles, 
 
 53 
 
 Ventricles of the heart, 
 
 . 126 
 
 Vena cava, 
 
 127 
 
 Valves of the heart, 
 
 . 130 
 
 Vestibule, 
 
 . 191 
 
 Veins, . . , 
 
 143 
 
 Veins of the leg, 
 
 Page. 
 . 144 
 
 Vitality of the blood, 
 
 148 
 
 Viscera of the chest, 
 
 . 142 
 
 Voluntary respiration, . 
 
 244 
 
 Vermin, 
 
 Voice of animals, 
 
 . 245 
 
 251 
 
 Voice of man, 
 
 . 253 
 
 Vocal strings, 
 
 256 
 
 Valves of the intestines, 
 
 . 264 
 
 Wall bones, . 
 
 12 
 
 Wedge bone, . 
 
 12 
 
 Wrist, bones of. 
 
 27 
 
 Wisdom teeth, 
 
 41 
 
 Warm blooded animals, 
 
 120 
 
»• 
 


 $£ 
 
 ,v/'':- : “-^V-V':"'.^' 
 
 V* 
 
 w^imm 
 
 i»i 
 
 li/fc* ? 'il* .V 
 
 
 
 ;v'/vv 
 
 ' T i;'.'*ri **' 
 
 SP 
 
 sUsa